8&'

 
 
v.
       MANUAL
          FOR

  MAGNETIZING,
        WITH THE
     ROTARY AND VIBRATING

MAGNETIC MACHINE,
        IN THE

Dnodynamic Treatment of Disease*

   NINTH EDITION, ENLARGED.
       AND EEVISED.

  BY H. H. SHERWOOD, M. D.
:■ 'tffa fa:
       new york:
wu.ky and vdtnam, 101 bkoidwai.
        1847. 
      \NBE


film  ^o.5A^6,no..2>
  Entered according to act of Congress, in the year 1844, by
        HENRY HALL SHERWOOD, M.D.,
In the Clerics office of tbe District Court for the Southern District
                of New York. 
  I

XT..'
 i. .) ' .'
PREFACE
  Ft may be useful and interesting to the read-
ers of this little manual, to receive in it a con-
cise  history of the rise  and progress of the
Magnetic practice in  diseases,  both as it re-
gards the  discovery  of  the new  symptoms
which we have demonstrated, and the appro-
priate treatment which we have consequently
pursued.  Such an history will at  least con-
vey some idea of the  time and  labor required
to resist the authority of established systems of
error, and check their career of  mischief, even
when the clearest truth is brought to  oppose
the most manifest absurdities.

  It  is  now thirty-four years  since we first
discovered the Magnetic symptoms of tubercu-
lar disease of the organs and muscles, on
which we  founded a magnetic  treatment of  a
large class  of chronic diseases.   These symp- 
4
toms are very simple, invariable, easily undtr-
stood, and practised with facility andmrtainty,
without asking a question, or having the lea#1
previous knowledge of the cases.

  The  treatment  thereupon  adopted,  was,
from the first, successful; and has consequent-
ly abounded with evidences of its propriety so
conclusive  and forcible, that  no disinterested
physician could evade them in conscience, or
neglect them in practice, without incurring the
reproach of  all who  had candidly examined
them.  Notwithstanding the notoriety of thesR
practical proofs, and  the circulation  of mor*
than 20,000 copies of various works which wt
have written upon the subject; and notwith-
standing the advancement of medical and phi-
losophical science in Europe is daily and hour-
ly contributing an almost meridian splendor in
illustration and estimation of  these important
aids to the cause of our common humanity,—
yet the professors of our Medical Colleges and
Schools, prizing the  verde  antique  of thehr
very errors and  barbarisms,  above  all  the
dawning intelligence  of  an  age so fertile in
universal improvement, continue to teach the
uncertain, exploded, and ever varying  astro-
logical  symptoms of  this  class of diseases,
with all the complacency of tranquil ignorane*
and irresponsible authority. 
s
   In this Manual the profession and the pub-
lic are furnished with further, and the  most
incontrovertible evidence of the truth  and va-
lue of  the  principles and practice which we
have so  long adopted.   This additional evi-
dence has  been  developed in the use of the
New         Magnetic Machine  in  a great
number and variety of cases.

   The extraordinary rapidity with which this
instrument is conquering the prejudices and
captivating the convictions of the most truly
learned, and intellectual members of  the pro-
fession, seems to warrant the triumphant con-
clusion, that it  will ultimately effect a com-
plete revolution  in the practice  of medicine
and surgery.

   The magnetic symptoms to which we have
alluded,  make a natural  division of diseases,
into four classes, viz:—

   I. Acute  diseases of the serous surfaces of
the body, including the skin.
   II. Chronic disease of the serous surfaces.

   III.  Acute disease of the mucous  surfaces
of the body, including the alimentary  canal.
   IV.  Chronic disease of the raucous  sur-
faces. 
6
  The action of the rotary magnetic machine
on these different surfaces, confirmn the cor-
rectness of this classification, which rmplifies
the practice of physic and surgery in tlx« most
extraordinary manner, and elevates the «tudy
and practice of medicine from a very uncer-
tain, and  consequently ever-chapging  art, to
the character, dignity and rank of a science.

  In addition to magnepathy or the magnetic
practice of medicine, we have added  to this
little work a very full synopsis of the homoeo-
pathic practice from the best authors, and also
a very full synopsis of the oldalopathy prac-
tice from the beet writers of the  last year or
1846, from which the  practice of the different
systems can be seen and compared with great
facility,  and either one  adopted,  or each in
succession ; or they may be combined as cir-
cumstances may require. 
CHAPTER  I.
 magnetic Organization of the Human
                 System.
   It has been truly said, that " life itself, is
 only known  to us empirically.  We acquire
 a knowledge of disease, in the same way; and
 the same method is adopted in the cure f and
 it may be doubted whether we shall advance
 much in a scientific knowledge of diseases,
 or of the remedies for  them, until we  first
 obtain a scientific knowledge of the organi-
 zation which constitutes animal  life.   We
 have a very accurate knowledge of the anato-
 mical or animal organization, but none what-
 ever  of the invisible motive powers  which
 constitute animal life.   Few, very few  phy-
 sicians ever had  any conception of even the
 existence of such an organization—yet  there
 cannot be motive power without it.  We can
 •see the ropes, the levers, and the pulleys, by
 which motion is produced, but nothing of the
 spiritual, sympathetic, and invisible forms that
 use them for the purposes of motion—yet it is
 on  these  forms,  in  the  different organs  and
 other structures,  that the immaterial or spirit-
 ual powers of medicines act; and  it was the
obvious importance of a knowledge of these
 forms that induced us,  many years since to
commence  an investigation of this  subject. 
8
which has at  last resulted in a development
of their organization.
   We commenced with the brain, and traced
by the direction of its fibres,  an organization
representing five magnetic  poles; two in the
organs of causality, two in the organs of ama-
tiveness, and a very large one in the centre of
the brain,  requiring at  least two magnetic
axis,  which must cross each other in the cen-
tre of that organ
 
9
   When the heart is laid open and distended
m a circular manner (d d, walls of the heart;
e e, septum or  division between  the  auricles
and ventricles; //,  pericardium,) as  seen in
this figure, it is found by the manner in which
it is constructed to have four large poles in its
circumference; a a, and c c, the axes of which
cross  each  other  in  the  centre  pole  of the
heart, like those of the  circumference of the
brain.   The forces from the poles, a a, radiate
along the ligaments or braces, called calumna
cornea, to the sides of the ventricles; b b, and
the forces also radiate from  the  poles in the 
10
auricles c c, along their ligaments, as seen  in
the figure: all of which  are first expanded
and then contracted in the  motions of the
heart,  by the action of the forces from the
poles.
  The number and situation of  these  poles
are, from this view of the construction of the
heart, so self-evident as to preclude the neces-
sity of a solitary remark ; but it may be asked
if the motions of the heart are produced by
the action of these poles upon its  muscles,
from whence are the  forces derived which
sustain these poles;1 *
  The answer is, from the serous and mucous
surfaces of the body, which are  maintained  in
negative and positive state,  for such  purposes
■—the serous, including the  skin supplying
the  positive, and the  mucous,  including the
alimentary canal, the negative force, which
are  conducted to  the  poles  in  the organs
through the nerves  ia these surfaces—the ne-
gative poles  attracting the positive force, and
the positive  poles the negative.
  It is a matter of common observation that
magnetic poles of the same denomination repel,
and those of opposite  denominations attract
each other;  and  in order to  ascertain the
 * Magnetic poles cannot  be long maintained, any
wheje, without a constant supply of these forces from
some source. 
11
degree of force with which they repel and at-
tract, it is found by experiments, conducted on
the most rigid principles of inductive philoso-
phy, that  they repel and  attract  each other
with a force proportioned  to  the  quantity of
these forces in given spaces, or the spaces they
occupy.   It is also ascertained, in the same
manner, that when  they repel, they  expand,
as seen in the case of  iron filings  attached to
poles of the same denomination.
  And when they  attract, they contract, as
seen in the  case  of iron  filings  attached to
poles of opposite denominations, with a force
proportioned to their quantities in the spaces
they occupy.   The  two poles,  then, of the
same denomination in the opposite hemis-
pheres of  the brain  may,  through the spinal
nerves  attached to  these hemispheres, expand
one set of muscles on one side of the  body,
limb, or organ, at the same time that those of
the opposite denomination contract the antago-
nist  muscles on the other; for the muscles,
like the  organs and nerves,  are  necessarily
double, for the  purpose of producing motion
by their simultaneous action.
  They may also  expand one set of muscles
by the  repulsive, and contract their antagonists
by the  attractive force, in  the same way that
one metallic wire is expanded with the repul-
sive, and another contracted with the attractive 
12
force.  Thus when, by the  mere exercise  ol
an inclination, excited by a sensation, we in-
cline to expand one set of muscles to extend a
limb, we  incline to contract their fellows  at
the same time; so that when one muscle ex-
pands  its fellow necessarily  contracts;  and
when another contracts its fellow expands.
  These  motions called attracting and repel-
ling are,  in  other words,  the  pushing and
pulling motions; and if motion is produced  in
man and other animals by the action of these
forces, we ought to be able to recognise the
same motions in the fluids of the body, wheth-
er aeriform or aqueous, and also in the organs
by which they are moved.
  On a minute  examination of this subject,
we  find that in  the formation of the organs,
the same order is observed  in the distribution
of the membraneous surfaces as in the forma-
tion of the external and internal surfaces  of
the body.   The brain, heart, lungs,  stomach,
intestines, liver, spleen, kidneys, uterus, and
cystis,  are all covered with  a serous mem-
brane,  and their inner surfaces are  lined with
a mucous membrane.  On observing the ac-
tion of the air and of the  lungs  in breathing,
we instantly recognise those motions.
  In reflecting on the great power  which it
was necessary to give to the  heart, it  was  easy
to see that the diagram or plan for its  construe- 
13
tion must conform to that necessity   This
consideration, however, presented no difficul-
ties;  for the sources from which  it  might
derive the necessary strength and durability,
under the action of these  forces, were  abun-
dant, and we accordingly find its strong mus-
cles supported by braces and  surrounded by
additional  membranes,  presenting  extensive
surfaces for the accumulation of these  forces.
  On an attentive examination  of the action
of this organ, and of the motion of the blood in
the arteries, we again recognised these motions
in both, in the  clearest manner.
  The heart is constructed and acts on  the
principle of the pump; the  fluids being attract-
ed through the veins and other absorbent ves-
sels in  steady  streams  to  the heart, with an
intensity of force equal to that with which the
ventricles repel them through the arteries.
  Every repulsion of a fluid, in elastic bodies,
produces expansions, and every attraction is
succeeded by contractions of these bodies,  ac-
cording to a  law of these  forces, viz :  repul-
sions expand,  and  attractions  contract with
powers   proportioned to   their quantities  in
given spaces.
  Every repulsion  of  the  heart  repels   or
pushes the fluids in the arteries, and  every
attraction pulls the fluids in the  absorbent
vessels. 
14
  The motions of the pulse correspond exactly
with these laws and these motions; for every
repulsion is succeeded by an expansion in the
artery, and every attraction by a  contraction
of it.   The same  phenomenon is found in the
nose of the fire engine when in motion.  The
water  moves  in the hose from the cistern or
fiydrant in a steady stream to the engine,  and
from  the engine  through the hose with the
motions of the pulse.
  Sensations and inclinations, like repulsions
and expansions, and attractions and contrac
tions,  are attributes  of  these forces.  The
inclinations belong to the sensations, whether
repulsive or attractive,  as the expansions do
to the  repulsions, and the contractions to the
attractions, and  follow them in  the same
order.
  These spiritual, or male and female forces,
are innate in every kind of matter,  without
possessing any character in common  with it,
whether it be ponderable or imponderable;
and  in their  organized or magnetized state.
they were the foundations on which  mat-
ter was laid, in  the  formation of the solar
system, and  of  the mineral, vegetable,  and
animal kingdoms.  Repulsions,  expansions,
attractions, contractions,  sensations,  inclina-
tions,  sympathetic action, motion, and form,
are then, in this order,  the attributes of these 
15
forces, by which that system and  these king-
doms were  formed with  a precision, and
adorned with a beauty, that defy imitation.
   Nothing can therefore equal the adaptation
of these forces to produce  such results; for
besides  their  unlimited  power, which can
make a world tremble  like a leaf, the great
velocity of their motions and their almost in-
conceivable  tenuity, enable  them to penetrate
the most minute orifices, and construct an infi-
nite variety of bodies of every form and size,
and produce motion in the smallest structures
with the same geometrical accuracy as in the
largest.
   These views  of  duodynamics,  or  moving
powers in animate and inanimate matter, may
at first appear very strange and unaccountable
even to men of science who have  little or no
knowledge of this subject, and I may therefore
direct their  attention to  another example  of
the repelling  and expanding and attracting
and  contracting  powers  of those forces,  in
illustration of these views, and which  may
be seen and  tested  in  the  most satisfactory
manner in the recently discovered process  of
gilding metals by the action  of these forces in
solutions of  gold.
   I may also direct the attention of physicians
and surgeons  to the experiments  of  Doctors
Laroche and Crusell, of St. Petersburg, pub- 
16
 Lushed in  the  Dissector,  in which  cataracts
 were formed in the eye with the attractive and
 contractive force, and were afterwards dispel-
 led, in two minutes, with the repulsive and
 expansive force, and which cannot fail to sug-
 gest to them not only the  great importance of
 a knowledge of the magnetic  organization of
 the human system,  but also of the  magnetic
 character of their remedies for  diseases.
  The following is a diagram  of the magnetic
 organization of the organs of the human Dody,
 as traced by the rotary magnetic machine:

  A A,—Poles  in the  organs of causality
 a a,—Poles in the organs or amativeness, Ar-
 bor  vita?,   b,—Cervical glands,  c c,—Lungs.
 d d,—Mammae, or breasts, and  heart,  e,—Sto-
 mach. /,—Spleen,  g,—Liver,  h  h,—Kid-
 neys, i i,—Ovaria.  j,—Uterus,  m,—Cystis.
 n,—Arbor  vitge.   a  n,—Axis  between these
 poles.
  The importance of a knowledge of the mag-
netic  organization of the  human system, is
greatly  increased  by the  introduction  of  the
Rotary Magnetic Machine into practice, as it
is on  that organization  which  the instrument
acts.  In magnetizing the organs, it  is neces-
sary, in most cases, to place one of the buttons
 on the posterior spinal nerves  connected with
 them, while the  other is  moved over  the or- 
 
13
gans.  In some cases, however,  one  button
should be placed directly over one pole of an
organ, while the other is over the spinal nerve
connected with it.   There are other cases, in
which one button  should be placed over  the
pole of one organ,  and the other over the pole
of another organ;  and again, there are cases
in which one button should be placed over
one pole of one organ, and  the other over an
organ of the  brain,  ijflere are also many
cases in which the buttons must be  placed
over different phrenological organs, and hence
the necessity of a knowledge of their relative
situations.
   We have traced these poles through  the
spinal nerves, under  a very moderate power
of the instrument, and also direct magnetic
axis, between poles of the same and of differ-
ent and distant organs, as seen in the above
figure; which accounts for  the direct sympa-
thies that are known  to exist between distant
organs, in the  most satisfactory manner.  The
direct magnetic connexion  between the  sto-
mach and spleen, and the spleen and left kid-
ney, accounts  also for  the introduction  of
some fluid into the kidneys, through a medi-
um other than that of a general circulation.
   There are other large poles in the abdomen,
besides those represented in  the above figure
«i-there are two in the solar plexuses, and two 
19
in the mesentery, surrounded with satellites.
There are also two poles in each joint, includ-
ing those of the  spinal column* with axes con-
necting antagonist muscles, a knowledge of
which, and of these muscles, is indispensable
to a scientific and successful application of the
buttons, in magnetizing for  lateral, anterior,
and posterior curvatures of  the  spine, acute
and chronic rheumatism, paralysis, &c

             DUODYNAMICS.
  The symptoms we  have introduced  to  dis- •
tinguish chronic tubercula or chronic  disease
of the serous surfaces, are always present in
acute diseases of these surfaces, and  depend
entirely upon the action of two forces, or upon
the duodynamic  or moving powers of the sys-
tem.  They are founded  upon  the fact that
these  forces act in unison in health, but are
interrupted in disease—the signs of which are
distinguished with facility and certainty, with-
out any previous knowledge of the case.
  The absence  of  these symptoms, and the
presence of disease in  the organs, limbs, or
other  structures,  determine, with the same fa-
cility  and  certainty,  disease of  the mucous
surfaces, acute or chronic.
  The duodynamic treatment we have intro-
duced, is founded on  the  fact that motion is
interrupted or lost  in some part of the body,
  • There is also a large pole in the middle of ft palm of each
 band, and a larger one in the bottom and hoi!  v 01 each foot 
20
organs, or limbs, and cures the disease in re-
storing the interrupted or lost motions, by the
action of two forces, emanating from different
kinds of matter, and acting on  the  same, or
different surfaces of the body, organs, or limbs.
These symptoms are prominent  and uniform
in their character, and reduce  and bind down
the classification of diseases  to the narrow
limits of acute  and chronic diseases of the
serous, and of the mucous surfaces, or to four
classes,  orders,  genera,  and species, and the
duodynamic treatment of diseases which we
long since adopted, supports and sustains this
classification in the most steady  and success-
ful  manner,  and presents a  strong contrast
with the old never  ending classification and
ever varying symptoms and treatment.
  The posterior spinal  nerves are connected
with and  terminate in the serous membranes
or serous  surfaces of the  body,  organs, and
limbs, including those of  the  skin and fasciae
of the muscles,  &c, and are the media of sen-
sation; while the  anterior motor nerves are
connected  with  and terminate in the  mucous
membranes, or  mucous  surfaces,  including
those of the fasciae of the muscles, the bron-
thia and  the alimentary canal,  and are the
media,  only, of the forces which  produce
motion.
  These different arrangements of the nerves 
21
of motion and those of sensation, account for
the absence of the magnetic symptoms in dis-
ease of the mucous surfaces.   Insensibility in
these surfaces is as necessary to the main-
tenance of animal life, as sensibility is in the
serous surfaces.   The  most intense inflamma-
tions of the mucous surfaces produce no pain.
There is never any pain in these cases with-
out an extension of the disease to the serous
surfaces;  yet our modern medical writers con-
tinue to repeat the tales of their grandfathers
about the great  and wonderful sensibility of
the mucous surfaces.
  Acute or inflammatory diseases, run through
their course in a few  days, or a few weeks;
while chronic diseases continue not only many
months, but many years.  The excitement of
the system in the first is exalted and continu-
ous, or has brief remission or intermissions,
while in the last it is depressed and periodical
or accidental, with  long periods of repose of
many weeks or  months, and  is consequently
as different as darkness is from light; yet the
modern astrologers  of  the  schools, like their
ancient masters who were  priests, physicians
and astronomers, class them all as inflamma-
tions of different degrees,  and treat them  as
such.  Our modern astrologers  also  follow
their ancient masters in pretending to distin-
guish these diseases by feeling the pulse, the 
22
aspects of the tongue and urine, and the color
and odor of the stools, &c.
  There is however nothing more  uncertain
than these signs or symptoms,  unless it is the
treatment founded upon them, as is well known
to our faculty: yet they are taught as a science
with all the  gravity due to these subjects, in-
volving  life or death.  On the contrary there is
nothing  more  certain, than the magnetic symp-
toms, or the duodynamic treatment founded on
them, in the absence of accidents not under the
control of the  physician; yet such is the attach-
ment of men to old systems—the old astrolo-
gical symptoms and treatment will continue
to be taught by the professors in our medical
colleges as long as they are of any value  in
their market.
  Acute and  chronic tubercula, or inflamma-
tory, and chronic diseases of the serous mem-
branes, or serous surfaces of the body, organs
or limbs; including the skin and facia  of the
muscles, is easily and invariably distinguish-
ed by pain more or less severe (in proportion
to the intensity of  the  disease) produced by
pressure on the ganglions of the spinal nerves,
in the intervertebral spaces along each side of
the spine without any previous knowledge of
the  case—no matter  what name may have
been given to the disease by physicians, noso-
legists, or other medical writers 
Ganglions of th« spinal nerves in
     the intervertebral spacea*
 There are 7 cervical vertebra;, C ; 12 dorsal, D ; and 6
lumbar, L ; these verte'crre wlfh the o:- oxyN,m; con-
stitute the sjxinal column 
24
  Press on the sides of the 1, cervical verte-
brae to find symptoms of tubercula of the head
—of the brain, throat, nose, eyes, or ears.
  Press on the suies of the 2, 3,4, 5, 6 and 7
cervical to  find tubercula  of  the muscles,
(Rheumatism) or of the vertebrae, or of the
joints of the limbs—white swellings, &c.
  Press on  the  sides  of the intervertebral
space between the  7 cervical, and 1 dorsal,
to find tubercula of the lungs, and
  Press on the left side  of the  same space to
find tubercula of the heart.
  Press on  the space between the 1 and 2
dorsal vertebra to find  tubercula of the sto-
mach.
  Press on  the  space between the 2 and 3
dorsal to find tubercula of the duodenum.
  Press on the right side of the space between
the 7 and 8  dorsal  to  find tubercula of the
liver.
  Press on the spaces between the 11 and 12
dorsal to find tubercula of the small intestines.
  Press on the spaces between  the 12  dorsal
and first lumbar  to find tubercula of the kid-
neys.
  Press on  the spaces between the  1  and 4
lumbar to  find tubercula of the uterus.
  Press on  the spaces between the 4 lumbar
and os-coxyx to find tubercula of the ovaria,
prostrate gland, vesicular seminales, and testes.
  Press on the spaces between the  4 lumbar
and os-cocyx, to find tubercula of vagina, &c. 
25
 ^ We always press with the thumb of th»
right hand on the intervertebral spaces of the
left side of the spine, and with that of the left
hand on the intervertebral spaces of the right
side.*
   These directions will enable any person of
common sense to distinguish tubercular dis-
ease with facility and  certainty, without the
aid of a physician.  Negative matter, as the
acids and the metals should be the principal
ingredients in the preparations of medicine foi
disease of the serous surfaces, and should be
used in connection with the action of the ro-
tary magnetic machine.

     DISEASES OF THE  MUCOUS
               SURFACES.

   Acute and Chronic diseases of the mu-
cous surfaces  are invariably distinguished by
the presence of disease of the body, organs or
limbs, and the absence of the magnetic symp-
toms ; and require for their reduction a treat-
ment  entirely different from  that of tubercular
disease of the  serous surfaces.  Positive mat-
ter, as the  alkalies and the gums, should be
the chief  ingredients in  the  preparations  of
medicine for diseases of the mucous surfaces,
and should be used  in  connection with the
action of the rotary magnetic machine.
  ♦ The profeston in onr medical institutions have commenced
teaching these symptoms. 
26
       CHAPTER  II.

ROTARY MAGNETIC MACHINES.
  We  commenced magnetizing with a rotary
magnetic machine in December, 1843.   It
was  worked by hand, and is constructed in
the manner represented in the following figure
  When the wheel is turned, the armature of
soft iron, wound with copper wire, strikes the
poles  of the magnet S, which  elicits shocks
and sparks of fire, while brass cylinders, con-
nected (A  B,) with the armature and poles ot
the magnet, by copper wires, are  held in the 
27
hands, to receive the shocks.  The machine
is one of great power, but it required a man
constantly at the wheel, without the means of
regulating its power with exactness, and we
consequently obtained another kind of Rotary
Magnetic Machine represented in the follow-
ing figure—
which is  run by a magnetic battery, and its
power easily regulated.
  The length of the  machine, including the
battery, is 16 inches, its width 4, height 5
inches,  and  the  weight  of the  whole, the
case and buttons, for magnetizing, about eight
pounds.
  The extraordinary results which we obtain-
ed in magnetizing with the machine construct-
ed in this manner, induced many persons to 
28
purchase it; but its size and weight, together
with its liability to get out of order, conjoined
with the complaints frequently made of  diffi-
culty in running it, gave us great inquietude.
We consequently determined to obviate these
objections if possible,  and have at last, by em-
ploying a jeweller extensively known  in the
Union, as having no  superior in this  city, to
make the machine under our direction, suc-
ceeded in our object   It has a new and con-
venient arrangement, as represented in  the fol-
lowing engraving, and to distinguish it  from
other machines we have named it the
SAVAGE ROTARY MAGNETIC  MACHINE.
^,""Ct:v£-:::*-^a,^<i^
The Savage Rotary Magnetic Machines are 
29
of different sizes, and are fitted into neat ma-
hogany cases,  including the battery.   The
case of the first size is  ten inches long, five
wide, and  three deep.   The second size is
eight inches long,  four wide, and three deep.
The third size is seven inches long, three wide,
and  two and a half deep.   The  fourth size
is six inches and a half long, three wide, and
one  and a half deep.   The instruments  are
set on the covers  in magnetizing, as seen in
the figure, and are made in a very superior
style; are jewelled and run in the best manner.
  A, case; B, the cover; C, sheet copper
vessel;  E,  sheet copper, the lower edge  of
which  is soldered on the bottom  of  the cop-
per vessel C; D, copper piece connected with
the zinc between the copper surfaces, contain-
ing a solution of sulphate of copper; F, cyl-
inder of copper wire;  G, magnet and arma-
ture ; e, e, conductors  to the armature:  c,
negative, and a, positive button for magneti-
zing.
  The solution of  sulphate  of copper  (blue
vitriol)  in  which  the  zinc  is  suspended,  is
slowly decomposed by the action  of  the zinc
and  copper surfaces upon it, when the free
sulphuric acid  attacks the zinc and forms a
sulphate of zinc.   While these changes are
in progress two forces are evolved,—one from
the copper, which is  the negative, and the 
30
other from  the  zinc,  which  is the  positive
force.  The negative force is conducted alon£
the wire  connected  with the copper vessel,
and the positive force is  conducted along the
wire connected with the zinc between A C.
The negative force  passes directly into the
cylinder of  copper wire, and  the  positive di-
rectly to the armature, when it moves on its
axis by the action  of these  forces—one of
which—the  negative  which repels, moves
from  the  battery, and  the positive  which
attracts, moves to it
  The positive button c, it should  be  remem-
bered, is always on  the right, and the nega-
tive  c, on  the left hand, as we stand  fronting
these machines.   It  should also be  remem-
bered that the negative force, or that from the
negative button c, is  30 or 40 per cent strong-
er than that from the positive button a.
  The power of the instrument is regulated
by moving the piston in the cylinder.  It in-
creases from its  minimum  to its  maximum,
with the distance of the piston in the cylinder 
31
VIBRATING  MAGNETIC MACHINE.
  Practice has shown that the silver conduc-
tors  to the armature of the Savage Rotary
Magnetic Machine will wear offin five or six
months,  if the machine be kept in constant
motion  every day,  in  consequence   of the
great velocity of the armature: when it be-
comes necessary to replace them, and as a
goldsmith or other mechanic may not always
Be at hand for  that purpose, we have  direct-
ed our attention to the construction of a less
complicated movement, and have succeeded in
our object.  We have substituted a spring, as
seen in the above  figure, which vibrates so
fast as to make the motion of the forces con-
tinuous.  The  power of the  instruments is
also  greatly increased, and, with the continu-
ous motions of the forces, makes them greatly 
32
superior to the rotaries, or any other instru*
ments for magnetizing.  We have also made
other important improvements connected with
these machines, in which no expense has been
spared to  render them everything that  could
be desired for the purpose for which they are
intended.
  The construction of these  machines is so
simple as to  make any instructions for run-
ning them apparently unnecessary. We may,
however, observe, that the solution of sul-
phate of copper, with which the instrument
is run, should be a saturated  solution,  or as
strong as it can be made, and should be  pour-
ed into and nearly fill the  space surrounding
the zinc; when, on adjusting  the conducting
wires from the battery to  the instrument, as
seen in the above engraving, the armature or
spring will commence vibrating, if the screw
presses moderately upon it.
  If the pressure, however, is very strong,
strike the spring downwards with the end of
the finger, when it will vibrate, unless  the
screw presses too hard.
  A. very little attention to the effect of  the
screw  upon the action  of the spring, will
enable any person to understand it, and to see
that the intensity of the forces from the ma-
chines may be varied by the screw, as well as
by the piston. 
33
   When we have finished magnetizing a pa-
tient, the zinc is raised from the solution, and
set on a copper projection made for that pur-
pose, to prevent the farther action of the fluid
upon it. The fluid may remain in the copper,
as it does not act upon it.
  There should constantly remain in the so-
lution  undissolved blue vitriol, to insure its
steady maximum strength, as it only dissolves
as fast as  the  solution becomes weak by the
action of the zinc upon it.
  When  the zinc becomes  thickly  coated
with sediment,  it should be scraped off with a
case-knife;  and when the instrument is run
constantly every day, the  solution should be
poured  out of the copper  into a pitcher, and
the sediment washed out of the copper once a
week.   The  old solution  should then  be
poured into  the copper, and blue vitriol and
water  added, if necessary,  to increase  the
strength and quality of the fluid.
  The  power   of  the  instruments  is  so
great, as to make  it necessary  to observe
the greatest caution in regulating their power
to the  weakest standard,  before the buttons
are applied  to  the  head or  stomach of any
person.  The power may then be gradually
increased to a degree that can be easily borne,
by moving the piston.                   .
  There are regular degrees of susceptibility
to the influence of the forces  from magnetic
                   3 
34
machines, like those from the clairmatiser or
mesmeriser.  There are some  persons who
are so susceptible to the influence of the forces
from the instruments, as to make it necessary
to remove the piston, and to use the then al-
most inappreciable forces with the greatest
caution; especially in magnetizing the brain.
In these cases the positive button  should be
held upon the neck by a third person, or held
in the left hand  of the patient, while the mag-
netizer takes the negative in his left hand, and
makes passes with his right hand over  the
forehead.    Such patients bear with  ease a
much greater power when magnetized in this
manner, and we  frequently magnetize  the
other organs, as well as the limbs, in this way,
or by placing the positive  button  over  the
 fanglion of the  spinal nerve, and having it
 eld there, while  passes  are  made  with
the right  hand  over the diseased organ  or
limb.   Little children are also magnetized in
this manner with great facility,  and the effect
is at the same time more soothing and salu-
tary.
   The vibrating machines will be found great-
ly superior to the shocking machines for mag-
netizing in  this manner, as well as every
other;  for the  influence of the forces from
these  machines is much more  salutary, and
there is a great saving of time in magnetizing. 
35
  A very simple improvement is made in the
batteries  of these machines,  especially for
office use.   It  consists in making a round
hole of about a quarter of an inch in diame-
ter,  through each side of the inner copper
dish in which the instrument is packed.  The
sulphate  of  copper (blue vitriol) is   then
thrown into the dish, and water poured on to
it, and when the Water becomes fully saturat-
ed, the remaining sulphate of copper will dis-
solve slowly, or only as fast as the  solution
becomes  weakened  by its action upon the
zinc. The strength of the solution is kept up
very steadily in  this way, as long as there is
undissolved sulphate in the dish, and operates
like a sustaining battery
   In magnetizing, the wires sometimes break
near their connections  with the buttons, and
also near their connections with the machine,
when the ends of the wires must be unwound,
and then fastened as before, so that the  bare
wires will be  in contact with the metals to
which they are attached.
   The hole which connects the wire with the
zinc sometimes becomes thickly coated with
sediment, which must  be removed, so that the
metals may come in contact.
   It has heretofore  been the great object of
those who have before planned or construct- 
3G
ed Magnetic Machines, to make them in a"
manner to obtain the greatest or most severe
shocks, and for  this purpose, large machines
or instruments were supposed to be necessa-
ry, and those ideas were  very  natural, espe-
cially  in those having large organs of mar-
vellousness.  They proceeded upon the erro-
neous  principle  " that  the greater  the  ma-
chine the  greater the power,'' or  that  the
power increases pari-passu with  the  size of
the machines, whereas  the reverse of this
proposition  is true; for  the power of these
instruments increases  as their  size decreases
—other things being  equal, as is seen on a
comparison  of  the old  machines with  the
Savage instruments.   The  motions of  the
forces  from  the  latter are  continuous and
agreeable, and produce  the most violent  ac-
tion  of the muscles and of the poles  of  the
organs, without the severe and painful shocks
of the former, which  are more or less injuri-
ous, and  always very unpleasant to  adults,
and  are borne with great difficulty by chil-
dren.
  The figure drawn below the engraving*is
intended to represent the direction of the for-
ces as they proceed from the buttons in mag-
netizing—a, the  negative  button, repels and
* Page 28. 
37
expands, while the positive button 6, attracts
and  contracts.   Besides the  negative  force
exerts an alkaline, and the positive an acid
influence  upon the fluids  and solids of the
body, and hence the importance  of  a  scien-
tific application of the buttons in diseases of
the different membranes, or of the serous and
mucous surfaces.
  The form of the buttons for magnetizing,
and  the  different kinds of metals of which
they are made,  is a matter of some import-
ance.  Brass cylinders were  connected with
the machine, and held in the hands to show
the power of  the  instrument, before we ap
plied the buttons seen in the figure.   It was
then a mere toy, but is now an important and
indispensable  instrument in the treatment of
diseases.   Besides these  buttons, we  have
found other forms  very useful in magnetizing
the eye,and in some cases  of disease of the
uterus, urethra, &c, and these are now for-
warded with the machines according  to order

  Effects of  the Vibratory Magnetic
               machines.
  In describing the effects of these machines
in the former editions  of this work, we were
very cautious in  our  commendations of this
new mode of treating  diseases,  as  a suffi-
cient time had  not elapsed since we  com- 
38
merged magnetizing with these  msvnraei te
to obtain a full and unbiased view of the sub-
ject.   We had  many  doubtful  cases under
treatment, the result of which could not then
be  known.  Among these there were some
of the worst cases of distortion of the 6pine,
and lumbar abscess in children, of  from one
to eight years old, we have ever seen.  Some
of these cases were complicated with disease
of the sacrum, hip joint, mesentery or lungs.
Some of the worst cases are now cured, and
all the others are  so far advanced in the cure,
as to leave little doubt of their entire recovery.
   The great  number of  lateral curvatures of
the spine, and the extraordinary effects of the
machines  in  these cases, continue to excite
the greatest interest.  The cases  we  are now
magnetizing   have continued  from  one  to
twenty-eight years, and many of them are of
. the worst description, yet they are all advan-
cing to an erect  position.  In some of  these
cases the  extent  of the  curvatures has been
so great as to cause a  displacement of the
heart, lungs, stomach, spleen and intestines.
 The heart beats in the right, and is not  heard
 in the left side, while the left lung occupies
 its  position.  The stomach and spleen are
 depressed, and crowded  into the left or right
 side, and displace the  intestines,  but as the
 •pine becomes  more erect, they gradually re 
39
sume their natural  positions.  These are all
cases of tubercular disease of the muscles,
or rheumatism, in which white swellings are
often formed  under,  over and  around,  the
shoulder blades, on the hips—the 6ide of the
lumber vertebrae, and sometimes on the lower
extremity of the spine.
  Young females who have rheumatism, are
always in danger of such a deplorable result.
The disease is easily distinguished; for if a
person has rheumatism—no matter what part
of the body or limbs is affected  by it—pres-
sure with  the  fingers upon the intervertebral
spaces of  the  cervical vertebrae  will produce
pain more or less severe, in proportion to the
intensity of the disease.   In cases of rheu-
matism, acute  or chronic,  affecting the head,
face or limbs,  the machine  is, and  will con-
tinue to be, invaluable.   Nearly all the cases
of dizziness in the aged, are cases of rheu-
matism, and are the premonitory symptoms
of palsy or apoplexy, which may be easily
reduced, and their lives prolonged by  the use
of this  instrument.   Rheumatism may,  and
does attack, one or both hemispheres of the
brain, as it does a  finger,  hand  or arm,  and
may paralyze  them in the same manner, or
the spasms from this cause may be so strong
as to rupture the blood vessels of the brain,
as they frequently do; when the blood flows 
40
into the sinuses, and ventricles, or forms  de-
Ksites in its substance, as every physician
  ows, who distinguishes  diseases  by  the
magnetic symptoms.
  In  all the cases of disease of the organs
the machine is  of  great service, and  in  some
cases it is indispensable to a successful treat-
ment, among which are some cases of amen-
orrhea, chlorosis,  leucorrhcea, and prolapsus
uteri, ike.
  We have used the instrument in one severe
case of bilious  fever  with great  success.   It
reduced the pain in the head, stomach, liver,
and back, with the paroxysms of fever, in
the most prompt manner.  In examining  this
case,  severe pain was produced by pressure on
the sub-occipital nerves connected with  the
brain, and pressure on the  ganglions of  the
spinal nerves,  in the  intervertebral  spaces
connected with the stomach, liver, secum, and
small  intestines,  produced  the  same  effect,
showing it to be a case  of acute  tubercula of
the serous surfaces of  these organs, instead
of a case of gastro-enterete, or acute disease
of the mucous surfaces of these organs.—
These magnetic   and  invariable  symptoms
which point to the disease, like the needle to
the pole, are always present in bilious, re-
mittent, congestive, yellow,  and nervous fe-
vers.   We have always found them in  every 
41
case we have seen from  the great lakes, to
the Balize in the  Gulph of  Mexico, and we
have published and circulated more than 20,
000  copies of different medical  works, in
which  these symptoms are delineated; yet
the professors of Astrology  in  our Medical
Colleges call these fevers, cases of disease of
the mucous surfaces of the stomach  and in-
testines, from the aspects  of the tongue and
urine, and the color and odor of the stools, as
in other cases of disease, and continue to teach
such nonsense to the students  of medicine.
They have even had the address to induce
grave legislators (tell it not in Gotham) to pass
laws to prevent any person from practising
physic until his  head was full  of  such ab-
surdities, as seen by their sign manual.
   In two cases of paralysis, in consequence
of prostrated fever; one of the entire left arm
and hand, and the other of the extensor mus-
cles of the left leg; the machine has had the
happiest effect.
   The first was  a case of a little girl  aged
eight years.  She had bilious fever when she
was four years old,  during which  time the
left arm was observed to be  paralysed; since
which  time it hung  by her side like a rag
without the least power  in the  muscles of
her arm, hand or shoulder.
   On the first application of the buttons  to 
42
the hand and shoulder;  about two  months
since she raised her elbow  two or three  in-
ches, and she can now  flourish a cane with
the same hand.
  The second case was that of a young gen-
tleman aged twenty  years.  He had bilious
and then  typhus fever,  more  than  a year
since, and when beginning  to  recover,  found
he was unable to raise the left leg.   Various
remedies were resorted to including the spring
and bandage, without  the  least effect.  We
commenced  magnetizing the  leg about  ten
weeks since under  the  full  power of  the
machine, which he bore every day  without
the least uneasiness, or  any  apparent effect
during three weeks.   He however soon  be-
gan to raise his toes, and  then his foot,  and
next his leg, and in about eight weeks from
the time we first commenced magnetizing him
lip began to walk without his cane.
   A recent but bad case  of paralysis,  of the
right  arm, of a mechanic aged twenty-eight
years  was cured with the action  of  the  ma-
chine  in about  two  weeks.   We have  also
apparently cured in the same way, four cases
of  recent and partial paralysis  of  one side of
the face,  in one of  which  there was slight
paralysis of the right arm and  leg.
   These cases of paralysis were not compli-
cated with disease of the organs, and required 
43
no  medicine.  We have also had  three or
four cases of paralysis of the muscles about
the ankles, approaching what is called club
feet that required no medicine, but nearly all
of the other cases we have had since  we com-
menced magnetizing with the machine have
required medicine.
  We  have  tried faithfully to cure chronic
diseases of the organs with the  machine alone,
but have  failed in every case  of any import-
ance, and were at last  compelled to  resort to
the aid of medicines applicable to the cases,
when the disease has  given way, and such
patients have recovered  their healths  much
sooner than they  have  before when under the
influence of medicine alone.
  Besides many recover when in the last stage
of the disease, who could not do so under  the
influence of medicine alone.
  We have also observed the daily  effects of
the machine alone, on  tubercular and  mu-
cous disease of the throat and eyes, and also
its  combined action with medicine  in  these
cases where we  could see, as well  as hear,
of the daily and weekly progress of  the cure,
so as to be able to form a more correct  prog-
nosis of the progress of the cure in the lungs
or  other organs,  and  the  results  have been
so  palpable as to leave no doubt of the great
importance  of combining the  action of  the 
44
machine, with other remedies in diseases ol
the brain, throat, heart,  lungs, stomach, in-
testines, liver, kidneys, and  uterus, as well
as diseases  of the spine,  muscles and joints
of the limbs.
  On a comparison  of  the effects of the ma-
chine in a great number and variety of cases,
it appears that its extraordinary effects must be
imputed mostly to its power of restoring lost
motion, by its action upon the magnetic or
ganization of the system.
  In acute or inflammatory diseases the mo-
tion  of the forces  along the membranes or
substance of an organ, are obstructed at some
point,  when the motions  of the fluids  in the
Blood vessels, are instantly impeded and accu-
mulate around that point and distend it  The
forces  from the machine  if soon applied, re-
establish the motions  of  the forces in the
membrane  or substance;   and consequently
the motions of  the  accumulated  fluids, and
health is  re-established in the most prompt
manner.
  In  chronic diseases, the phenomena pre-
sented to us are very different.  The motions
of the forces along the minute lymphatic and
absorbent  vessels of the  serous  surfaces be-
come obstructed, when  the  motions of the
fluids in these  vessels are impeded, and ac-
cumulate in them and in  the lymphatic or se- 
45
Creting glands and distend  them, or the  fol-
licles or excreting glands of the  mucous sur-
faces are distended in  the  same manner.—
The strength of the magnetic organization of
the glandular system  of these  different sur-
faces of an organ, limb, or other structure is
consequently  increased;  while   that  of  the
general organization of the system is decrea-
sed in the same proportion; for the strength
of the  body or of a  limb,  depends entirely
upon the strength of  their magnetic organi-
zation; The muscles being the  mere pullies
and ropes by which it moves the body, head,
eyes, or limbs.
  Besides, acute diseases announce their ad-
vent, as thunder does  a storm, while chronic
diseases advance stealthily and  slowly,  and
rarely excite the attention of their victims—
guardians, or  their attendant  professors of
Astrology, until these tuberculations in  one
case, and  vegetations, in the other, have gam-
ed great advantages in  age  and  strength, and
it must consequently, and does require a much
longer time to reduce and restore lost motion
in these regular organizations,  than that of
mere accumulations of  fluids, as  in the case of
acute diseases.
  If, however, we commence magnetizing in
the first stage  of  chronic diseases,  they  are
reduced very fast as in the  cases of tubercu- 
46
lar disease of the throat and lungs, and there
is no reason why physicians should not do so
as there is now no difficulty in distinguishing
chronic diseases with facility and certainty in
the first as well as the last stage.
   Besides  restoring  lost  motion   the  Vib-
ratory  Magnetic Machines  (at least)  opens
the  pores  of  the skin,  and increases  the
strength, and these effects of these instruments
are very constant, and uniformly  noticed by
these patients.
   In nearly all  the  cases we  have magneti-
zed including the case of fever, we have found
it necessary to use medicine of some  kind, or
that indicated by the disease, and such patients
have not only recovered much faster than they
usually do under the old treatment, but a great
many entirely recover their health in  cases in
which the common alopathic and homoeopathic
remedies and a great variety of quack  medi-
cines have entirely failed. 
47
              CHAPTER III.

    Observations on  Magnetizing-.
   The buttons  and the spinal  nerves.  In
magnetizing for disease  of  the  organs, we
have directed the positive button to be placed
over the ganglion of the spinal nerve  connec-
ted with the organ; and as this is a matter of
great importance we have given an engraving
(page  23) to aid the magnetizer  m  placing
the burton.  The cervical, dorsal, and  lumbaia
vertebrae, or joints of the neck, back and loins,
are numbered and may  always  be  referred
too; yet  the novice should  always attain a
habit of  pressing on the  intervertebral spaces
to ascertain the precise  spot for  the button,
until he has learnt to determine it by the eye;
for there will  always be found a tenderness
there proportioned to the  intensity  of the dis-
ease in the organ.   Having  found the place
for the button, the figures (page 17) represent-
ing the outlines  of  the organs, will also aid
the novice in determining their relative posi-
tion, and in the application of the buttons in
other  cases to which we have referred. If
however the magnatizer should have doubts
in regard to the spot where the button should
be  placed in any  obscure case, the negative
button should then  be placed and moved over
the diseased organ, and  passes made at the 
48
 same time with the positive  button  over a
 number  of intervertebral spaces that will be
 certain  to include  that which is connected
 with the diseased organ.
   Preparation for magnetizing.   In magne-
 tizing for diseases of the chest, stomach, liver,
 spleen or kidneys, the entire clothing should
 be  removed or  stripped down as far as the
 hips; for it is impossible to magnetize in a
 thorough and scientific manner, without such
 a preparation.  The same course must always
 be pursued in magnetizing for lateral curva-
 tures, and distortions of the spine.  In tuber-
 cular disease of the  lungs it  is a matter cf
great importance to move the negative button
over the entire surface  of the chest, from the
neck to the lower points of the shirt rile, 1 oth
in the front, back and sides of it, as well as
in the axilla or arm pits.
  When the negative button has been passed
over the entire surface  of the chest, with the
positive button  on the spinal nerves connec-
ted with  it, or  with the lungs, this last 01
positive  button  should  be  placed on  the
tongue, while the negative button is  moved
again over the entire surface of the chest as
in  the  case  of  chronic  bronchitis.   The
tongue should be run out as far as possible,
when the patient  should take the button in
hand, and press  it hard  upon the tongue un- 
49
Jer a moderate power of the instrument, while
the magnetizer moves the other over the en-
tire surface of the chest.
   Every  day's   experience  is  adding new
proofs of the  great importance of magneti-
zing  the lungs in this disease, and no motives
of a  false delicacy in females should be al-
lowed to interfere to prevent the free action
of the buttons in the manner we have descri-
bed.
   Spine.   In  magnetizing in cases  of lateral
curvatures of  the spine, the preparation must
be the same as above described; for it is very
hard  work to magnetize in these cases, and
the magnetizer must  have free access to the
muscles of each side, as well as those  of the
back, and should not be encumbered with the
dress  of the patient.
  Rheumatism.   There  are many  cases of
this  disease  in  which the preparation for
magnetizing should be the same as that in
disease  of the  organs, as there are many
more  cases of this  disease than is  dreamed
of in  the philosophy of the astrologers of the
schools.
  There are  also cases of rheumatism,  and
also of disease  of  the hip joint, and white
swellings, and caries of the thigh and knee,
in which patients  must  be undressed  in  a
manner to enable the magnetizer to place one
                   4 
50
button over the lumbar vertebrae, and hip*
while the other is passed over the thigh, hip,
or knee.

         Chronic Tubercula.
CHRONIC  DISEASE OF THE SEROUS SURFACES.
      Tubercular disease of the organs.
  In  the notice of the effects of the Rotary
Magnetic Machine, in the  April number of
the Dissector, we suggested the probability of
its  great importance in the  incipient stage
of  tubercular consumption, from the  results
obtained  in the  few cases, in which we had
then used it.  Further trials, in more than 100
cases,  have  not only  confirmed that opinion
but have shown it to be very useful in the
last stage,  especially  in promptly reducing
the pleuro-peripneumony that often attends
tubercular  disease  of  the  lungs.   In  many
cases it lessens the cough and expectoration,
by  reducing  the  mucous  disease  of  the
bronchial tubes  that traverse the tubercula-
tions.
  In magnetizing  the  lungs, the button con-
veying the weakest, or positive force, is pla-
ced over the  posterior spinal nerves connect-
ed  with them,  in  the  intervertebral  spaces,
between  the 7th  or last servical, and first
dorsal vertebrae, while  the  other, or negative 
51
button, conveying the  strongest force, is mo-
ved  slowly over the front part of the chest,
with the instrument graduated to a moderate
power.   This practice is adopted in consump-
tion  or  pneumonia, for the  purpose  of first
exploring the lungs to find  the  place  most
diseased, as the action of the instrument will
be much more sensibly  felt when  the button
passes over it, and it will require more mag-
netizing than other parts of the lungs.   The
positive  button is then placed on the tongue,
and  the  negative moved over the  entire sur-
face of  the back  part  of the  chest.
  In exploring the chest, and in magnetizing,
whether for  disease of the  lungs, heart, or
pleura, the positive button should be  placed
over trie  left intervertebral space in magneti-
zing the left side of the chest, and over the
same space on the other side in magnetizing
the right side of the chest.  In such  cases
the process is continued  only  from 5 to 10
minutes, and  once a day is generally  suffi-
cient.
   Tubercula of the heart—hypertrophy.  In
this  case  the negative button should be pla-
ced below the lower apex of the heart, where
it may remain 10 or 15 minutes, or it may be
moved over that region under a very moderate
power of the instrument
  Pleurisy,  Acute or Chrome   In  these 
52
cases the negative button should be placed
over the seat of  the disease, or place where
the pain is felt, under a very moderate power
of the instrument,  and the other on the place
above described.
   Tubercula of the Stomach—Dyspepsia.—
In magnetising the stomach, the  positive but-
ton is placed over the space between the first
and second dorsal vertebra, and the negative
over the pit of the stomach.
   Tubercula of  the Duodenum.—In magne-
tising the duodenum, the positive button  is
placed over the space between the second and
third dorsal vertebra, and the negative two or
three inches below, and on the right side of
the pit of the stomach.
   Tubercula of the Colon.—Place the positive
button over the space between the third and
fourth dorsal, and make passes with the other
downwards over the stomach and bowels.
   Tubercula of the liver—acute or  chronic
disease  of  the liver.   The  positive  button
should  be  placed  over  the intervertebral
space of the right  side, between the   7th
and  8th, dorsal  vertebra, while the other is
moved slowly around one half of  the body,
from the pit of  the stomach  below the  short
ribs to the spine, and then over the short  ribs.
   Tubercula of the spleen—acute  or chronic.
The positive button should  be placed on the
opposite side of the spine, to that in the  case 
53
of the liver, and  the other button over the
left side as in the case of the liver.
   Tubercula of the large intestines.   The
positive button must be placed over the inter-
vertebral space, between the 5th and 6th dor-
sal vertebrae, and  the other over  the  intes-
tines on  the right and left side, as indicated
by the seat of the disease.
   Tubercula of the small intestines.   The
positive  button should  be  placed over the
intervertebral space,  between  the  11th  and
12th dorsal vertebrae, and the other over the
front  part  of the  abdomen, right  or left of
the medium line, as indicated by the seat of
the disease.
   Mesenteric Diseases.   In these  cases the
buttons should be  placed over the spine and
abdomen, as in the instances of the large and
small intestines.
   Kidneys.   In  tubercular  disease of  the
kidneys—acute or chronic, the  negative but-
ton should be placed over the intervertebral
space between  the  12th doisal  and  l6t lum-
bar vertebras, and the other over and below
the pubis.
   Ci/sfis..  The positive  button  should  be
placed over the same intervertebral spaces as
in cases of  the kidneys, and the  other over
and below the pubis.
   Prostrate Gland.  In these cases  the poo- 
54
tive  button should be placed over the inter
vertebral space, between the last  lumbar ver-
tebrae and the os-coccyx, and  the other  over
and above the penis.
   Uterus.  In magnetizing this organ,  the
positive button should be placed over the in-
tervertebral spaces, between the  1st  and 2d,
and 2d and 3d lumbar vertebrae, and the other
over  the vulva below the pubis.
   Ovaria.  In tubercular disease of  the ova-
ry, the breasts, or mammae are not of the
same size—that on the same side of  the dis-
eased ovaria  being larger than  that on the
opposite  side, in consequence of atrophia of
the  latter  from  direct sympathy  with the
diseased ovaria.   The  positive button should
therefore be placed over the atrophied breast,
and the other over the ovaria of  the  opposite
side.—The same course should be pursued in
chlorosis, amenorrhoa, &c.
   Leucorrhaa.   The positive button  in these
cases, should  be placed  over tbe interverte-
bral space, between the last lumbar  vertebra
and  os-coccyx,  if tenderness  is elicited by
pressure there, otherwise it will  be found in
the lumbar vertebrae, over which this button
must be placed.   In  the  first  case the  nega-
tive button should be placed over the  front
and upper part  of the perineum, and in the
last over and around the pubis. 
55
  Prolapsus  uteri.   Magnetise  the  uterus
daily, as  directed in page 54.  Introduce  a
small piece of very fine sponge of the size of
an  egg  into  the upper  part  of  the vagina,
with a string six inches long, tied around  its
lower end, in  cases  of  married ktdies, and
then inject into the vagina once a day, a so-
lution  of acetate  of  iron.  Give mag.  gold
pills.  Specific.
  In tubercular disease of the stomach ani.
uterus—the  positive  button should be placed
over the  intervertebral  space, between tlu
1st and  2d dorsal,  and the  other  over th«
pubis, in consequence of the  direct sympathj
between these organs.
  In tubercular disease of the cerebellum and
uterus—the  negative  button is  placed  on
the organ of amativeness,  on one  side, and
the other on the opposite side of  the pubis,
and we should here observe  that females can
and should mageatize themselves, in cases of
disease  of the  uterus, and vagina, &c, and
should  never  allow  a  physician  to do  so
while they have strength to do it themselves,
or can procure the assistance of a female.
  Bra ii.   Tubercular  disease of  the  brain
is distinguished in  an  instant,  by the pain
produced by the pressure on the  sub-occipital
nerves, on the sides of the space between the
head and first cervical vertebrae, or joint of the
neck, in the abscence of tubercular disease of
the throat.   It  may  also be  distinguished by 
30
the pain darting into the brain, when the dis-
ease is  in its active state, or by  severe pain
in the head, in the absence of  an injury.  In
magnetizing this  organ,  we should  always
observe  the greatest  caution,  and  always
commence with the weakest power of  the
instrument.
   Sick  head ache.  The positive button is
placed over the organ  of amativeness, and
the negative over the  organ of  causality on
the opposite side  of  ths head,  and moved
quickly over that side of the forehead, when
the positive  button is placed over the oppo-
site organ of  amativeness,  and the negative
over the opposite  organ of  causality,  and
moved over  that side  of  the forehead as  be-
fore.  The sitting is thus concluded generally
in less than  one minute.
   In head  aches—other than these that  are
periodical,  and called sick  head ache,  we
place the negative button over various organs
as indicated by the pain, or seat of  disease,
while  the  positive button  is moved around
the neck.
   Tic douloureux.  The positive button is
 placed over the plexus of nerves,  in front of
 the ear, when the other is placed over the
 pain of the face, under a  strong power of
 the instrument.
   Strabismus—Squinting.  The positive but 
57
 ton is placed over and pressed in to the cor-
 ner of the eyelid over the paralyzed muscle,
 and  the other  over  the opposite  corner of
 the eye,  and the  sitting  concluded in  one
 minute.
   Eye.   Diseases  of   the  eye, acute  and
 chronic.—The negative button is placed over
 the eyelids  in these cases, and the other over
 the back part of the neck.
  Nose.   Diseases  of the nose, acute or chro-
 nic.   The negative button is placed over the
 nose  in  these cases, excepting  polypus, in
 which case  the buttons are reversed.
  Antrum.   In case of disease of the antram
 the negative button  is placed  over the antrum,
 and the other over the neck.
   Tooth-ache.   The negative button is placed
over the diseased tooth, and the other in front
 of the ear.
   Throat.   In  diseases of the throat, acute,
or chronic, the  buttons  are  placed on the op-
posite sides of  the neck, under  the ear, and
moved slowly towards  the  chin, or the posi-
tive over  the sub-occipital  nerves, and  the
other  on the side of the throat.
  Muscles   Tubercular disease of the  mus-
cles—Rheumatism, acute or chronic.—Pain
is produced  by pressure  on the intervertebral
spaces of the cervical   vertebra, which in- 
58
creases with the intensity of the disease;  and
in magnetizing for rheumatism  the positive
button should be placed  over the back part of
the neck, at the commencement, and at inter-
val! during the process—no matter  whether
the disease  is in  the arm,  finger, leg or toe,
and  the  other  should  be  placed first in  the
hollow of one foot, and  then in the hollow of
the other;  sometimes the positive button may
be held  in the palm  of  one hand, while  the
other is held in the hollow of  the  opposite
foot, or over the point of pain, if any, in joint
or limb.
  Paralysis.  In cases  of  paralysis, patients
should be magnetized in the same manner as
in rheumatism.
   Chorea.  St. Vitus' dance—Tubercular dis-
ease of  the cerebellum.  The negative  but-
ton should be placed over the organ of ama-
tiveness, while the  other  should be  placed
on the affected limb, or limbs, of the opposite
side.
  Epilepsy.  Tubercular disease of  the cere-
bellum.—The  negative button  should  be
placed over the cerebellum, and the positive
on the neck or ear of the opposite side
   Catalepsy.   Tubercular  disease of the ver-
miform  process, in  the  medium line  of the
cerebellum, (organ of motion.)  In these cases
the positive button should  be  placed ovep the 
59
first cervical vertebrae, and the other over the
organ of individuality.
   Deafness.  Tubercular disease  of  the  eus-
tation tube.—In these cases, the positive but-
ton should be  placed on the  nose   and the
other in the ear.
   Joints and Limbs.  Tubercular disease of
the  joints and  limbs—white swellings,   in
these cases both buttons  are  moved  over and
around these swellings, and along the limbs,
whether in a sound or ulcerated state.*
   Spine.   Tubercular disease of the spine—
distortion of the spine—distortion of the spine
and lumbar abscess.  The buttons are appli-
ed around and  over the  distortions, and ab-
scesses, as in the case of white swellings, and
along the whole length of the spine.
   Spine.   Lateral curvatures of  the spine—
We have had 67 cases of lateral curvatures
of the spine from the 1st of  April to the 8th
of Oct. 1844, in which there was a great va-
riety in the form of the curves, and a great
difference in the time since they commenced
as well as of  their  ages.  The time of their
existence  was from 1 to 28  years, and their
ages from 8 to 53 years.
   The time required to straighten  a spine, or
make it resume  its natural position depends so
much  upon the circumstances attending each
individual case, as the form of the curve the
   • In the meantime « magnetic pluter it applied to  then
 •welling!. 
60
time of its existence, and the health  of the
patient, &c., as to make it necessarily very
uncertain.
  The first object to be obtained is to lessen
the action of the tuberculated muscles on the
posterior side of the  curves, and increase  it
in the paralyzed muscles on the other, to ena-
ble  us to matke the spine pass  the centre and
curve in the opposite direction, under the ac-
tion of  the buttons.
  When this object is attained and  we can
make it pass the  centre at each  sitting, the
muscles will  soon  maintain it in its natural
position.  In twenty-two cases in which the
curvatures had existed from one to two years,
they passed the centre the first sitting, while it
has required more than two months to effect
this object in five cases of long continuance—
The muscles  are always swelled, thickened,
or tuberculated on the  posterior side  of the
curve,  (as  seen in the  following engraving)
and emaciated or atrophied and paralyzed on
the other.   In magnetizing these cases the
positive button is placed over the paralyzed
muscles at B, while  the negative tmtton  is
passed over the tuberculated  muscles in the
right shoulder and hip, at intervals from 6  to
15  minutes; in the mean time the  negative
button is placed over the tuberculated mus-
cles at C, while the positive button is moved 
61
over and around  the left shoulder along the
inside of the curve at  A, under a power of
the instrument that  can be easily borne.— 
62
Some of these bear only a  moderate, while
others  will  bear  its full  power.  We  com-
mence  with  a moderate power at each sitting
and then gradually increase it to the full pow-
er that can be borne, bringing the spine  up as
straight as possible at the close of  each sit-
ting:   In some bad cases assistance is re-
quired  to raise the atrophied  shoulder  and
keep the paralyzed muscles distended  under
the action of the buttons, much  however will
depend on the tact, perseverance and experi-
ence of the magnetizer.
  In magnetizing in  these cases, as well as
every  other,  the  passes  with  the buttons
should  be downwards, or in a direction from
the head  to the  feet, and this is a  rule  that
should  not  be departed  from,  and to  avoid
mistakes in the use of the different buttons,
magnetizers should attain  a habit of taking
the negative button in the right hand, and the
positive in the left.
  The  effects of the action  of  the  Machine
upon the muscles in these  cases, is most ex-
traordinary, most  wonderful,  and.  gives us
true conceptions  of the unlimited  power of
the all  pervading forces by  which we  obtain
such results.
   The plate in page 63 exhibits the first lay-
er of muscles along the back and side  of the
body; the skin and cellular tissue  being re- 
63
 
64
moved in order to  show the direction of  the
fibres in each muscle, and their points of at-
tachment; to aid magnetizers in the proper
application of the buttons, to obtain the great-
est effect from the machine.   There  is here,
10, 10,  10, 10, a fine  view of  the trapezius
muscle of each side, extending from the occi-
put 1, to the spinoas processes of the last dor-
sal vertebra.
  The effect of the  machine  is  much greater
when the buttons are applied near the differ-
ent attachments of the  muscles  than it is
when they  are applied  in the intermediate
places.   &> if one button is applied near the
occiput 1, and the other near the point of the
shoulder 4, the effect will be greater than it
would,  if one of the buttons was placed on
any  intermediate place  along the spine.  The
same difference is observed in the  position of
the buttons near the attachment of the same
muscle  at 4, and near the  insertion of the
teres muscles under the lower  point of  the
Bcapula 5, and any intermediate place along
the spine.
  It is  the greater and lesser teres 41, 42,
page 65, and  the greater rhomboid  muscles
28,  19, that are tuberculated,  and raise  the
scapula  in  lateral  curvatures  of  the spine.
The infra-spinous  muscle 16,  is frequently 
64
 
66
 affected at the same time with a  slight and
 sometimes with a large white swelling.  Two
 of these last have disappeared in an instant,
 under the full power of the machine, leaving
 apparently nothing behind, but the  skin and
 bones of the scapula.   Large Broncoceles—
 (goitres) have also  disappeared in an instant,
 under the full power, and frightful  action of
 the instrument.
   In a great majority of the  cases of lateral
 curvatures of the spine, the curves are nearly
 in the form of the letter S, more or less curv-
 ed, and making a deviation  of from  one to
 four inches from  the  median line.   The up-
 per curve  is  generally to the right, and the
 lower to the  left side, where the  latisimus
 dorsi  muscle  11, is tuberculated.  There are,
 however, cases where  the upper curve ex-
 tends down to the 2d or 3d lumbar vertebra
 —the  ribs  and scapula making a great  arch
 to the right, with  only a slight deviation of
 the other lumbar  vertebrae to the  left side;
 and there are other cases in which there  is a
 great  curve of the lumbar, with little or no
 deviation  of  the  dorsal vertebra.
  Breast or mamma.  In capes of white swell-
ing, or of chronic tumors of  the  breast, the
negative button should be  applied  on  the
breast,and the positive on the back of the neck. 
67
   Hernia,  strangulated—Rupture.   Apply
the positive button  over the spinal nerves
connected with the stomach, and the nega-
tive over the  herneal sac, and gradually
increase the power as far as  it can be
borne, and repeat.  Give Aconite.
   Tetanus.   Magnetise  the stomach  and
muscles as directed in pages 52-57,   Give
Aconite.
   Cancer—cancerous  swellings.  Magne-
tize them once or twice a day.  Place the
positive button on the back of  the neck or
in one hand, and the  other over the swell-
ing.  Give mag. gold pills.
   Hydrophobia.   Magnetize the muscles,
stomach, and  throat, as  directed in  pages
52-57.   Give Aconite.
   Uterine Inertia, in labor.   Magnetise the
uterus by placing the  positive  button  over
the lumbar vertebra, and the other below the
pubis and over the vulva, and repeat.
   Uterine  Hemorrhage.  Magnetise  as in
uterine inertia.  Give ergot—and when dan-
ger to life is imminent opium, warm wine or
brandy.  Nothing  checks  hemorrhage so
soon as magnetising.         ''
  Impotence   The positive button is  placed
over the hollow of the  neck, and sometimes
over the  lumbar vertebra, and the other on
the testicles in  males, and  below the  pubis, 
68
 and over the vulva in females.   Give mag-
 netised gold pills.   Specific.
   Wakefulness—sleeplessness.    Magnetise
 the muscles as directed in page 57.  Specific.
   Poisoning  by opium, morphine, Prussiac
 acid, or any other vegetable or  animal poi-
 son,  and also by arsenic; magnetise  the
 stomach, and muscles, as directed  in  pages
 52-57, after  having first given  the sulphate
 of zinc to  vomit the  patient, or used  the
 stomach pump;  and then animal or vegeta-
 ble charcoal finely pulverised.   Animal  the
 best.
   Piles—haemorrhoids.   The positive button
 is placed over the lower lumbar vertebrae,
 and the negative over the  anus.  Cases of
 from one to fifteen  years  standing, which re-
 sisted  every other  remedy have  yielded to
 the action of the magnetic machine.   Give
 mag. gold pills.
   Constipation.    Magnetise  the  stomach
 and intestines by placing the positive  button
over the spinal  nerves connected with  the
stomach, and make passes with the negative
button downwards  from the pit of the stom-
ach over every part of the bowels, or intes-
tines—repeat once or twice a day.   Give
nux v. alternated with plumbum.   Specific. 
69
  Nipples.  In cases of sore nipples accom-
panied with  sore mouth, the positive button
should  be  placed  on  the  tongue  and the
negative  over the nipple—in other cases, the
positive  button  should  be  placed  over the
nipple, and the negative in the groin, or over
the ovaria of the opposite side.
  Nipples  retracted.   In cases of  retraction
of the nipples the positive  button is placed
over the  nipple, and the negative in the groin,
or over the ovaria of  the opposite side, and is
said to be very effectual.
   Chronic Diarrhma.  Tubercular disease of
the intestines.  The positive  button should be
placed over the intervertebral spaces, between
the 11th and 12th dorsal vertebrae, and the
other moved over the  surface of the  abdomen.
  Catarrh.  (Chronic.)   Tubercular  disease
of the Nose or frontal sinus.   In these  cases
the positive button should be placed over the
first  cervical vertebrae in the hollow of the
neck, and the other on the  top and sides of
the nose.
  Aphonia.  Loss of voice.  Dr. L. D. Flem-
ing,  of Newark, N.  J.,  who recovered his
voice rapidly under the action  of the instru-
ment, thinks  it is better to  apply one of the
buttons,—the negative—over the organ of imi- 
70
ration, mstead of both on the neck, under the
angle of the  lower jaw, from the effects pro-
duced in his case.
   Testicle.  In chronic  swelling or chronic
tubercula of a testicle, the buttons should be
moved over and around it; and then the posi-
tive button should be placed over the interver-
tebral space between the last lumbar and os-
coccyx,  while the negative is moved over the
testicle.
  Hydrocele.   In  these eases  the  testicle
should be magnetized in the manner descri-
bed above, under a strong power.
   Varicocele.  These cases should be mag-
netized  in the same manner above described,
and is very effectual.
   Chancres.   The negative button should be
applied  on a chancre, and the positive over
the intervertebral space between the last lum-
bar vertebrae and os-coccyx, and is said to be
very effectual.
  Buboes.  The  negative  button should be
placed over the buboes, and the positive over
the lumbar vertebra.

    Hemorrhage from the Lungs.
  Nearly all the cases of hemorrhage from
the lungs occur within four days of the new
moon or of the full moon, and the natural and
regular  periods of hemorrhage from the uterus 
71
generally occur within the same time.  These.
Facts were well known to the ancients, and a
knowledge of  them is a matter of great im-
portance to both sexes who are predisposed to
hemorrhage from the lungs, to enable them to
Jwrcdd any  exciting causes of hemorrhage at 
72
these periods, and particularly to females, foi
obvious reasons.
  A solution of this lunar influence is found
m the more  rarified state of the atmosphere,
from its expansion at  K J and J K;  at the
new moon, c, and full moon, E, from the com-
bined  action of the sun and moon  upon it,
at these periods, in  the  direction seen  in the
figure, and in consequence of which the pres-
sure of the  atmosphere  on every square inch
of the body, and  of the cavities exposed to
its influence, is greatly reduced.
  The  diminution  of  pressure  commences
three days and  a half  before the new and full
moon, and gradually increases until it arrives
at its maximum, at the  time of the new and
full moon;  then it begins  to  decrease, and
goes on  decreasing to the end  of three days
and a half, when it is minimum or 0, and so
continues through the intermediate periods.
  When  the moon is in its syzygees, E, its
forces are extended to the atmosphere of the
earth,  B, by the  action of the  forces from
the sun, A;  but  when the moon  is in its
quadratures, D L,  the extension of its forces
beyond the  (parenthesis) is interrupted by the
forces  from the sun,  and the  density of the
atmosphere  is then  at its maximum.
  The  periods of  excitement  and repose  in
chronic  diseases  are  generally very  regular 
73
 the first occurring  in the periods of the  new
 and  full moon, and the  latter in the interme-
 diate periods.
   When  hemorrhage  commences  from  the
 lungs, the arms  above the elbows and  the
 legs above the knees, should be  bound with
 handkerchiefs, moderately  tight,  until   the
 hemorrhage ceases (for the purpose of check-
 ing temporarily the accumulation of blood in
 the heart and lungs.)  The patient should at
 the same time drink freely of alum water, or
 salt water.  The violence of the hemorrhage
 soon ceases under this treatment;  the use of
 these drinks should, however,  be  continued
 until the bloody  expectoration  has ceased,
 when these safe  and  efficient remedies  will
 finish their work by exciting the action of the
 intestines.  A recurring disposition to hemorr-
 hage should be checked with Aconite, or Ace-
 tate of Lead.   One drop of the strong tincture
 of Aconite, or 10  drops of the first dilution in
 a  tumbler of  water may be  taken once or
 twice a day, or the acetate of lead  (sugar of
 lead,) if  at hand, may be also used in these
cases, 3 or 4 grains, or a quantity  that  will
lie on a sixpenny piece,  made  into 3 or 4
pills, with moist bread, may be taken at inter-
vals that may  be  determined by the urgency
 Df the symptoms.   Drawing blood from  the
arm  in  large  quantities  under such circum- 
74
rtances, as is commonly practised, is not only
positively injurious in  a great majority of
cases, but it is often fatal; and  such patients
are never in greater danger than when they
are in the hands of a physician  whose know-
ledge is bounded by inflammations.
  The  few cases of  hemorrhage  from the
lungs, which occur when the moon is in its
quadratures, or when it  is moving from the
octant  rr, to that  at m, and from  the  octant
at s, to  that of I, are those  that occur in
chronic bronchitis, or chronic  disease of the
mucous membrane that lines the inside of the
bronchial or air tubes, which rarely amounts
to more than a wine glass, and is  in general
a matter of  little consequence,  requiring only
the exercise of common prudence at those
periods to prevent its recurrence.
  Hemorrhage  from the  serous surfaces of
the lungs or from  its serous membranes, gen-
erally  occur in the rarified state  of  the at-
mosphere, at the period when the  moon is in
syzygees or apogee and  perigee;  while he-
morrhage from the mucous surfaces,  or the
mucous  membranes of the lungs  generally
occur in the dense state  of the atmosphere,
at the period when the moon is in its quad-
ratures, as we have ascertained in the most
satisfactory  manner, by a long series  of ob-
servations. 
75
   Fever and Ague.   In  the cold  stage of
 this disease, the patient may hold one button
 in each hand under the greatest power of the
 machine that can well be  borne,  until the
 chills cease, and in the hot stage they should
 be magnetised in the   manner directed in fe-
 ver.  Pages 80-81.   Give ergot.
   Menstrual colic.  Magnetize as in uterine
 inertia, page 67,  75.
   Colic.   Magnetise   as in  constipation.
 Give Colocynth.
   Hemorrhage from  the lungs.   Magnetise
 this organ  by placing the  positive button
 over the spinal  nerves connected  with it,
 and  make long passes with the negative but-
 ton  quickly over  the  chest.   The  hemorr-
 hage ceases instantly  as in cases of  hemorr-
 hage from the uterus, &c, &c. Give aconite.
   Throat.   Tubular  diseases of.  It is dis-
 tinguished by the  magnetic  symptoms, and
 the  throat is thickened and  contracted, and
 not  dilated,  as in  mucous  disease of the
 throat.
  Dysentery. Place the negative button over
the anus, and the positive over the last lum-
ber vertebrae, under a very moderate power of
the machine, and then increase the power un-
til the pain ceases, and repeat if the pain re-
turns.   Give mercurious sol. 
76
   Tubercular disease of the organs we repeal
is invariably distinguished, in all these cases,
by pain more or less severe  (in proportion to
the intensity of the disease) produced by pres-
sure on the ganglions of the spinal nerves, in
the intervertebral spaces along each side of the
spine—no matter what name may have been
given to the disease by physicians, nosologists,
or other medical writers. *  It is a disease of the
secreting  or lymphatic system  in  the aerous
surfaces, in which the posterior spinal nerves
terminate, and is propagated from the skin to
the limbs, and from the limbs to the organs,
and  from one organ to another.   The seat of
the disease in the skin, limbs, and  spine, is
easily  seen,  and its  precise situation  in  the
organs is in general easily determined, by ex-
ploring them under a very moderate power of
the instrument.
   Patients  affected  with  tubercular  disease,
will  bear only a moderate power of  the ma-
chine,  and among these there is a great differ-
ence in susceptibility to its  action, as in  the
cases of mesmeric influence.  Generally they
will  bear very comfortably,  one half of  the
power  of the instrument, but there  are a few

  • These symptoms are magnetic; for, when we press
upon these ganglions in the active state of the disease.
the pain win dart into the diseased organ, with a force
which increases with the intensity of the disease. 
77
that will go  into a fainting fit,* or into the
mesmeric state, under  its weakest power.—
The greatest caution should, therefore, be ex-
ercised in graduating the instrument, especial-
ly at the first sitting.  In fact,  children and
weak-minded  people should  never be allowed
to use it.  The time occupied in  magnetizing
varies in the  different  cases—generally from
five to fifteen  minutes,  when the magnetic or-
ganization of the system becomes so tense as
to give violent shocks  to the magnetizer, and
sometimes headache to the patient if  the pro-
cess is continued too long.
  In nearly all  the cases of tubercular dis-
ease, other remedies are required to keep up a
steady magnetic action.  Magnetizing restores
lost motion in the tuberculated portions of the
organs,  limbs,  and  other  structures—some-
times permanently, but generally temporarily,
making it necessary for such patients to  use
other remedies at the same time.   With these,
in conjunction with the action of the instru-
ment, they recover  very rapidly—even cases
sr  far advanced as to  preclude  any hope of
tJteir recovery by  any other means.  Mag-
netic or magnetized remedies are the only
  * We have had only three cases of this kind—one, a
lady, in magnetizing the brain, one a lady in magneti-
zing the lungs, and the other, a gentleman, in magneti-
zing the chest.  They were all very subject to fainting
fits from trilling causes. 
78
ones that are of any value in tubercular dis-
ease of the organs and limbs.   We continue
to use the magnetized gold pills  in these cases
with a success in conjunction with the action
of the machine that precludes the necessity of
any other excepting only  a few cases to pah-
ate  an urgent symptom in the periods  of  ex-
citement, and we should here remark, that the
daily effects of  the action of this instrument
affords the  most conclusive and overwhelm-
ing proof of the  correctness of the magnetic
practice we have  long  pursued  in  tubercular
disease,  and gives it a most extraordinary and
glorious triumph over the  old Astrological
practice  of the Schools.
             CHAPTER IV.

            Acute Diseases*

         ACUTE  TUBERCULA.
   Inflammation of the Serous Surfaces.
  Inflammation or acute tubercular disease of
the serous surfaces of the organs and limbs,
is distinguished by the magnetic symptoms, in
the same manner as chronic tubercula of these
surfaces, and in magnetizing in these cases of
disease of the organs the positive button should
be placed over the  ganglions of the spinal 
79
nerves, in the intervertebral spaces, and the
negative over the seat of the disease  in the or-
gans, in the same manner as described in cases
of chronic disease of these surfaces,  excepting
cases of  inflammation of  the kidneys, when
they should be reversed.  In pleurisy, pleura
costalis or pleuro  peripneumony,  the  posi-
tive button should be placed over the interver-
tebral spaces between the 7th or last cervical
and  first dorsal vertebrae, as well  as  in the
case  of peripneumony or inflammation  of the
lungs, and the negative over the pain.
   The action of  the  Magnetic  Machine
reduces inflammation of the serous surfaces with
great rapidity.  It reduces acute diseases of any
of  the organs or limbs in from 3 to 5 minutes,
when applied immediately after the attack, or
commencement of the disease.*   When how-
ever  it is not applied at that time, it will re-
quire a longer time to reduce the inflammation
The  effect is the same in inflammatory rheu-

  * Extract of a letter dated
                     " Ovid, Ohio, June 14,1844.
  " My wife a few days since presented me with a fine
boy, and as is often the case she was troubled with a
eaked breast, and when they began to talk of broken
breasts I determined to try the machine ; I applied the
buttons each side, passing them round, and in  two mi-
nutes the cake was  entirely romoved—so w e have  no
more  of that trouble.  My health continues about the
game—rather improving.
                  Tours, fee.
                                     O Si 
80
matism or in gout.  It stops the progress of the
disease from one limb to another, after the first
application of the instrument.
  The same results are also obtained in bi-
lious fever, as ascertained from various trials
of the machine in these cases by different phy-
sicians.  The  iever and the pain is reduced
very soon when the forces  from  the  instru-
ment are applied immediately after the attack
of the disease, but if not soon applied it re-
quires  a longer time to reduce  the  fever, in
proportion to the time elapsed from  the com-
mencement of the  disease.   We suggested in
the  first edition of this work the probability of
the  great importance of this machine in  yel-
low fever, and no  doubt is now entertained
but it will reduce  that  disease  with great
rapidity, as well as congestive  and typhus
fevers*
  Fever.—Bilious, Congestive,  Typhus and
 Yellow Fever.—The spine  should always be
examined in these cases of fever, to determine
the true character of the disease, whether of
the serous or mucous surfaces, and the num-
ber of  organs implicated in it;  and this  can
always be done with perfect  ease and certainty
by  the presence or absence of the  magnetic
symptoms.  When these are present, the po-
sitive  button should be placed over the inter-
vertebral spaces, and the negative moved slow- 
81
iy ovei the diseased organ under a very mode-
rate power of  the  instrument to find the seat
of the disease in the organ,  and determine the
amount of the power that can be borne with
ease to the patient.
   In the  absence of these symptoms, the ne-
gative  button  should  be applied to the inter-
vertebral spaces, connected  with the stomach
and intestines, while the positive is moved
slowly, first, over the surface of the stomach,
and then over the intestines—observing the
rule to have a button over  the spinal nerve
connected with  the organ which we wish to
magnetize.
   The common  remedies, or those found most
successful, should be used when  indicated in
the treatment  of these cases of inflammation
of the serous surfaces, in conjunction with the
action of the machine.*
              CHAPTER V.

   Hypertrophy  of Mucous Surfaces.
                 Chronic.
  Bronchitis.   (Chronic.)  The action of the
rotary magnetic machine, alone, will cure all
the cases in the  first stage of this disease of
the membrane that lines the inside of the air
tubes  The disease is distinguished by cough
      * See intermitteut, or chill* and fewr, page 183.
                   6 
82
and  expectoration,  and the  absence of the
magnetic symptoms of tubercular disease of
the lungs.
  The negative button should be  placed first
over the intervertebral spaces, between the
seventh  cervical  and first  dorsal  vertebras
while  the  other is passed slowly over the
whole surface of  the chest, including the
back  part of it, as  in the  case  of tubercula
of the lungs,  or consumption.   The positive
button is then placed on the tongue, and the
other moved quickly over the whole surface
of the chest, and the sitting concluded in five
minutes.  In the absence of the action  of the
instrument, or to aid it, the following prescrip-
tion will be found one of the best.
  I*. Hard Bal. Copa. and Cubebs  3iiiss, Ext.
Hyos.  3ss.   Make  100  pills.  Dose J pill
three times a day, after eating.
  The following is  also one of the best.  rj.
Bal.  Fir. 2 oz. Olive  oil, 2 oz.  Lemon juice
4 oz.  Honey 8 oz.   Mix and simmer together
slowly half an hour,  and  bottle it.  Dose a
table spoon, morning and evening.
  Cough.   Troublesome at night,  ft. Solu.
Morphine  3i.  Syr. Bal.  Tolu. 2  oz.   Mix.
Dose a tea-spoonful, at night on going to bed.
  In  the  last stage of the disease the action
of the instrument should be aided by the ni-
trate  of  silver, which should be ground on* 
83
hour in a glass mortar, with loaf sugar, in
the proportion  of  3 grains of  the  nitrate of
silver to 100 of sugar.   About a  drachm of
this powder should  then  be  put  into a  per-
fectly dry phial, holding not less than half a
pint, and then  shaken and instantly applied
to the mouth, making at the same time a full
inspiration in such a manner as to inhale the
particles of  powder suspended in the air con-
tained in the phial.
  Mucous disease of the throat.   This disease
is distinguished  by hawking and  expectora-
tion, and the absence of the magnetic symp-
toms of tubercular disease of the throat.   Be-
sides, the throat is always dilated in mucous,
and contracted in serous or tubercular dis-
ease.
  The negative button  should  be  placed on
the hollow of  the  neck, and passes  made
with the positive down each side of the neck.
  Give the mucous pills, 6 p.,  and gargle the
throat  morning and evening, with a  strong
solution of acetate of iron.  See acetate  iron.
  Bursa  Mucosa.  White  swellings  from
disease of  the  bursa of the  joints or  limbs
There  is little or no pain in these cases, and
they will bear pressure, and generally the full
power of the machine.  They are often  mis-
taken for the common white swellings  or tu- 
34
bercular  disease of the joints.   The buttons
should be applied directly to these swellings
  In  diseases of the mucous surfaces of the
organs and  limbs, patients will  bear  fully
double the power of the machine, that they
will in diseases  of  the serous surfaces;  in
fact the  greatest  power that is borne in dis-
eases  of  the serous surfaces, whether  acute
or chronic, will have  little or no effect in
acute  or chronic diseases of the mucous sur-
faces, and  this fact  is sufficient to determine
the true  character  of  the  disease, whether
in the brain or any other part of the  body.
  Palsy—shaking.  In these cases the posi-
tive button  should be applied to the neck as
in the case of rheumatism, and the other to
the extremities of the affected side.
  Hooping  Cough.   The  negative button
should be placed over the intervertebral spaces
between the 7th cervical and 1 st dorsal verte-
bra, and  the other over and along each side
of the trachea or  windpipe, from the jaws to
the lower end of  the sternum, or breast bone.
The instrument should be graduated to a mode-
rate powei at first, and then increased as the
patient will bear it.
  Hooping Cough.   R Cochineal  pulv.  10
grs.   Salts Tartar 30 grs.   Sugar  1 oz.   Hot
water half a pint.   Mix.  Dose—a teaspoon
three  times a day.—Specific. 
85
   Acute Disease  of the Mucous Surfaces.-—
 Bronchitis—{acute.)  This disease is distin-
 guished  by fever,  cough  and expectoration
 and the  absence  of the  magnetic symptoms
 of serous disease  of the  lungs or pneumonia.
 The negative button should be placed over
 the intervertebral  spaces, between the 7th and
 last cervical and first dorsal vertebrae,  and the
 other moved slowly over  the entire  surface
 of the chest, under a strong power of  the  in-
 strument, once, twice, or three times  a day,
 according to the  intensity  of  the disease, or
 urgency of the symptoms.   Gum Amoniac,
 Honey, and Vinegar, makes one of the best
 expectorants in these cases.
9  ft. Gum Amoniac, 3 ss: Honey, a wineglass;
 muriate of amonia, 3j > hot  water,  half  a
 pint.   Dose, a teaspoonful  to  a tablespoonful
 once in  one or two hours, according to the
 intensity of the disease, and age of the  patient.
   Pripneumony.—Notha.    With the same
 symptoms, affecting mostly children and old
  Eeople, is acute disease of the membrane that
  nes the inside of  the air  tubes, and should
 be treated promptly in the  manner above de-
 scribed, as the disease runs  through its course
 rapidly  in these cases of the  young, and the
 aged, with feeble constitutions.
   Cholera.—Asiatic and Sporadic.  The but-
 tons should be applied to the spine and abdo- 
86
men m the manner indicated by the presence
or absence  of the magnetic symptoms, and to
the cervical intervertebral spaces and limbs.
The machine  will  reduce the spasms,  and
probably the inordinate discharges  from the
abdomen in the most prompt manner.
   Croup.  The buttons should be placed on
each side of the larynx or upper part of the
trachea or windpipe,—directly under the jaws,
when the larynx will expand with great force.
The negative button should then be held on
one side of the larynx and passes made down
the neck with the other.
   Cholera Infantum.   The  spine  should
always  be  examined in these cases, because
this disease of  the mucous or inner surfaces*
of the stomach and intestines, is soon extend-
ed to the serous or outer surfaces, when the
treatment for disease  of the  mucous surfaces
should be changed, and the patient treated for
disease of the serous surfaces, or it should be
modifled  according to the complication of the
disease in the different surfaces.  The same
course should be pursued in the application of
the buttons.   As long  as there is no  tender-
ness along  the  spine, the  negative  button
should be placed over the  spinal nerves con-
nected with the stomach and intestines, while
the other is moved over the entire surface of
the abdomen; but as soon as pressure on the 
87
ganglions of the spinal nerves in the interver-
tebral spaces, between the first and second or
second and third  dorsal connected with the
stomach  elicits a  tenderness there, the order
of the application of the buttons should be rei
versed, and the same course should be pursu-
ed in the application of the buttons to the spi-
nal  nerves connected  with the intestines.—
The excretions from these mucous surfaces in
a healthy state are alkaline, but in a diseased
state becomes  first deficient,  and  then  acid,
indicating  an alkaline treatment, which is
generally found the  most  successful in the
first stage of the disease, as magnesia—a weak
solution  of soda, or carbonate of  potash, &c
ft is soon however in many cases  extended to
the serous surfaces and becomes chronic, when
(be remedies for chronic tubercula will be in-
dicated, and uniformly found to be specific.
   Diarrheea.   When  this disease is  accom-
panied with little or  no pain,  the negative
button should be applied to  the spine between
the  11th and  12th dorsal  vertebra  and the
other moved slowly over the surface of the
abdomen, but when the disease  is  accompani-
ed with much pain the order of the  applica-
tion of the buttons should be reversed, and the
remedies for chronic tubercula prescribed. 
88
          Diseases of the  Skin.

  The buttons should  be  both applied and
moved over the diseatsed surface in diseases
of the skin, with  a few exceptions, as in the
case of the face  when the  positive button
should be  placed on  the  ear, or  over the
plexus of nerves in  front of  it, while the
other is passed over the diseased surface.
  We  have used the instrument in only a
few cases of disease  of the  skin,  and  these
mostly cases of  erysipelas, lepra, salt rheum
and herpes.  It reduces the  most  inveterate
cases of erysipelas with great rapidity, and
the  effects in the others  have  been such as to
warrant a belief, that there  are very few dis-
eases of the skin, that  can long exist under
the  action of the machine.


              CHAPTER  VI.
              Admonitions.
  Magnetisers  should  exercise the greatest
caution in the use of the Rotary Magnetic Ma-
chine, for the drones of the  medical  profession
—the old ladies  in breeches,  are  laying  in
wait with their curs trained  to  pounce  upon
you, the moment an accident happens of any
importance,  in the use of this instrument.  It
would be of no use to plead an accident, and 
89
the great importance of the instrument to the
community; for they would drown your voice
in a moment, with the noise of their hounds.
Again, in nearly all the cases of disease, there
are periods  of  repose, which are invariably
followed by periods of excitement, or they are
more or less intermittent, and the intermissions
more or less complete.  Now these facts are
well known to the medical profession, and
physicians whose  principles are as loose as a
bishop's sleeve, never fail to take advantage
of that knowledge.   Let  the treatment of a
case be as good as possible, and  the progress
of the  cure never  so prosperous,  the moment
their attention  happens to be  direeted to it in
the period of excitement, in the absence of
the attending physician, they never fail to con-
demn the treatment—to see clearly that it is
all wrong, or  to advise a  different treatment,
and they will always continue to practise such
impositions upon  the novice, the weak  and
the ignorant.   Magnetisers should  therefore
never fail  to direct the attention of their pa-
tients to these changes in their sensations, in
the periods of excitement  and  repose, to guard
them against these impositions. There are cases
which require medicine to quiet the system, in
addition to the  proper remedies for the disease,
during these periods of excitement,  and for
this purpose the Belladonna will generally be 
90
found the best  and it should always be mag-
netized.  The strong tincture should be first
diluted at the rate of 10 drops of the  tincture
to 100 of alcohol, and then magnetized, by
placing two of the silver wires accompany-
ing the Magnetic Machine in the phial con-
taining the dilution, and then cork it tight,
with one of the wires on each side of it, to pre-
vent their contact in  the dilution.  One  of
these wires (the longest one) is connected with
the positive conductor of the machine, and the
other placed in a tumbler of water, when ano-
ther wire is connected  with  the negative con-
ductor and with  the water  m  the tumbler.
The machine is then set in operation,  and the
phial  taken in the right hand and shaken 100
times with the passes downwards, or towards
the earth.
   The power and  soothing character of the
medicine >is greatly increased in this way, and
it will  retain this character a long time il
kept in the shade, or from the direct rays  of
the sun.   The  dose is from one to  ten drops,
according to the age and condition of the pa-
tient.   It should be  taken in water—from a
wineglass to a tumbler full, two or three times
a day, either at once or at  intervals, during
three days, (or less, if the desired effect is ob-
tained from it,) when  the use of it  should be
discontinued  one day, and then  the use of it 
91
resumed  if necessary, and then  discontinued
as before, or until an  itching or red spots ap-
pear on the skin, when the use of it should be
discontinued. Camphorated  spirit  is the an-
tidote  for these symptoms, and should be dilu-
ted in water in the proportions above described,
and taken in the same way if necessary.  Bel-
ladonna is  also one of the best articles to pal-
liate the  cough attending tubercular disease of
the lungs, but when this fails, the  solution of
morphine should be prepared in the same way,
and used in the  same quantity as the Bella-
donna.
  These periods of excitement are frequently
accompanied with colds, and are sometimes
produced by them, and  it is a  matter of great
importance to these patients to have a medi-
cine always at  hand to reduce  the effects of a
sold at the onset; and  for this purpose aco-
nite will  generally be found much the best
The strong tincture should be diluted with al-
cohol in  the same proportion, and magnetized
in the 6ame manner as  belladonna.  From
one to ten drops may be taken three or four
times a day, according to the age and  condi-
tion of the  patient, well  diluted with  water,
until the urgent symptoms or effects of the cold
have  subsided.
  Aconite has the same effect upon local in-
flammation of  the  serous surfaces as local 
92
bleeding, without reducing the strength of the
system, and is one of the best and safest medi-
cines that can be used in conjunction with the
action  of the machine, in  inflammations or
acute disease of the serous surfaces of the or-
gans or  limbs.   There are some  cases  that
will require  other medicine, and among these
is dysentery, acute  cases  of  diarrhoea,  and
cholera infantum, in which soluble mercury
will be found far superior to any other.  One
grain of the  muriate of mercury (corrosive sub-
limate) should be first ground one  hour in a
ground glass mortar, with one hundred grains
of sugar of milk or loaf sugar, and then 10
grains  of this  mixture should be  ground  at
least one hour, with 100 grains of Sugar  of
milk or loaf sugar, in  the  same mortar,*
when  it will be  well  magnetized  and  rea-
dy for use.  The  dose  is from  1  to  10
grains, according to the age and condition of
the patient.   One dose is very generally suffi-
cient.  It should always be dissolved in  cold
water, and portions  of it taken at  intervals of
fifteen  minutes or half an  hour, according to
the urgency of the symptoms.
   Any dry  medicines may be magnetized in
the manner  above described-—observing gene-

  * Every physician as well as druggists, should be
furnished  with a ground glass  mortar.   It is easily
ground with sand. 
93
rally to use from 5 to 10 grains of the less ac.
five  medicines in the first trituration—fluid
medicines may also be well  magnetized in
the manner  we have described  for magneti-
zing belladonna—observing to use a less num-
ber of drops, or less than, 10 to 100 of alcohol,
as the activity of the medicines increase, as in
case of the sulphuric and prussic acid, &c
   The action of the Rotary Magnetic Machine
not only  increases the power of fluid medi-
cines  a 1000 fold by magnetizing  them in
the manner  we have described,  but  magneti-
zing the organs or limbs,  increases the power
of medicines of any kind,  after they are taken
into the system, and consequently lessens in a
great degree the necessity  of large and unsafe
doses of  medicine.   The Rotary Magnetic
Machines, therefore, with their  power of re-
ducing inflammations in the most rapid man-
ner, and of increasing the  action of medicines
after they have been  taken into  the  system,
lessens, in a great degree,  the necessity of the
use—almost indiscriminately—during the last
hundred years, of the large and repeated doses
of mercury—of calomel and blue pills, which
has  filled Europe  and  this  country with
scrofula—with hereditary disease, and with
mourning; for the loss of the young, amiable
and most talented portion of our race.
   Costiveness is a common complaint  of pa- 
94
tients which requires  the  attention of Mag-
netizers, and in these cases the  most mild
aperients should he  preferred,  and taken at
regular intervals of one or two days, and in
quantities which will  barely move  the bowels
once or  twice a day.   Magnetized  water can
be used for this purpftse by those  who have
the machine, and will generally be sufficient
for this purpose.
  In this case, two tumblers of water may be
placed before the machine and the wires con-
nected with the machine and with  the water,
in the same manner as described for magneti-
zing Belladonna; no  manipulations are neces
sary, and the water in the tumbler connected
with  the positive  button, may be drank in a
minute  after the commencement of the action
of  the machine, to increase the action of the
bowels, while the water in the tumbler con-
nected  with the 'negative  conductor  may  be
drank by another person to check the action
of the bowels.
   Sefnns,  Issues,  and the Moxa.   Patients
are frequently presented to us with setons and
issues along the  spine—caustic  issues,  and
those made by application  of the moxa, or by
fire—mostly in cases  of children with distor-
tions of the spine.   This is a most barbarous
practice, dictated by the most savage ignorance
of the  true nature of. the disease, and of the 
95
proper remedies for it.  It rarely if ever faLs
cf doing great injury to the patient, and is fre-
quently fatal.  Magnetizers should therefore
never fail to direct the setons to be removed,
and the issues healed as soon as possible. 
96
        Lateral Curvatures of the Spine-
  William W. Kinne, M. D., of Trumans-
burgh, Tompkins Co., N. Y., has been treat-
ing lateral curvatures  of  the spine  and also
distortions of the spine and of the limbs, dur-
ing the  last year (1846), with great success.
The Doctor took plaster casts of  the  curva-
tures and distortions before he commenced the
treatment, and also at different periods  during
its progress and at its termination.  The  fol-
lowing engraving, Fig. 1, is  from a drawing
by C. Muyr, of  the first cast of Miss Mary
B. B., of Ithaca, N. Y., aged 16 years.
  The curvature commenced seven years be-
fore the cast was taken, and at the end of four
and a half months thereafter, another cast was
taken of Miss M. B. B., showing a very great
improvement in the case, as  seen in  the en-
graving, Fig. 2, and  leaving little doubt but
that  in a  month and a half  more,  or six
months from the time  of the commencement
of the treatment the spine would  be  straight
and the form perfect.
  We have also a cast of a lateral curvature,
taken  by the  Doctor at  the commencement
of the treatment of Miss M.  P., of Hector, N.
Y., aged 17 years.  The  curve commenced
when  she was between four and five years
old,  and grew with  her growth.  The  cast 
  97



Fig. 1.
 
                     98

shows it to be a very bad case, and the spine,
at its greatest curve,  an  inch and a half from
the median  line.  The second  cast  of this
case taken after nine  months' treatment shows
the spine straight.
  A cast  of lateral  curvature of the  Spine,
which  the Doctor took of Miss M. V. S., of
Ithaca, N. Y., aged  13  years,  and  of three
years standing shows a deviation of the spine
of one  inch from the median line, a very  bad
form and  poor health.  Another cast taken
after eight weeks' treatment of the same case
shows  a straight spine, improved health and a
perfect form.
  There was in  all of these cases, like every
other of lateral curvature, a contraction and
thickening of the muscles or veritable white
swellings on the outside of the curves.  They
are all cases of tubercular disease of the mus-
cles, and  it is the contractions of the muscles
on the  outside of the  curves  and consequent
atrophia of those on the inside that make the
deviations from the median line.
  The white swelling of the right scapula or
shoulder-blade in the case of  Miss M. B. B.,
Fig. 2, which  produced the deviation  in  her
spine, is not, it will be seen, entirely reduced,
and consequently the spine has  not entirely
resumed its natural position. 
99
  The course the  Doctor adopted to reduce
these curvatures, was first to reduce the white
swellings with the specific remedies for tuber-
cula, and the action of the magnetic machine,
when the spines resumed  their natural posi-
tions, and this is the only philosophical and
only successful practice in these cases.
  In consequence of the great increase of the
business of reducing lateral curvatures of the
spine, and distortions of  the  spine and limbs,
Dr. Kinne has been invited to establish him-
self in this city, and in a letter from him a
few days since (Dec. 12), he informs us that
he has concluded to accept the invitation, and
will  have rooms in this city  to accommodate
his patients, in  the course of  the  month of
March next.
Distortions of the Spine and Caries of the Vertebra
  Fig. 3, is the form of a cast taken by Dr.
Kinne, at the commencement of the treatment,
of Almond Beach, of Cuba, Alleghany Co.,
N. Y., aged 13 years.  The  distortion  com-
menced when he was five years old, and grew
with his growth.   Fig. 4, is  the form  of  a
cast  taken  from  the boy after three months'
treatment, and Fig. 5 is the form  of a cast
taken from the same boy after  four and a half
months' treatment. 
100
 
101
Fro. 5.
  There is a very great  and progressive im-
provement in this case for the time it has been
under treatment, which  will astonish every
physician who is unacquainted with the mag- 
102
netic  practice by which  such extraordinary
results are obtained.
  It will be observed that the 3d  figure and
form of the first cast from this boy  shows the
most extreme atrophia of  the muscles, with
very great distortion of  the spine, and that in
figures 4 and  5 the atrophied muscles are pro-
gressively developed in  the same  proportion
with the reduction of the distortion, and these
changes have progressed in the same manner
in all the  cases we have treated.*
  We see the same progressive changes and
in the same order, in lateral curvatures of the
spine, as seen on a comparison of Fig. 1 with
Fig. 2, and of the other casts in our posses-
sion,  before  described,  and  these  changes
have also progressed  in the same order in all
the cases  we  have  treated; and  in all of
which allopathy, homoeopathy,  hydropathy,
chronopathy, and all other pathies, are equally
and entirely at fault.   And now it  should be
remembered,  and never  be forgotten, that the
magnetic  or  duodynamic  practice  reduces in
the most safe and prompt manner, the enlarged,
thickened, swelled, hypertrophied, or tubercu-

  *  We have always on hand cases of distortion of
the spine and  canes  of the  vertebrae.  We had 16
cases in 1844, aged from one to eight years, and they
are now all well and their spines straight, excepting
J, who were too  far advanced in the disease to be
cured 
103
 lated portions of the organs in the same order
 as  in the above  cases of tuberculated and
 atrophied muscles  in  lateral  curvatures and
 distortions of  the spine, as we have  demon-
 strated in  the clearest  manner time out  of
 mind.   Yet the professors of our medical col-
 leges continue to teach the old antiquated as-
 trological practice, and  the  people are appa-
 rently doomed to be  drugged to  death  like
 their fathers, in all future time; but the study
 of  anatomy and physiology  is being intro-
 duced in our  primary schools, and the mani-
 kins and  magnetic machines are abroad with
 the lecturers on the magnetic symptoms and
"treatment of diseases, and the  magnetizers are
 raising their signs in town  and country, and
 are curing diseases in a prompt, safe and sat-
 isfactory manner.   In  the meantime the peo-
 ple are obtaining a general knowledge of ana-
 tomy, physiology, and of the magnetic symp-
 toms and treatment of diseases, and will soon
 learn the professors  of  these colleges the
 necessity of keeping  pace with the improve-
 ments in the practice of medicine.

           Distortions of the Limbs,
   Fig. 6  is the form of a cast of the lower
 part of the leg, foot and ankle, of a girl aged
 11  years, taken by Dr. Kinne, at the  com-
 mencement of  the  treatment; and Fig. 7 is 
104
the form of a cast  taken  from the same leg,
foot and ankle at the end  of six weeks there-
after.
  The girl used the  limb  many years  in the
 
105
form and manner seen in Fig. 6 ; and the Doc-
tor observes that, " in the treatment of the foot
with which I  presented you casts, one taken
six weeks after the other, without any cutting
of tendons, or other operation, we relied  en-
tirely upon  the magnetic machine and  fric-
tions, to restore the  action oi the  paralysed
muscles." 
106
Magnetizing Medicine.
  In magnetising medicine with the magnetic  ma-
chine, a, iron wires are as good as any other j  and
they should be arranged as seen in  the figure, when
the medicine or water in  the bottle, 6, will be posi-
tive, and that in c, negatire. See p. 89, 90. 
107
  Fever  and  Ague.   In  the cold  stage of
this  disease the patient mayhold one  button
in each hand,  under the greateat power of the
 nachine  that  can well be  borne,  until the
 .hills cease, and in the hot stage they should
 »e magnetized  in the  manner directed  in fe-
 er.   Pages 80—81.   Give quinine.
  Menstrual colic.  Magnetise as in uterine
inertia, page 67, 75.   Give ergot.
   Colic.    Magnetize  as   in   constipation.
Give Colocynth.
  Hemorrnage from  the  lungs.   Magnetize
this  organ  by  placing the positive  button
over the  spinal  nerves connected  with it,
and make long passes with the negative  but-
on  quickly over  the chest.   The hemor-
rhage ceases instantly as in  cases of hemor-
rhage from the uterus, &c., &c.  Give aconite.
   Tubercular disease of the throat.   It is dis-
tinguished  by  the  magnetic symptons,  and
the throat  is  thickened and contracted, and
not dilated, as in  mucous disease of the
throat.  Magnetize by placing one  button in
the hollow of the neck, and make passes with
the other on both sides of the neck.
  Dysentery.   Place the negative button  over
the anus, and  the  positive over the  last lum-
bar vertebra?, under a very moderate  power of
the machine, and then increase the power un-
til the pain ceases, and repeat  if the pain re-
turns 
108
   Suspended  Animation.   Magnetise  the
diaphragm, lungs  and  heart by placing the
positive  button  over the  cartilage of  the
seventh rib of the  left side, and the other
over the phrenic nerve  of the  left side  of
the neck, under the full power of the  ma-
chine to restore  respiration, and then mag-
netise the muscles as  directed  in  page 57.
The effect  on respiration can  be seen when
the buttons are thus  applied to a person  in
health, under a moderate power  of the  ma-
chine.
  Asthma.   Magnetise  as in  chronic bron-
chitis,  p.  81-82.  Dr. W. Philips cured  22
cases by this agent alone.  Give the  same
medicines as  in  chronic bronchitis, p.  82.
See Asthma, p. 125, 188.
  Menstruation—irregular.   Magnetise  the
ovaries, as directed in p. 54.
  Hcematuria, or bloody urine.  Magnetise
the cystis, or  bladder, in  the manner directed
in p. 53.
   Pleurisy.   Magnetise as directed in p. 79.
   Vulva.—[Excessive irritation  of ]— Wash
the  parts three  or four times a day with a
solution of muiiate of mercury.   R Muiiate
Mercury, xv grains ; Hot Water, 3viii.   Mix.
Magnesia as directed in disease of the uterus,
p. 54.—Specific. 
109
   Anaesthesia.   Loss of the sense of touch.
 Magnetise the muscles, as  directed  in  page
 57-58, two or three  times  a day, and  from
 half an hour  to one hour  each time.   Give
 Nux.
   Tubercula  of the  (Esophagus.  Place the
positive button over  the  first dorsal vertebra,
and the negative over the  upper part of the
 pit of the stomach.
   Tubercula   of  the Pancreas.  Place  the
 positive button over the space between the
 fourth and fifth dorsal, and the  negative over
 the lower part of the stomach,  or about four
 or five inches below  the pit of the stomach.
   Tubercula   of the Omentum.  Place the
positive  button  over the space between the
sixth and  seventh  dorsal, and   make passes
downwards with the negative over the stom-
ach and bowels.
   Tubercula  of the  Peritoneum.  The posi-
tive button should be placed over the space
between  the ninth and tenth dorsal vertebrae,
and the negative moved over the painful por-
tions of the abdomen, and repeat two or three
times a day, according to the urgency of the
symptoms. 
110
   Ulcerated Uterus.   Tubercula of the uterus
sometimes terminates  in   ulceration,  from
slight eruptions or from small tumors of  the
size of small peas around the neck of the uterus
(see plate, page    ), and when from  pro-
tracted disease of this organ, or from  any
other cause, there is reason to suspect the ex-
istence of  tumors or ulcerations, the patient
should be  examined  by a clairvoyant, who
will give the  required information in the most
minute and accurate  manner.   On  ascertain-
ing the existence of  these  tumors or ulcera-
tions, inject around them through the vagina
a solution of  the  acetate  of iron (see acetate
of iron), morning and evening with a female
syringe—give mag. gold  pills, and  magnetise
the  uterus, as  directed  in  page 54.   This
treatment cures every case,* and such patients
should never therefore allow physicians either
to introduce conical  glass  tubes to ascertain
by the light of a taper the state of the uterus,
or to introduce and rub around it in any man-
ner the nitrate of  silver, or lunar caustic, or
any other caustic ; for besides the abominable
indelicacy of  this practice, to which few la-
dies will submit, the  caustic makes the neck
of the uterus and also the  vagina as black as
the evil  spirit who  suggested  this  practice,
and almost always   produces  an  impotence
that is incurable.
  * Cases of tuberculated uterua that have become
cancerous are cured in this manner.  See pa~- '18. 
MAGNEPATHY.
            Animal magnetism.

        THE PROCESS  OF MAGNETISING.

  The following directions for magnetising are given by
Delenze, who practised the art more than forty years.
  " When a sick person desires you to attempt to cure
him by magnetism, and neither the family nor the phy-
■ician makes objection to it, if you feel the desire  to
second his wishes, and  are resolved  to continue the
treatment so long as it shall be necessary, settle with
him the  hour of the sittings, make him  promise to be
exact, not to limit himself to an  attempt of a few days,
to conform himself to your advice in relation to regimen,
and not to speak of the undertaking except to persons
who ought naturally to be informed of it.
  " When you are once agreed, and determined to treat
the thing seriously, remove from the patient all persons
who would be troublesome, do not keep near you any ex-
cept necessary witnesses (one only if it can be so), and 
112
request of them not to occupy themselves at all with
the process you employ, nor with the effects that follow,
but to unite with you in the Intention of doing good  to
the patient.  Arrange things so as not to be too cold  or
too warm, so that nothing shall interfere with the free-
dom of your  movements, and take precauUons to  pre-
vent all interruption during the sitting.
  " Cause your patient to sit down in the easiest position
possible, and  place  yourself before him, on a seat a little
more elevated, so that his knees may be between yours,
and  your  feet by the side of his.   Demand of him,  in
the first place, that he give himself up entirely, that he
think of nothing, that he do not trouble himself by ex
amlning the effects which he experiences, that he banish
all fear, and indulge hope, and that he be not disquieted
or discouraged if the action of magnetism produces  In
him  temporary pains.
  " After you "have brought yourself to a state of self-
collectedness, take  his thumbs between your two fin
gers, so that the inside of your thumbs may touch the
Inside of his.  Remain in this situation five minutes,  of
until yon perceive there is an  equal degree of  heat be-
tween your thumbs and his : that  being done,  you will
withdraw your hands, removing them to the right and
left, and waving them so that the interior surface be
turned outwards, and raise  them to his  head ;  then
place them upon his two shoulders, leaving them there
about a minute ; you will  then draw them along the
arm  to the extremity of the  fingers, touching lightly.
You will repeat this pass five or six times, always turn-
ing your hands, and  sweeping them off a little, before
r ascending ; you will then place  your hands upon the
head, hold them there a moment, and bring them down
before the face, at the distance of one or two inches, as
far as the pit of the stomach ; there you will  let them
remain about two minutes, passing the thumb along the
pit of the stomach, and the other fingers down the sides.
Then descend  slowly  along the body as far as the
knees, or farther; and, if you can conveniently, as far
as the ends of the feet.   You may repeat the same pro-
cesses during the greater part of the sitting.  You may
sometimes draw nearer to the patient, so as  to pi ape 
113
  vour hands  behind hto shoulders, descending slowly
  along the spine, thence to the hips, and along the thighs
  as far as  the  knees, or to the feet.   After  the  first
  passes you may dispense with putting your hands upon
  the head, and make the succeeding passes along the
  arras, beginning at the shoulder, or along the body, com-
  mencing at the stomach.
    " When you wish to put an end to the sitting, take
  care  to draw towards the extremity of the hands, and
  towards the extremity of  the feet, prolonging  your
  passes  beyond these extremities, and shaking your fin-
« gers  each time.  Finally, make several  passes trans-
  versely before the face and also before the breast, at the
  distance of three or four inches ; these passes are madu
  by presenting the two hands together and briskly draw-
  ing them from each other;  as if to carry off the super
  abundance of fluid with which the patient may be
  charged.   You  see  that it is  essential to magnetise,
  always descending from the head to the extremities, and
  never mounting from the extremities to the head.  It is
  on this account we turn the hands obliquely when they
  are raised again from the  feet to the head.  The de-
  scending passes are magnetic, that is, they are accom-
  panied with the intention of magnetising.  The ascend-
  ing movements are not.  Many magnetisers shake their
  finger* slightly after each pass.  This method, which is
  never injurious, is in certain cases advantageous, and
  for this reason it is good to get  into the habit of doing it.
    " When the magnetiscr  acts upon the patient, they
  are said  to be in communication (.rapport.)  That is to
  say,  we  menu by the word communication, a peculiar
  and'  induced condition,  which causes the  magnetiser to
  exert an influence upon the patient, there being between
  them a communication of the  vital principle.
    " It is by the ends of the fingers, and especially by
  the thumbs, that the fluid escapes with the most activi-
  ty.  For this reason it is, we  take the thumbs of the
  patient in the first place, and  hold them whenever we
  are at rest.*

     *  There is a magnetic pole iu each of these places,—
  the  largest in the thumb ; a fact unknown to Deleuze 
114
  "The processes I have now Indicated, are the most
regular and advantageous for magnetising  by the long
pass, but It is far from being always proper, or even
possible to employ them.  When a man magnetises a
woman, even if it were his  sister, it might not  be pro-
per to place himself before her in the manner describ-
ed : and also when a patient is obliged to keep his bed,
it would be impossible to make him sit, in order  to sit in
front of him.
  " In the first case, you ran  place yourself by the side
of the  person whom  you wish to magnetise.   First,
take the thumbs, and,  the better to establish the com-
munication, place one  hand upon the stomach,  and the
other upon the back, then lower the two hands, oiiposlte
to each other, one down the back, and the other at a
distance down the fore part of the body, one hand de-
scending to the feet.   You  may magnetise the two
arms, one after the other, witli one hand only.
  "In case the patient cannot raise  himself, take your
station near  his bed in the  most convenient manner:
take his thumbs, make several passes along the arm*,
and if he can support himself upright, several along the
back; then, not to  fatigue yourself, use only one hand,
placing  it upon the stomiirh, and making  longitudinal
passes, at first slightly touching through the  clothes,
then at a distance.  You can hold one hand fixed upon
the knees or upon the feet, while the other Is in  motion.
Finish by  pusses  along the legs, and by  transversa]
passes before the head, the breast, and the stomach, to
scatter the  superabundant  fluid. When the communi-
cation Is established, one can magnetise very  well by
placing  himself at the foot of the patient's bed, and ip
front of him ; then directing at that distance both hands
from the head to the feet, dashine them aside after earn
pass, so as not to conduct the fluid to himself.  I have
produced somnambulism by this process, without esta-
blishing the communication by touching.
   " This is what I have to say about magnetising by the
long pass, with which it is always proper to commence,
and to which a person may confine himself until he has
a reason for employing other processes." 
115
              Magnetic Sleep.

  A much greater number of persons can be
put into the magnetic or mesmeric sleep  un-
der the combined influence of the rotary mag-
netic machine and  the  magnetiser, than by
the common method, or that of the magneti-
ser alone.  We  have put persons into  that
state by the influence of the machine alone.
  In the combined operation, we place  the
positive button in the left hand of the person
to be magnetised, and take the  negative but-
ton in our left hand, and then take with the
other hand the  right hand of  the same per-
son, under the most moderate power of  the
instrument.
  The patient is then requested to look stead-
ily at some  small object, as the  armature of
the instrument, as long as  the  eyes  can be
kept open, and  then to close them and go to
sleep, or into the mesmeric state.
  This manner of magnetising, like every
other, should be practised, under the most fa-
vorable circumstances, as regards time, place
and seclusion, and should  be repeated every
day at  the  same hour, until the object is ef-
fected.
  When persons or patients have passed into
the mesmeric state, they should  be treated in
the most mild and respectful manner, and if 
116
they shjw  symptoms of restlessness, a few
passes  should be made from the head, along
the arms to the feet, which will quiet  them,
and they may then  bf  allowed to remain in
that state a  few minutes  or one  or more
hours, according to the judgment of the mag-
netiser, when  they may be  aroused in a mo-
ment, by reversing the action of the machine,
or by the reversed passes, or passes with the
back of the hands over the face at right an-
gles with the median line.
   Patients are sometimes clairvoyant the first
time they are  mesmerised, but not generally
so; they will, however, tell  the  number of
times it will be necessary to mesmerise them
before  they will become clairvoyant.   They
advance in light and knowledge by degrees in
 he mesmeric or somnicient state.   There are
six of  these degrees, and six  sub-degrees or
steps in each degree, thus making  thirty-six;
and  the clearness and extent  of their vision,
as well as of  their  intuitive  knowledge, in-
creases as they advance  in the different de-
grees.   There are, it appears, very few who
advance higher than the third degree, or eight.
een steps.   A few are  raised as  high as the
fifth degree, but these are the bounds it seems
they cannot or do not pass with impunity.
   These recognized  degrees are described as
circles of light in the  form of a cone, with 
117
steps of degrees of  less light in spiral circles,
belwsen the  greater degrees of light in per-
fect circles—the spiral being continuous, and
terminating in a disc of the most intense light
in the top of the cone, as represented  in the
engraving.  (See page 118.)
  The light is  represented as radiating from
the disc at the  top, to the bottom of the cone,
and the intensity of the light is minimum in
the first degree at the base, and increasing in
each degree as they rise to  the sixth,  where
it is at its maximum.
   A reversed interior arrangement or inverted
cone, is  also described  by clairvoyants, cor-
responding with that in the circumference, as
seen  by  its  outlines  in the engraving—the
great degrees of  both being  interspersed with
rooms or apartments of light, which are proba-
bly reflections  from the  phrenological organs.
   The first great degree of light forming the
base of the cone first described, surrounds 'the
base of the  brain, while the  sixth degree is
mounted  on  its summit.
   Clairvoyants  have the power or faculty of
increasing the  diameter of the great degrees
or circles of light, to an unlimited  extent, for
the purpose  of encompassing objects, situated
at great  distances, and enabling  them to de-
scribe with great accuracy, especially in the
  ntense light of the higher degrees. 
 
119
   The light is very dim in the first degree,
less so in the second, and at a medium in the
third;  in which degree clairvoyants see  and
describe  very well  under favorable circum-
stances,  but are otherwise  subject to great
errors in their descriptions, as well as in the
first and  second degrees.
   In  raising clairvoyants to  the  higher de-
grees, magnetisers should  proceed with great
caution.    They  should  first inquire  about
their knowledge of  the degrees in the somni-
cient  state, and then of the  degree they are
in.  If they are in one of  the lower degrees,
the magnetiser  may then inquire whether he
can raise  them to the next  degree.  If the
answer is in the affirmative, he may proceed
to raise them by the exercise of his will; but
if it is in the negative, the clairvoyants will,
on inquiry, tell him how many times it will
be  necessary to  magnetise them, before  he
can  raise  them  to  the  next degree.    We
have  great doubts  of  the  propriety of any
attempt  to raise them  higher than  .the fifth
degree, even with  the most  perfect  prepara-
tions for it; because  in the present state of
our knowledge  they cannot be raised to the
sixth  degree without  great danger, indeed,
without the peril of  their lives; and there is
no real necessity for it, as the light is intense
enough in the fifth degree, and there are also 
120
sights enough that may be seen in that degree
to satisfy the cravings of the most marvellou?.
   The phenomena of the  degrees in the la-
byrinth we  have  described, as seen in the
somnicient state, and about \\ hich  there ap-
pears to be no reasonable doubt, is one of the
most extraordinary that  was ever  presented
to the human mind; yet it  is a perfectly sim-
ple, and beautiful magnetic arrangement, re-
sulting from the operation of magnetising, or
of giving a new and systematic magnetic form
to the  brain—of adding an artificial to the
natural  organization, in which the  organiza-
tion  of the great  pole in  the  centre of the
brain (2) is reflected upon its surface, and from
thence  into infinite space.
   The poles of all the other  organs are or-
ganized in a similar manner as seen in the
somnicient state;  that is, they are  organized
with circles at right angles with their radia-
tions, like  those  seen on  the summit of the
labyrinth, and some clairvoyants see through
those of  the stomach.  Besides the concur-
rent testimony of clairvoyants on the organi-
zation  of magnetic poles,  it is found  on a
comparison  of our previous  knowledge on
this  subject,  that  their  descriptions   agree
exactly, as  far as our knowledge  extends.
We were well  acquainted with the  radia-
tions,, with  the circles at  right angles with. 
121
them—with their  light, and with their spira.
circles and  inverted  cones; and could not,
therefore, fail to recognize in these descrip-
tions, a magnetic organization.
  Those who are unaccustomed to  magnetic
phenomena, however, find great difficulty in
reconciling with their preconceived  notions,
the possibility of  persons being able to see,
and  thereby distinguish, objects  through any
other medium than that of external light, and
by means of the ordinary functions of vision.
The  idea of any light, except that which
comes from  external objects, seems to be re-
garded as unphilosophical, if  not assumptive
rf the  supernatural, although an  easy and
palpable  demonstration of the  fact is, at all
times, within the reach of the most sceptical
and supercilious.   Let the doubter and sneer-
er simply close his eyes,  so as to exclude all
external light, retiring,  if he please, into  a
perfectly dark room where not  a ray exists,
and on pressing his fingers on  his eye-balls,
he will see, without  that mechanism of the
eye  which  is essential  to external  vision,
several distinct and concentric  rings of light,
around a central point of still  greater brillian-
cy.   Asd though he  be afflicted with  blind-
ness  towards external things, this  power of
internal  vision will be in nowise impaired.
The  light thus seen is magnetic, being elicit- 
122
ed from the two poles, of opposite denomi-
nations, which belong to the crystalline lens;
and is doubtless of the same character as that
which is affirmed by clairvoyants to exist in
the brain, the heart, the cervical glands, the
kidneys and other  organs, and by which, in
fact, they  are  enabled to trace the  whole
magnetic organization of the human system.
With the intense luminosity of the magnetic
forces when in atmospheric combustion, every
one is familiar; and we have now furnished
an  example, at least  equally familiar,  in
which  this luminosity is as independent of
atmosphere, as it is distinct from  every other
kind of  light.  In  short, every one can see
for himself precisely the same kind of  light
that is beheld by clairvoyants in the mesme-
ric state.
  The internal organization of the pole in the
centre of the  brain, as disclosed in the somni-
scient state, is, however, the subject of the
greatest interest;  for  the  interior  invert-
ed cone,  described by clairvoyants,  is the
magnetic miniature germ of the form of the
brain.  The heart, lungs, stomach, and other
organs, as well as the  limbs, have  magnetic
miniature germs of their organizations, which
are varied, according to the variations in the
forms of  the organs and limbs, as seen  by
clairvoyants.   These organizations are also 
123
6een  to  be connected together by magnetic
axes  and  interlacings,  irrespective  of  the
organization  of  the nervous system,  and
constitute  a  perfect magnetic,  spiritual, or
immaterial form,  corresponding with  that
which is material.   They are purely spiritual
forms, connected with, or inclosed  in, those
that are  material,  and according to the con-
current testimony of clairvoyants, these spir-
itual forms are raised in all the beauty of their
earthly tenements, like the spiritual forms of
the rose.
  The germs, with which the human system
was formed and perpetuated, are, therefore,
magnetic  or immaterial  forms,  inclosed in
those that are  material; and according to
the  same  concurrent testimony,  the entire
animal and vegetable kingdoms  were formed,
and perpetuated in the same manner.   Hence
we ii.fer a corresponding cosmogony of  the
solar system, and of the stars in the heavens.

      Light and Images of the Degrees.
  In  the first degree and first state of magne-
tic sleep, the light is a pale blue.*
  In  the second degree and second  state, the

  * They change from the natural to higher states, as
they enter in and advance in the degrees. 
124
light is  a little stronger, and a  little deeper
blue.
   In the third state, these sleepers are fully
Under magnetic influence, and the  light a clear
sky-blue.  They  see objects in a straight or
direct line, through the  magnetic  medium in
space, but not comprehensively,  or inclosing
various objects as in the natural state.
   In the fourth degree and  fourth state, the
light is stronger, and  extends  farther than in
the  lower degrees.  Persons with  moral or-
gans largely developed, are  disposed to  see
immaterial or spiritual objects in this degree.
   In the fifth degree and fifth state, the light
is still more intense, and clairvoyants less in-
clined to view or take cognizance of  natural,
external  or material  objects, but  disposed to
remain in this exalted  state.
   In the sixth degree and sixth state, the ten-
dency of  going into  it is instant death, and
should be most cautiously avoided.
   In the first  state of magnetic sleep, persona
retain more or less of  their intellectual facul-
ties, and  are more  or less  susceptible to exter-
nal influence.
   In the second  state the  paralysis  of  the
muscles, and the insensibility of  the  skin is
complete—the natural sight  lost,  the  hearing
more or less impaired, and a muscular attrac-
tion established. 
125
   In the third state a strong sympathy is es-
tablished between the mind of the subject and
the magnetiser—the mind of the former being
under the control  of the latter.
   In the fourth state  the mind of the clair-
voyant soars far above that of the magnetiser,
and becomes free  and independent.
   These phenomena are the  consequence of
reversing the natural order of the magnetic or
spiritual organization of  the body.  The ne-
gative  and  insensible forces  connected with
the inner or mucous membranes or surfaces, and
motor nerves, are attracted to the outer or se-
rous membranes, and nervesof sensation, while
the positive and  sensitive forces in these ex-
ternal surfaces are repelled  to  the inner or
mucous membranes  and surfaces, and hence
the cause of this  reversed order of sensibility
and insensibility of the opposite or serous and
mucous surfaces
   In passing into the magnetic state, a person
feels a disposition to sleep, and then a prick-
ing sensation in the skin, followed by a gene-
ral numbness—the natural light fading, when
perfect  darkness  ensues.  A glimmering of
magnetic light then begins to appear, when a
shock  ensues, followed  by a blaze of light,
consciousness and clairvoyance. 
                    126

       Insensibility in Magnetic Sleep,
  Among  the  extraordinary  phenomena  of
magnetic  sleep,  is  the  insensibility of  the
skin, or external surface of the body often in-
duced, and the establishment of an exaltation
of sensibility in  the mucous or internal sur-
faces, in which the natural order  of the mag-
netism of the human system is reversed.
  Now, the  magnetiser reverses this  order
unconsciously,  in the process of  magnetising,
by repelling the positive forces from the sur-
 
127
face to the centre, and attracting the negative
forces  to the surface, and this reversal of the
order of the magnetism of bodies is according
to a law of these  force?, and is therefore
founded in nature, and easily imitated.      1
  If a round iron, or steel  plate, or disc, with
a hole in  the  centre, representing a middle
horizontal section  of the body, is placed on
the positive pole of a Galvanic Battery, under
a moderate power,  it presents the phenomena
represenfed in the first, or preceding timire: 01
 
128
a  negative  internal, and  a positive external
surface; but if we now place the plate on the
negative pole of  the  same  battery, the order
of  the  magnetism  of the plate will  be re-
versed, as represented  in  the second figure:
showing in the first figure the natural order of
the magnetism of the body, and in the second,
the induced order, in the magnetic state. 
129
         Paralysis in Magnetic Sleep.
  On a  Sunday evening in August, 1845, a
young woman, named Emma W----, about
24 years of age, who had long been a  Clair-
voyant, and who had at length  acquired the
power of  putting  herself into the magnetic
sleep, without the  aid  of a  magnetizer, was
at trie office of  the Author of this work, dur-
ing his absence on professional duties, await-
ing his return.   A friend of his  who was al-
so staying  to  see  him, thinking this  a good
opportunity to elicit  the  phenomena of clair-
voyance  with  less  liability of interruption
than might have been afforded on a business
day, requested the lady to put  herself into
that state,  and inform  him  concerning the
the  nature  of the luminous atmosphere, spots
and  opaque body  of the sun.  She  replied
that she feared it was rather a dangerous ex-
periment, and had heard  of  several clairvoy-
ants who had suffered  severely in  attempting
it.  She  nevertheless consented, saying that
she would  endeavor  not to venture too far.
  In the course  of five or six minutes,  she
manifested  all  the usual symptoms of a com-
plete  magnetic sleep, and apprised her inter-
rogator, with some  slight degree of irresolu
tion, that she was ready to attempt an inspec-
tion of  the solar  orb.   Shortly afterwards, 
130
she evinced a highly nervous shrinking, as if
from a sense  of awe, and said, in answer to
an inquiry, that she felt the solar influence to
be too  powerful for  her  to  persist, and was
afraid she would lose her senses—in her own
words  she feared " that her whole  mind
would be  consumed."  She was accordingly
requested to venture  no farther, but remain if
possible, in the position she had acquired,
and describe what  she saw.  She  then said
that she had now a view of the dark body of
the sun—that it was black, but  highly lus-
trous, like " black  shining  melted  metal;"
she was  confident  it  was  highly metallic,
though she could look  at  it no  longer, as it
was  again closing up in  a degree of bright-
ness which she could not endure.
  Whlist obtaining  these answers, the gen-
tleman in communication with her, perceived
that her left arm was greatly paralyzed, and
the hand became  so  tightly clenched that he
could with difficulty rescue  his  fingers from
the painful grasp.   Speedily she announced
that  she was absolutely paralyzed  on  the
whole of  her  left side, and  was fearful that
she would be convulsed all over.  She  added
that " if she had continued so near the  sun a
minute longer,  the  influence would  have
killed her;" and,  as it was, she knew  not
how she  could recover   from  the  convul- 
131
sions she felt approaching, unless some pow-
erful magnetiser could be obtained to awaken
her.  Shortly after this, her convulsions be-
came so violent and  alarming, as to  induce
the gentleman who was with  her to  call for
assistance to hold her in the chair.   She be-
came unable to speak or hear; she  breathed
only at long intervals with great  labor: her
right hand was kept so forcibly on her heart,
that it could not  be  moved with  the united
strength of two  or three  persons; and the
action of the heart itself, seemed to be entirely
suspended.  The  pulse were frightfully inter-
mittent, and for long intervals, wholly imper-
ceptible ; the eyes were open,  with the pupils
half buried beneath the lower  lids, and great-
ly dilated.
   In this  state, varied only  by  convulsive
paroxyms of greater or less intensity, she con-
tinued nearly four  hours, when the  writer,
who had been  detained  much  beyond the
usual  time, returned.  He found her  sur-
rounded  by  his family and medical assistants,
tog-ether with a  magnetiser and a male clair-
voyant who had  been sent for to relieve her.
Their efforts however, had produced  only
slight and transient effects in  mitigating her
condition, and we now judged it  proper to
attempt  to  establish  a communication with
her, aB the only means of awakening her, and 
132
with this view, commenced making the long
magnetic passes, and  then  reversed   them.
The effect  of  these was very striking, even
from the first: producing sudden starts, fol-
lowed by greater freedom of respiration, and
some degree  of  relaxation of  the  muscles.
The male clairvoyant present being in a mag-
netic state,  recommended that as soon  as her
arms became  sufficiently relaxed, her  hands
should be kept in  a basin of cold water, and
the passes continued ; adding that  under this
process she would awake in twenty-five min-
utes, although it would require a much long-
er time  for  her to  recover from what  he de-
scribed  as  her " rash  attempt," the effects of
which upon her  brain and nervous system he
minutely and lucidly described.
   As soon as  her  hands could be placed in
the  water, several watches  were observed,
and the assigned  twenty-five  mtnutes curi-
ously awaited  by the spectators.  Precisely at
the end of  this period, she awoke and  spoke,
her whole  left side, however, which had first
been attacked, still  remaining perfectly para-
lyzed, not excepting even the left arm  which
had been so directed as to reach the basin of
water.  To remove this state of paralysis, the
writer  found  it necessary to  resort  to the
Magnetic Machine.  It was used three times
a day, and on the third day the paralysis dis- 
133
appeared, and she was able to  return to her
home.
  We publish this case as a caution to mag-
netisers and clairvoyants  against gratifying
the curiosity, so  frequently evinced by per-
sons ignorant of the dangerous  nature of the
experiment, of instituting  clairvoyant explo-
rations  of  the  sun.   This is but one out of
many well authenticated instances which we
might report, in which the attempt has nearly
proved  fatal.  The  planets, however, may
be, and  frequently  are, examined by  good
clairvoyants, with perfect safety and success.
  The following communication is from the
Rev Samuel Griswold, of Lyme, Ct., a very
accurate  observer, and  a very  powerful
mesmeriser.
        Polarity of the Human Hand,
To  the Editor of the N.  Y. Dissector:
        Some  facts were presented, in  an
early number of the Dissector, in proof of the
Polarity of the  human hand.   During the
last two years I have  frequently tried ex-
periments illustrating the same truth.
  1. The following is a pretty  experiment,
and may be tried by those, who do not un-
derstand the process of inducing the som-
nicient state by Animal Magnetism. 
134
  Place together the ends of the thumb and
of all the fingers of your right hand, so that
they will all touch at  once any flat surface
as a table.  The Magnetic currents from the
poles in the ends  of the thumb and of the
fingers will thus  be  made  to  concentrate
their influence on a comparatively small sur-
face.   Let  a second person hold the palm of
his  left hand, upward and  horizontally,—
bringing the elbow opposite the side,  at a
little distance from it; being careful not to
rest his hand or arm on any part of  himself
or other object.   Then bring your concen-
trated thumb and  fingers over the  centre of
the  palm of his  hand (the location of the
large pole), holding  it for some time, an
incn, or half  an inch distant from it.   A
sensation of warmth will be felt, if both the
experimentors are right handed, or both left
handed, and both in their  normal magnetic
state.   This warmth  is  occasioned  by the
union of negative force in your right hand,
with the positive force in his left  hand, on
the principle that magnetic forces of  oppo-
site denominations, on being united, attract
and contract, consequently expel heat.
  Next bring the thumb and fingers of your
right hand over the right hand of the other
person in same manner as in the first experi-
ment ; and a sensation of  cold, like a very 
135
slight breeze, will be produced by the two
forces,—on  the  principle  that  magnetic
forces of the same denomination, on  being
united, repel and expand—consequently ab-
sorb heat, and cause  the sensation of cold.
  If you next hold your left  hand over the
right hand of the other person, and then over
his  left—both  being placed as in the former
experiments, you  will obtain the same re-
sults.
  I have frequently  discovered, by this ex-
periment, that persons were left-handed, as
the warm sensation was produced by bring-
ing nearly together both of our right hands,
or both of our left hands; and the cold sensa-
tion by the near approximation of  the right
hand of one to the left hand of the other.
  The negative force, being stronger than the
positive, will be found on the right side of
 {(ersons who  are right handed; and on the
 eft side of those who are  left-handed.
  In both these cases the  normal state may
be reversed by local injuries or partial para-
lysis of the stronger  side.
  Many persons nave not sufficient suscep-
tibility to magnetic impressions, to perceive
these sensations.   In some  cases,  also, it
will require considerable time for the  mag-
netic communication to be established be-
tween the two experimentors. 
136
   Many, who have  stoutly professed their
disbelief in  Animal  Magnetism,  or even
ridiculed it as a humbug, have honestly de-
clared to me, that they very distinctly perceiv-
ed both the warm and cold sensations in the
foregoing experiment.  But their disavowal
cut them off" from any possible source of ex-
planation of the phenomena produced.
   2. Another proof of the opposite polarity
of the two hands, I have often deduced from
the somnicient subject.
   Care was taken not to disturb the polarity
of either side by cross manipulations.  When
the subject was declared, by himself, to be
in the magnetic sleep, 1 have crossed my
arms, so that my right hand came in contact
with his right hand,  and my left with his
left, and have often  been surprised  by the
marked  effect.  I  have often tried this ex-
periment with C. M. R.,  a young lady of
delicate  constitution and  magnetic  sensi-
bility, whom  I  have magnetized for her
health.  When in  the  somnicient state, I
have often touched her right hand with my
right  hand,  which  gave her a  powerful
shock, attended with  an  unpleasant  sensa-
tion.  Even one finger produced this shock.
If  I took hold of her right  hand with my
right, and her left hand with  my left, she
would manifest great uneasiness,  and im- 
13?
mediately change her hands, taking my right
hand with  her left, and my left with  her
right.   Other somnicients, less sensitive,
have perceived a different influence from my
two  hands  when applied to either of their
hands;  and  have often directed how  the
two  hands  should be placed in reference to
their opposite polarity.

      Influence in Remedial Applications.
  A knowledge  of  the distinct polarity of
each  hand, yea, of the whole side, is of
great practical importance in the application
of the remedial influences  of Animal Mag-
netism.
  1. In producing Clairvoyance, great care
should be used not to disturb the polarity of
the two sides of the subject, otherwise much
confusion may be produced.
  2. Local inflammations  may be removed
by applying  the  repulsive and cooling  in-
fluence to the diseased or injured part.
  While in  your office, more than a year
ago, writh Dr. ------,  of  strong, healthy
constitution,  had  a painful sensation and
some inflammation in  his right eye, pro-
duced, if I rightly remember, by a small par-
ticle of  sulphate  of copper. I applied  the
fingers of my right hand, held at a little dis-
tance from  his eye ; and he immediately felt 
138
the cooling sensation, mentioned in the fore-
going experiments;  and very speedily both
the pain and inflammation were removed.
  3.  Your  directions for magnetizing with
your magnetic machine, are equally appli-
cable to the appliance of Animal Magnet-
ism.   The  right hand corresponds to the
negative button, and the left  hand to the
positive  button.  In magnetizing  for  dis-
eases of the organs, the right  hand should
generally be placed  on  the  spine  opposite
the organ diseased, and  the  left hand over
the place where the pain is felt.
  4.  Your  diagrams and explanations of the
poles in the brain and in the internal organs,
are of very great importance to those who
magnetize for disease.
      Your much obliged friend,
               SAMUEL GRISWOLD.
  Lyme, Ct., Feb. 
139
     Magnetic Light and Magnetic Poles.
  In Magnetizing with the vibratory mag-
netic machine, we become familiar with mag-
netic light—with its color, and intensity, &c.
Its color is that  of the  sun, and its  intensity
increases from the smallest glimmering to the
greatest  brilliancy, with the increase  of the
strength of the poles in the magnet and piston,
and consequently with the power of the in-
strument.  This light does not emanate from
a process of. combustion requiring oxygen to
support  it, but  is equally brilliant when en-
veloped in  water, or in an exhausted receiver,
and is the light which is seen by clairvoyants
to issue  with the greatest intensity from the
poles of  magnets, and the poles of the organs
and muscles, &c.  Clairvoyants see  with the
light which emanates from the great pole  in
the  centre of the brain, and they see the in-
ternal parts of  animals,  and of  the human
body, lighted up with the light from the poles
of the organs and muscles, &c.
  The organs and muscles are thus seen  in
the  most clear  and distinct  manner  in their
healthy state, but when they are diseased, the
light becomes dim in proportion to the inten-
sity of the disease, and in some extreme cases
becomes extinct in an organ or limb, with the
strength  of their  poles, according to the con-
current testimony of clairvoyants, and the fact 
140
that these organs and limbs are feeble, in pro-
portion to the decrease of light, and are para-
lysed  when it is extinct, is strongly confirma-
tory of this testimony.
  There  is a  great  difference in  the size of
these  poles   The  largest in the  human sys-
tem is that in the centre of the brain, and is
of course of  the first magnitude.   There is
one in the hollow of each foot, of  the second
magnitude, and one in the palm of each hand,
of the third.  Those in the organs of casu-
alty,  and amativeness—in  the lungs,  heart,
stomach,  kidneys,  testicles, ovaries,  and
vagina, are of  the fourth magnitude.—Those
in the liver, spleen, pancreas, solar plexus,
uterus, and ileo-ccecal  valve are of the  fifth
magnitude.  Those in the joints  of the limbs
are of the sixth, and those in the eyes, in the
phrenological organs, ganglions,  of the spinal
nerves, and in the  angles, or  convolutions of
the intestines, of the seventh magnitude, and
those in  the skin of the eighth magnitude.
  These poles in  the organs, joints, muscles
and skin, &c, show radiations from a centre
or nidus, like those from the poles of mag-
nets,  and are, like them, connected with mag-
netic  axes and interlacings, and thus make a
magnetic or  spiritual form, like the human
form, on which matter is laid in  the construc-
tion of the human system.   These poles are 
                    141

endowed with motion, power, light, sensation,
inclination, and consciousness, as is seen and
demonstrated in the clearest manner.
  The following  engraving is intended to pre-
sent a view of the great pole in the centre of
the brain, as seen by clairvoyants.   It occu-
pies the  whole space between the  circle  of
small poles of the phrenological organs.   It
is very  light, especially  the  nidus in  the
centre and summit, which has ths same inten-
sity as the sun, and  is always  in motion, ex-
cepting in natural sleep, when it is in a quies-
cent state.   The  form in a  situation corres-
ponding to  that of the spinal marrow, a  is a
continuation of the nidus, or nest of  magnetic
forms, and the small poles on each side, are
those of the ganglions of the posterior spinal
nerves in  the intervertebral spaces,  which
gives them sensation.  This great pole is sur-
rounded with  six great circles, and  six small,
intermediate  circles  of  light, and  the other
large poles, from the first to the fourth mag-
nitude, are surrounded with a certain number
of similar circles of light,  as those of  the
lungs,  heart, and stomach, &c. 
142
 
143
             Clairvoyant Powers.
   A great difference in the  clairvoyant pow-
ers of  different persons in the magnetic  state
has often been noticed, and is the consequence
of  various causes.   Among these is a differ-
ence in the organization of  the brain—in the
phrenological organs,  and  in  the  relative
quantity of grey or cortical substance around
these organs.  Besides, some are in the lower
or first, second,  or third degrees, while others
have been raised to the fourth, or fifth degrees.
Another cause of difference is that of a differ-
ence in their education  ; and another, that of
the minds, and theories of their magnetisers, or
those  who conduct the examinations of the
different subjects presented to them, and this
last cause of difference  may often  produce the
most discordant  results.
   The  only  manner  of obviating these dif-
ferences in the cases that are remediable, is to
educate them, or at least to give them a gene-
ral knowledge of the arts or sciences to which
their attentions or business, as clairvoyants, is
mostly devoted,  and this object is easily affec-
ted by teaching them in the magnetic state, as
they remember when in it, and rarely forget
what they  once  learn in that state.
   Those devoted to the practice of medicine,
uhould be  taught anatomy, physiology, and
magnetism, with the magnetic organization of 
144
the human system, and the two great divisions
of diseases,  or those  of  the  serous  and
mucous surfaces, and their magnetic or duo-
dynamic  treatment,  or with  the  magnetic
machine and magnetised medicines.   And this
is a matter of great importance, as there is no
longer any doubt that the effects  of medicine,
whatever they may be, is the consequence of
the action, ol imponderable, or imperceptible
agents condensed in them, upon  the nervous,
spiritual,  or  magnetic  organization of  the
system.
  Besides the common clairvoyants who lite-
rally see things as they appear  to them in
their  natural state, and besides, have  intui-
tions of the past and future, there are  others
who do not see literally, but have impressions
more  or less vivid, that things or objects ap-
pear,  and  are  as they describe them.   Jack-
son Davis is an example, or one of those who
have  impressions, instead of  literal sight in
the magnetic state, and we know other exam-
ples of  the same kind in this city.  Some few
clairvoyants recollect in their natural state,
very distinctly, many of the objects they see
in the magnetic state, and some of the impres-
sionists recollect, in the natural state, many of
their impressions in the  magnetic state, and on
a full investigation of the  subject, there ap-
pears to be no doubt but clairvoyants see lite- 
145
tally, and the impressionists have impression*
or intuitions common to both, without literal
sight, or clairvoyance.*
   The  present, past, and  future knowledge
daily displayed by a great many persons in the
magnetic state, leaves no room to doubt  but
they have an intuitive knowledge in that state,
which  is more  or  less perfect, besides  the
knowledge  they obtain from  literal sight or
clairvoyance, and the evidences on this subject
having been frequently described, and often
observed  by a great number of the most intel-
ligent persons in almost every community, it
is deemed a  useless task to enumerate them
here.   It would also be useless  to enumerate
the evidences of the great superiority of clair-
voyants to mere  impressionists, as it must be
self-evident to every sane mind ; besides  the
lucidity and  accuracy of the former, and  the
illusions and phantasies often displayed by the
latter are  proverbial.
   On an examination of the  subject of these
intuitions, or of immediate knowledge without
the deductions  of  reason, they  are plainly
seen to be  the natural  emanations  from  the

  » We recollec*. d'vinotly. many objects we see in
the majrnoie snte. an 1 '<..■>\v tliat we see tlie-i: lite-
rally a-i we .1  - vr.n <>u. eyes in the natural oVing
state a.iJ we  '• " been in the habit r.f thus seeiig
them during tae last ten years, and cannot posi.Mj
be mistaken. 
146
exalted  organs of the  magnetised brain, and
not from supernatural agency, as suggested
by the marvellous.  They  are  not, in fact,
confined to  persons in  the magnetic state,
but are common to  many persons in the nat-
ural waking  state,  numerous examples of
which are  familiar  to  persons  of observa-
tion.

     Clairvoyant Examinations of Diseases.
  There is rarely any thing presented to the
mind of  a physician which  is so  unintelligi-
ble as the reported  examinations  of diseases
by  clairvoyants  when   those  examinations
have been   conducted  by persons who have
little or no  knowledge  of diseases, anatomy
or  physiology, and they  are  consequently
unable to form an  opinion of the good or
bad effects  that may be expected from the
prescriptions of clairvoyants in  such cases,
yet it is the opinion of  many well-informed
persons, that these prescriptions are generally
more successful than those of the best physi-
cians.   When, however, these examinations
are  conducted by physicians, they are gene-
rally very satisfactory, and  in a  great variety
of cases are very useful, and in  many others
indispensable to forming a  true  diagnosis as
well as a correct  prognosis of diseases.  The
prescriptions of clairvoyants under such eir- 
147
cumstances  are generally well understood,
and their value duly appreciated.  As an ex-
ample, we may refer to the cases of deafness,
the causes of  which in any given case is al-
most  always  unknown, and  would always
remain so, without a clairvoyant or post mor-
tem examination.  The eustation, or auditory
tube,  through  which the sound  passes from
the ear  to the throat, may be obstructed by
hardened  wax, by tuberculations, or  by false
membranes, or the deafness may be the con-
sequence of paralysis (more or less complete),
of  the auditory nerve.  Now it is easy to be
seen  that the treatment,  to  be successful,
must  be different in each  case, for the har-
dened wax must be removed, or melted with
steam, the  tuberculations  must be  reduced
with  the  remedies  for tubercula,  the false
membranes must be broken up with an instru-
ment, and the  paralysis must be removed by
the remedies for mucosis or atrophia, includ-
ing the action  of the magnetic  machine, and
hence the great importance of clairvoyant ex-
aminations in  these cases.
  Although we can determine in an  instant
the character of the disease of an organ or
limb by the magnetic symptoms, yet we can-
not always  tell how far the disease has  ad-
vanced,  whether it is curable, or too  late to
be cured without a clairvoyant examination, 
148
and this is often a matter of great importance,
It is also often a matter of great importance to
observe by clairvoyance the changes that  oc-
cur in the appearance of a disease during  the
process of cure from changes of temperature,
from  colds,  and from various other causes.
Clairvoyance is also a matter of great impor-
tance to females—in diseases peculiar to their
sex, and in enabling ladies  to  avoid the most
revolting examinations with the most perfect
safety, and with credit to themselves and their
families.   Besides the examination of patients
when they are present, clairvoyants  examine
patients at great distances from them, and in
fact in any part of  the world, and  generally
with the same accuracy as if they were pre-
sent.   It is  the magnetic forms, or spirits of
these  clairvoyants that travel  over any part
of the world, and are present with those  pa-
tients when  they examine them.   We know
that their spirits travel, and are present with
the patients  in these  examinations, from  the
fact that the full  exercise of  all  their senses
while travelling to different places, and during
the examinations of  these  patients.  They
see the country and towns they pass through,
feel the changes in temperature and climate,
hear  any uncommon  or strange  sounds, ag
the blowing  of horns, the noise of steamboats,
or the roaring of the  falls of Niagara, &c. 3 
149
 notice uncommonly pleasant or disagreeable
 odors, visit places of amusement, and have a
 sense of fatigue, hunger, and thirst.   Besides,
 if one of these patients have a paralysed limb,
 a corresponding limb  of the clairvo}ant  be-
 comes  paralysed  the same as if the patient
 was present and having hold of the haud of
 the  clairvoyant.  Such are the well  ascer-
 tained  facts, and such is the evidence on this
 subject, which is deemed perfectly conclusive,
 no matter  how extraordinary it may appear
 to those who are not initiated into the myste-
 ries of the magnetism of the human system.*
   When clairvoyants are tired, unable or un-
 willing to travel to the places where patients
 reside, the magnetisers can direct the magnetic
 forms, or spirits of these  patients   to appear
 before them, when  they do  so appear with
 their diseases, and  in the proper   form  and
 dress,  or costume  of  these  patients  where
 they are examined  with the same  accuracy
 they are under the other circumstances before
 described, and are then  directed to return to
 their several places of abode, when  they soon
 disappear.   Such  are the  well-ascertained


  * The magnetisers must always conduct the clair-
voyants home before they demagnetise, or wake them,
but if they should forget to do so, they must magne-
tise them again, and then conduct them home. 
150
facts in these cases, and such is the power of
the human will.*
   We have been engaged in the  examination
of patients by clairvoyants  about four years,
and in the daily practise of it during the last
two years, and have during all this time, ex-
amined a  great many hundred cases, and can-
not possibly be mistaken in any  of  the facts
above mentioned.
   The great and universal  accaracy of these
examinations has uniformly elicited the most
flattering  commendations,  as  well from  per-
sons  residing at great distances as from those
of this city and vicinity,  and among these
there  are many who rank with those of the
highest order of intellect.   The results of these
examinations, with the success of the  practice
founded upon them, has so increased our cor-
respondence as to make it  a  matter of some
importance to us in the saving of labor, to ex-
plain  these  mysteries in  this  work   for the
benefit of our  correspondents, and to enable
them to furnish us with the means for exam-

 * The magnetiser must always be careful to direct the
spirit of the patient to return to its place of abode, and
see that it  departs before he demagnetises  or wakes
the clairvoyant, but if he should forget to do so, he
 will soon learn his mistake, as the clairvoyant will
 probably be very much frightened, and may go into
 convulsions, and he should therefore magnetise the
 clairvoyant again as soon as possible. 
                    151
 ining patients at great distances with great fa-
 cility, or in the shortest time.
  Examinations of Patients at Great Distances. ]
   When we wish to examine a patient resid-
 ing at a great distance from us, we can put a
 person present who has been at  the abode of
 such patient in communication with the clair-
 voyant, and direct  that person to conduct  the
 clairvoyant to the patient, or  in  the absence
 of  such person, we can place a letter from
 the patient, or from a  person in the family of
 the patient, in the  hands of the clairvoyant,
 with  directions to find the patient, when a
 light starts off in the form of the  great pole in
 the centre of the brain with its train of small
 poles,* followed by the spirit of the clairvoy-
 ant, which sees a narrow strip of country, or
 of water, when passing over it, and in passing
 through the streets of  towns and cities, often
 see the houses on either side of a street by its
 guiding light shining upon them.   After hav-
 ing found and examined the patient, it returns
 home in the same manner, and enters into its
 place of abode.   Such is the concurrent testi-
 mony of clairvoyants,  and such are the extra-
 ordinary facts.
   We are aware that  it may be said that the
constant presence of the spirit of the clairvoy-
• See cut on page 35. 
152
ant is necessary to maintain life, and  as the
clairvoyant  does  not die, the spirit does not
travel in the manner described, because it is
impossible  for it  to  be  in  two places at the
same time.   It should, however, be remem-
bered that the clairvoyant was magnetised (no
matter how), and that to magnetise a body is
to make a  magnetic form  or spirit in that
body, as is easily demonstrated, and this spirit
may and does maintain  the body of the clair-
voyant in a healthy state m the absence of its
own spirit.
  As the examinations of patients in the man-
ner above described is a  legitimate business of
great importance to the community, it  should
not be mixed up with and degraded  with vain
experiments that are foreign  to it, and  injuri-
ous to the sight of clairvoyants.  They should
not therefore be required to answer  questions
on the suhject of such experiments, but should
leave ihem for the  solution  of tlj  clairvoy-
ants of privale parties.
  In  finding and  examining  patients  with a
letter, every facility .should  le afforded  by  the
patient, or fiiend of the patient residing in  the
same house, where the  let or chould be writ-
ten, as the  spirit  of the clairvoyant will  al-
ways go direct y to that  louse.  Tl.e sp ne of
the patient should be examii.ed in the manner
described in ' The Motive Power of tha Hu- 
153
man System," page 43, and the result stated
in the letter; and  besides if  there are  any
swellings of the joints,  limbs, or  any other
part of  the body,  or any ulcerations,  they
should be mentioned, as they might  be  over-
looked in the examination.
   [f there  is any  pain  or tenderness  from
pressure along the spine, we shall know that
it is a  case  of  tubercula, and  if the number
and  situation of the painful  or tender spots
are stated as near as may be, we shall know if
the spirit found the patient, or  some other per-
son, and if  some other person, we din direct
the continuation of the search until the pa-
tient is found.
   If on  examination  there is no tenderness
found a!ong the spine of the patient, it should
be so stated, when  we shall know it is a case
of mucosis or mucous disease, but  we should
not know what or;an was  diseased, and it
should  consequently  be  mentioned  in   the
letter *
  On having the information we have describ-
ed, wfiicii is easily furnishe,!.  we  c.tn easily
kuo.v by means of  clairvoyance, how far the
diseas* ha  advanced in each  case, and whe-
ther they are curable  or incurable,  or as well
 * There are about fifty oases of tubercula to one of
mucosis. 
154
as we could if we had the body of the person
open before us.   All the  cases are curable in
the first stages of the disease,and about ninety-
five out of every hundred in the  last stage,
including tubercular  consumption and white
swellings of the joints and limbs, as we have
demonstrated in the clearest manner, and we
shall continue  to undertake the cure of  the
curable  cases presented to us for that purpose,
and have the fullest confidence  that with the
means   in our  power,  we shall  continue to
cure chronic diseases in the  above mentioned
proportion to the whole number of cases.
  Such is  the  result of  the duodynamic  or
magnetic practice.  Now it is well known to
those who are  initiated into  the  mysteries of
the practice of medicine, that there is not more
than about five per cent.,  or  five  cured out of
every hundred cases  of chronic  diseases, by
the old astrological or common   practice, and
the number of cures out of every hundred by
the Homoeopathic practice is about the same,
or five or six out of every hundred cases.
  The remedies we  use* in these cases  are

  * Temporary remedies,  as  bleeding, blistering,
emetics, cathartics, low diet, Sec. &c. are prescribed
by alopathists, or old school physicians, and aconite,
bryonia.  rhustox. belladonna, &c. by  the homneopa-
thists in  acute or inflammatory diseases, which pro-
duce sudden derangements in the  system, and  run
through their course in a few days or a few weeks,
and these prescriptions are often necessarily and very 
155
magnetic and specific, and are perfectly safe for

properly changed  every day, or every one, two or
three weeks ;  when the disease has  run through its
course, and the patient either cured, dead, or the dis-
ease has become chronic ; but no man who deserves
the name of a  physician ever prescribes in this man-
ner to cure chronic diseases, which come on very
slowly, and gradually changes the old, and forms new
parasitic, or other unnatural structures, as tubercles,
and white swellings of the serous and mucous surfa-
ces, &c, as  the plainest  common sense  would,  and
does  teach him to learn and prescribe the specific
remedies that will act slowly and safely on the old
and natural forms of the system, and gradually reduce
in a few  months or more, the parasitic  or other  un-
natural structures, and  thus  restore   the general
health.   Nothing,  therefore, so much  distinguishes
the accomplished physician as  the  readiness with
which he distinguishes and prescribes  for acute and
chronic diseases, and on the contrary  there  is no-
thing that so much distinguishes the ass or ignora-
mus as the frequent changes in his prescriptions, in
chronic as in acute diseases, and these  rules are ar-
bitrary and admit of no exceptions, and are equally
applicable to  physicians  and  clairvoyants. When,
therefore, reputed  clairvoyants change their pre-
scriptions in  chronic  as in acute diseases, or even
once in 3, 4, 3, or 6 weeks, it is conclusive  evidence
that they have no  clairvoyance on  the subject,  but
are governed by impressions  transferred from  the
brain of some miscellaneous personage, and these im-
pressionists may also be  known by the miscellane-
ous character  of their prescriptions  in  chronic  dis-
eases,  as " catnip, sage,  isip,  and pond  lily—white
pine and wild cherry bark, squaw-vine, golden seal
and  spikenard—cohosh,  skunk-cabbage,  prickley-
ash, vervain crowsfoot, and Solomon's seal," &c.
  Now such prescriptions of  reputed  clairvoyants,
are not only legitimate  sources of amusement to phy-
sicians, but  they have  a strong tendency to make
new and confirm old skeptics in their skepticism. 
156
persons of all ages and conditions, and are for-
warded to any part of the Union and the Cana-
das, by mail, express, or otherwise, according
to order,  free of postage or expense, with full
directions for their use.
   When  it is known that  our time is necces-
aarilyoccupied  everyday, from morning until
night, with the examination  of patients by
clairvoyance and otherwise, in our office,  or
in this city,  and  that we are  consequently
compelled to examine  patients  at  great  dis-
tances in  the evening, it is hoped and believed
that such patients and their friends will reflect
upon our situation and have  so much  mercy
upon us as to give us  as much information*
in regard to each case (no matter what it is),

  * This information is for us, and not for the clair-
voyant (whodoes  not read the letters), and is for the
benefit of the patient; yet some of these patients are
so very cautious  of their information in  regard  to
their cases, as to  make it difficult, if not impossible,
to find them.  In a case of this kind, in which the
 fentleman only gave me his name and place of resi-
 ence, the clairvoyant found three or four men in the
house, and was consequently unable to distinguish
the patient with certainty, and on informing him of
this fact, he  says  in his  answer  of " Jan. 15. 1847 :
Your letter of the 8th of January  was received yes-
terday.  The statement of your clairvoyant concern-
ing the three or four men here was true.  My brother
and brother-in-law live in the  house with me at pre-
sent.  I should have written you more about my case,
but I was informed that the name and place of resi-
dence of the patient was all  that was required.  I
will now'try to give a few particulars," flto. 
157
as to enable us  to  distinguish  and  find the
patient with as  little delay as  possible,  so
that we may get through with  the  examina-
tions of  such cases in  time, each  night,  to
have some rest from our labors.
  It may also be useful to  observe  here that
the examinations of the letters from patients is
conducted in the most secluded and confiden-
tial manner, and the notes of the clairvoyant
examinations of the cases taken down at the
time of such examinations, and  the letters an-
swered as soon thereafter as possible.
  The clairvoyant will visit and re-examine
these patients under our direction, once in four
or five weeks, and as she  always  recollects
the previous examinations and compares them
with the  last, it is a matter of great importance
in enabling us to know the progress of the
cure in each case, and to correspond with any
patient on the subject, if  it should  become
necessary to do so.
   In the meantime patients should communi-
cate to us freely any information supposed to
be overlooked or unknown to us, and deemed
of great importance in the successful treatment
of any particular case.
   We shall employ a clairvoyant of the great-
est power, and of a high order of intellect for
the examination of patients at home or abroad,
who will often give our patients fine speci- 
168
mens of the all-seeing eyes and spiritual pow-
ers of the magnetized brain.
   The following is a specimen of Clairvoy-
ance which  occurred a few  evenings since.
When we had got  through with the examina-
tion of letters from patients, on the evening of
the 8th inst.,and about 8 o'clock, we request-
ed the clairvoyant to look  and see if there was
any money coming on the way in the mails
for us, and in two  or three minutes, she an-
swered yes!  I see a fifty dollar bill for you in
a letter, and the letter is in a bag coming from
the west.  Are you not mistaken  in  the
amount!  No, it is fifty, but it is not a bill,
but a draft.   Look and see if it is not 70 in-
stead  of  50 dollars.  No, it is  50.   Why,
how fast it comes!—whiz !—it is coming on
the railroad !   The cars arrived here between
10 and 11 P. M.
  We were expecting a draft  from New Or-
leans of 70 dollars, but instead of that, our clerk
on returning from the post-office on the morn-
ing of the 9th inst., brought us a letter from a
gentleman in Pittsburg, inclosing  a draft  for
50 dollars.
  On  the evening of the 10th inst., after hav-
ing again got through with the examination of
letters from patients, I directed the attention
of the clairvoyant to the subject of the above
draft, and inquired whether she  knew from 
159
 mere intuition it was a draft of 50 dollars for
 me, and coming in  the  mail on  the railroad
 from the west, or saw  it literally?  When
 she answered that she saw it literally, as she
 saw things with her eyes in her natural wak-
 ing state.
                CASES.
 The magnetic symptoms and duody-
  namic treatment  of diseases, and
  the old astrological symptoms and
  treatment.
  Mrs.  L. aged 29 years  and  of good consti-
tution;  we examined the case  of this lady,
May 22d 1844, and found a great tenderness
on  pressing on the  cervical ganglions in  the
intervertebral spaces, and on the dorsal, con-
nected with the stomach  and liver; showing
it to be a case of  tubercular  disease of  the
muscles, stomach and liver, and  pronounced
it such.  But " Are not my lungs  diseased ?"
enquired the lady. " No they ave not, for there
is no tenderness felt on pressing on the gang-
lions of the spinal nerves connected with  the
lungs, and you have no  cough, have  you?"
" No, I have no  cough,  but I  have  a great
deal of  pain  in my chest."  ': Is the  pain in
the  inside or outside of the chest ?"  "I don't
know as I can tell."  " Well I can, it is in  the
muscles on the outside of  your chest."  " Are
 Jrou sure doctor she has no disease of her
 ungs ?" enquired another lady.   " Yes, I 
160
am."   " Well she has been  doctored for dis-
ease of the lungs, more than three months,
and has suffered enough  by it to kill  some
women."   " How so ?"  " Why besides cup-
ping, her chest was blistered all  over for six
weeks, and even that did not relieve the  pain,
and the doctor then told  her she must rub that
hateful  emetic  tartar ointment all over the
front part of her chest,  and  she has now had
her chest  covered with  great blotches for six
weeks, and  the  pain keeps up  the  same as
ever."   " Ah, I am  sorry the doctor has not
made  himself  acquainted  with  these natural
and simple symptoms, when she would  have
been saved from so much suffering."  " Oh,
no one can tell how  much she  has suffered 5
besides, the nauseating medicine 6he has taken
has 1 believe destroyed  her stomach; for she
can't eat any thing, and  she is now so weak
we are afraid she will starve to death." "The
doctor directed a low diet I presume ?" " Yes,
he would not allow her  any  thing but vegeta-
bles, and but little of them."
  We  prescribed the magnetic or magnetized
gold pills, and the most nourishing diet, to be
assisted by the action of the  Rotary Magnetic
Machine,  after ten days.
  The disease in the stomach and liver was
so intense in this case that we did not dare to
risk the action of the instrument on the  mus- 
161
 cles of the chest, or on these organs until her
 system was under the influence of the pills.
   We did not see this lady until the end of a
 week, when we found her exhausted  system
 had began  to rally its strength, and we then
 opened oUr battery, and directed it first to the
 disease in the stomach with a very moderate
  Ejwer, and then against  the disease  in the
  ver.
   On  removing the  handkerchief which she
 held over the front  part of her chest, the lat-
 ter presented  the most horrid and deplorable
 mangling, the marks  of which .his young and
 beautiful  lady will carry  to her grave.  We
 then magnetized the muscles of the chest, and
 repeated these operations  daily during three
 weeks, in which time she made rapid progress
 in the recovery of her health.  We then mag-
 netized her two or three times a week, during
 three  or four weeks, and  she is  now, (July
 28th) perfectly well; the disease  in the sto-
 mach, liver, and muscles of the chest, having
 entirely disappeared.
   Mr. J. R. N. of naturally slender constitu-
 tion, aged 23 years.   We examined this case
on  the  14th of July 1844, when  we  found
great tenderness on  pressing upon the gangli-
ons of  the spinal  nerves connected with  the
throat,  lungs, stomach,  and  liver, and pro-
nounced it a  ase of tubercular disease of these 
162
organs in a moment of time, without the leas!
previous knowledge  of the case.   " Are  you
not mistaken about my lungs being diseased,"
enquired  the  gentleman.  " No I  am not."
" My chest has just been examined with an
instrument you call the stethescope I believe,
and with thumping it, by a doctor whom my
physician says knows  every thing about the
chest, and he says my  lungs are sound."  " He
did ha! And how long did it  take him  to
make that  discovery?"  " About  an hour."
" And how much did you pay for  it ?"  " Ten
dollars."  " I have heard of a number of such
discoveries by the doctor to whom you allude,
that  have not only been contrrylicted by the
magnetic symptoms  that are piesent in your
case, but by the dissecting knife in a few weeks
only after these notable discoveries  were made.
I have used the stethescope more than 20 years
and know that no dependence can be placed
upon  it in distinguishing tubercular disease of
the lungs, until  excavations have formed  in
the last part of the last stage of the disease, or
at a period when such discoveries are of little
or no value.  And now when your physician
sends you  upon such an errand again,  give
him  five dollars, or his part of the fee, and
keep  the other five in your pocket."
   "Let me now ask you—have  you  any
cough >"  " Yes, I have a cough which com- 
163
menced in February last, but my physician
and the doctor that examined me with the in-
strument, say  it all proceeds from my throat,
and you don't suppose I could have consump-
tion without a cough ?"  " Yes I do.  I often
detect the  disease before the cough  commen-
ces."   " Well, can you cure me ? " " Yes, you
are yet in  the first stage of the disease though
far anvanced in  it, and I cure every case in
that  stage, and  many  in  the last  stage."—
" How—by your gold pills ?" Yes, I can re-
fer you to many in this  city and elsewhere
that  have been  cured with them."   " Yes, I
know some of them 1 believe, and I will take
a box, and is  that all  I shall want?  " Yes,
unless you are in a hurry  about  getting well,
and in that case  you should be  magnetized  a
a few times after a week or two, or after your
system is well under the influence of the pills,
as you will get well much faster by doing so."
" Well, I have been out of health so long and
have taken so much medicine, and have paid
out so much money  for nothing—I am tired
of it, but I will make another trial  to regain
my health, and will call in about a week and
be magnetized."
  This gentleman's cough has ceased, and the
disease  in the throat, stomach, and liver, has
entirely disappeared, and he has  regained his
flesh, and  is now apparently  as well as any 
161
man,  but would soon have been  laid in his
grave, under the old astrological treatment.
 . Cases varying little from those of the  lady
and gentlemen we have described, are not only
of daily occurrence, but many occur every day
in our practice.  Consumption  as  well as tu-
bercular disease of  the other  organs, is more
uniformly cured by the use of the magnetized
gold pills, than  acute diseases are by the  com-
mon remedies.  We cure more cases  every
year than any  10 physicians  in  this union
do of acute diseases, and we  have done  so
many years under the eyes and noses of  phy-
sicians who on a comparison of the length
of our bills, still  believe  the old  astrological
practice more  conducive  to  their interests.
There are however  some physicians who are
governed by other considerations in the use of
them, and from one  of whom we received the
history of the following case.

         Montgomery, Orange Co., N. Y.
                      11 th April, 1844.
  Dr. H. H. Sherwood,
My Dear Sir,—I  was called  on the 20th of
February, 1842, to visit T. K. of Ulster Coun-
ty, in this  state.  He was a young man of
sanguine  temperament,  good  physical  and
mental  endowments, and up to tne time of
the present sickness, had enjoyed  uninter- 
165
rupted good health.   He was 18 years of age,
and by avocation a farmer.
  His illness commenced Sept 3d, 1841, with
swelling in the left knee, and after a few weeks
in its fellow also, both joints being very  pain
ful.   These  swellings continued  for a  few
weeks and then subsided,  leaving  stiffness,
langour, &c.   Seven weeks  after the swelling
of the knees had subsided,  the shoulder and
hips became similarly affected.  Chills, fevers,
and  headaches  immediately followed.  The
family physician being called pronounced the
disease  Rheumatism, and placed the patient
under the usual antiphlogistic treatment.  Not-
withstanding this, however, the disease con-
tinued, but was erratic in  its character, some-
times attacking the chest, then  the head.  In
July, the throat  and tongue became swollen,
pus  formed under the tongue,  afterwards the
chin, and then the cervical glands swelled and
suppurated.  The  pain in the  left knee and
hip,  at length gave  way to  counter irritation,
blisters, &c, and from the use of porter, the
strength gradually augmented, enabling him to
sit up.  But thus far the use of the left limb
was  not recovered, at the same time at this
period, great tumefaction and edema took place;
in this  state bandages were applied, and in
September the formation of pus was discover-
ed; on the 15th, the abscess was  opened, }.j 
166
mcission in  the thigh, about midway, on the
outside; on the 23d, another abscess which
had formed on the opposite side broke; on the
20th of October he was again able to sit up,
and on the 1st of November, could walk with
the aid of crutches.
  On the 15th of November, while walking he
had the  misfortune to fall, by which the thigh
was  fractured 6 inches above the knee.   Asa
matter of course, the limb was placed in splints,
the ulcer continuing to discharge.
  About the  1st of January 1842, the patient
exhibited all  those symptoms that indicate the
ebbing of the tide of life, and that usually fol-
low  suffering from a protracted, and  painful
disease.   He had  a dry hacking cough, the
hectic fever appeared, the frame  was emacia-
ted to a skeleton, and  two additional abscesses
had  formed, and become running ulcers.  The
usual remedies of blistering, creating counter
issues, and prescribing Iodine, Hydriodate Po-
tassa, Extract of Sarsaparilla, Blue Pill, Span-
ish Rob, Swain's Panacea, &c.  &c, constitu-
ted  the treatment until  February, at  which
time I was called in.
   When I first saw the patient he was subject
to colliquative sweats,  his cough  was obsti-
nate, and his pulse  seldom varied from 120.
The whole left limb displayed the presence of
great tumefaction, particularly  the iliiac  re- 
167
gion,  The tubercular character of the disease
was plainly indicated by these symptoms which
were ex".e3dingly  unfavorable.  He was also
subjujt  to great pain, which continued with-
out any visible abatement, or interval of ease.
Large doses of morphine were administered to
quiet him, and as he and his friends remarked
" to smooth the passage to the grave." For 17
weeks he had not left his bed, the pain  of
moving being too great to be endured.  He had
availed himself of the services of  several ex-
perienced surgeons and  physicians, some of
whom had pronounced him beyond the reach
of art.
   From  the  condition of  the  patient when 1
was called  in  I felt  the responsibility  to be
almost terrible; however I  entered upon  my
duty, trusting  for  success  solely on  those
principles, which  for many years past you
nave been labouring to establish.
   Upon  a careful examination, I found  the
diagnosis to be tubercula of the left  knee,
(white swelling,)  implicated  with tubercula
of  left  lung,  liver, throat, heart,  stomach
and  mesentery, accompanied with a total loss
of appetite.
   On the patient being placed under my charge,
all former prescriptions were thrown aside.
The diseased limb  was bandaged smoothly
from the instep to thu knee, and wetted, with 
168
a  Btrong  solution  of  Sal Ferri, Capsra,  &c,
at the same time  fermenting  poultices were
applied to the thigh every evening.  1 prescri-
bed a  pill morning and evening, and covered
the whole thigh with  a plaster.  1 also placed
one on the lumbar region, to be taken off at
night, however, and the poultice applied.
  Under this the magnetic treatment, 12 days
from its commencement, the appetite returned,
the palpitations ceased, and the  pulse assu-
med a healthy standard.   In three weeks  the
cough and expectoration ceased, the  tumefac-
tion subsided, pus of a more healthy character
was discharged, and  in  one week more  the
patient was able to sit up.   In  July he could
walk with the aid  of  sticks, and continued to
improve steadily.  In December last the ulcers,
four in number,  gradually closed  up,  and
swelling with some pain followed,  To alle-
viate this, one of the ulcers near the knee was
re-opened, and serous matter with exfoliation
of carious bone was discharged.
  Since the re-opening of the  ulcer  near  the
knee the  patient has improved rapidly.   At
this time he is able to walk  without  inconve-
nience, and labor at his business although  not
so well as before his illness. Indeed this was
not to be expected.   The patient when I was
called in, was in an almost hopeless state, dis-
eased in his entire system, and emaciated to a 
169
skeleton, therefore the cure must necessarily
be very  slow,  almost as  much so as  is the
growth  from  infancy to  manhood.  I  have
deemed  it proper to  be  thus explicit,  in or-
der to show the error in judgment that occurred
at the commencement of  the disease, as well
as  the mistakes in treatment that followed.
He owes his life to your remedies."*
                             A. H., M. D.
   Scarlet Fever and Erysipelas.—Scarlet fe-
ver is acute tubercular disease  of the throat,
which is frequently reflected upon the skin,
and erysipelas is acute tubercular disease  of
the skin, which is frequently  reflected from
the surface to the centre,—to the brain, throat
or stomach;  and as erysipelas whether acute
or chronic is very soon  reduced with the ac-
tion of  the Rotary  Magnetic  Machine, we
should here suggest to physicians a thorough
trial of the effects of the  instrument in  scarlet
fever.    Belladonna  is  the medicine   which
should be used  at the same time, as well  as
in erysipelas.

  • P. S. These remedies are perfectly safe for persons of
all ages and conditions, and are forwarded by express,
or mail, to any Post office in the U. S. free of postage,—
One hundred and eighty pills in a box, with directions
fortheir use, and will last a patient four or five months,
Price eight dollars.—Physicians  cannot manufacture
them for the use of their patients.        H. H. S- 
I7u
     CHKONIC MUCOSIS* OF THE LUNGS.
            C!ironir. Bronchitis.
  Mr.  J. G. of  Sixth Avenue, New York,
aged 40 years.   Called  to  see him  Nov.
17th, 1844, and found him in the last part of
the  last stages of chronic  mucosis of the
lungs.   He had severe hemorrhage from the
lungs about three months  before,  about a
year after the  disease commenced, and was
now raising large quantities of matter—was
emaciated,  had night sweats  and sleepless
nights—was sinking fast under the ordinary
treatment, and in  this state abandoned by his
family physician as a hopeless case.
  There was no pain or tenderness produced
by pressure  on the ganglions  of the spinal
nerves connected  with the lungs or any other
organ.
  We  now magnetized his lungs in the most
thorough  manner, and directed Mrs.  G.  to
repeat the operation morning and evening, and
give him a pill of the following prescription,
morning, noon and night.
  Hard Bal. Copa and Cubebs,   -   -  3 iiiss
  Ext. Hyos.,.......    3 ss
  Make one hundred pills.
  We also directed the use  of Port wine  or
Chronic diseases of the raucous membranes. 
171
strong beer morning and evening, and brandy
at dinner, with the most nourishing diet.  Mrs
G., after  having recovered from her fright
ful apprehensions of  a return of the  hemor
rhage, from the gormandizing beverage we hac
prescribed, promised a faithful  adherence tc
our advice, and afterwards  called upon ue
once a week with buoyant spirits to advise u
of the favorable progress of the case.
  At the end of four weeks a messenger called
to inform  us  that " a gentleman whom we
had cured of consumption" had that day " ex-
amined  Mr. G. and found he had tubercles
in his lungs, and required the ejold pills."*—
I had, however, no hesitation  in declaring my
belief that  the gentleman was mistaken, but
promised to call and see the patient, when,
on applying pressure upon the ganglions of
the spinal  nerves connected  with the lungs,
we found  them very sensitive, and conse-
quently that  tubercles had  formed in his
lungs, as they frequently do in  the last stage
of mucosis.   His  cough  and expectoration
had, however, been gradually decreasing—his
night sweats  had disappeared, and  he haf
gained flesh and strength.
  We now added to  our prescription in this
case the magnetized gold pill  morning and

  * We did not leam the name of the gentleman. 
172
evening, and in five weeks from this time his
cough and expectoration ceased, and he is
now, Feb. 20th, attending to his daily routine
of business.
   We have selected this case for notice from
among many others, to show the effect of the
treatment in chronic muconis, and also as an
example  of the development and treatment of
tubercles in the last stage of the disease.

CHRONIC SEROSIS* OF THE UTERUS, STOMACH,
               AND LIVER.
Tubercula; Chlorosis ; Green Sickness ; Pal-
               lidum Morbus.
   Miss J. S. of Newark, N. J., aged 22
years.  On an  examination of this young
lady in June, 1844, there was found great sen-
sibility to  pressure on the ganglions of the
spinal nerves connected with the heart, sto-
mach, liver, and uterus, and it was two years
since  her  health began to  decline, and a year
and a half since the  last  recurrence of the
catamenia.  She was greatly emaciated—her
skin perfectly blanched—was very feeble, and
in the  last part of the last stage of the dis-
ease.   She had  been a long  time  under the
ordinary  routine  of treatment of the schools,
but the disease continued to make  progress.
    • Chronic disease of the serous membranes. 
                    173

  The gold pills were now prescribed, with
the action of the Rotary Magnetic machine,
and we magnetized the diseased  organs from
one to three  times a week.  It was, however,
five or six weeks before the disease began to
give way, when she began to gain strength,
and to show some  color in her skin.*   Her
appetite began to increase, and she now be-
gan to gain  a little flesh, and more color in
the skin.  In about four months, her breasts
began to expand, and in about six months the
catamenia appeared, after an absence of more
than two  years, and her health was soon re-
established.  Asa matter of curiosity, we have
since looked into a number of recent medical
works of high reputation, to see the notions
of the writers on the subject of the fatal disease
called Chlorosis, with which  our patient was
affected ; and we have no hesitation in saying
that none  of  them knew  a  word of  the
true cause of the phenomena presented in such
cases, or of the proper treatment of the dis-
ease.

     CHRONIC SEROSIS OF THE ABDOMEN.
              Ascitis Dropsy.
  In the last stage of chronic disease of  the

  • This young lady required constantly two of the
gold pills a day to keep her from sinking. 
174
organs, their serous surfaces excrete an albu-
minous  serum, which accumulates  in the
cavity of the abdomen, and distends it.   Se-
rum is also excreted by the serous surfaces of
the facia of the muscles, when the feet, an-
kles, and legs begin to swell, and sometimes,
with the abdomen, become very large.
  We commenced magnetizing a perfectly
hopeless case of this kind about seven weeks
since, of a lady aged  40  years, and the  re-
sults  have been such  as to leave little doubt
that  the forces from  the  magnetic machines
will  be  found greatly superior  to any  other
remedy  in such cases.   It was a case of  se-
rous disease, and very great enlargement of
the left  kidney.
  We placed  the negative button over the
ganglion of the spinal nerve connected  with
the organ, and moved the other, repeatedly,
all over the abdomen,  under the full power of
the instrument.   We then placed the positive
button over the ganglions  of the spinal nerves
connected with  the stomach, and repeated,
with the negative button, the  operation over
the abdomen, and then magnetized the feet
and legs in the usual  manner, under the full
power of the instrument.
   We repeated this  operation  nearly every
day,  with a daily progress of improvement,
without any other aid than that of Homceo- 
175
pathic medicines, and the swellings have no\«
nearly disappeared,  and the lady's  general
health and strength greatly improved.
  On reading over this case, I find I have de-
scribed it so as to make it appear  not more
than about half as bad  as it really was, or
would have appeared had it been described by
her  family  physician,  who prescribed  the
medicine  required during the time we were
magnetizing her.

      CHRONIC SEROSIS OF THE LUNGS.
         Tubercular Consumption.
  We magnetized more than one hundred and
fifty cases of  chronic serosis  of  the lungs,
or tubercular consumption, of both sexes, and
in every stage of  the disease, in  our rooms
during the last year, or  in 1844 ;  out of  this
number nine only have died, and of the very
few of the above number we are now magne-
tizing (Feb. 20th, 1845), not more than  two
will he lost.
  Nearly all  these cases  were complicated
with chronic serosis of  other organs, as the
throat, uterus, stomach, liver, &c, as shown by
the  magnetic symptoms, and the  process of
cure in these organs has  proceeded pari passu
with that of the lungs.
  These results present a strong contrast with
those obtained by the old Astrological symp- 
17G
toms, and practice of the schools, in which all
are lost.
   The proportion of males to females in the
above  number was nearly equal,  and it is a
curious fact, that in a  great majority of the
males, the diseane commenced in the throat 5
while  in a  great majority of the females  it
commenced  in the uterus, and  was  from
thence propagated, first to  the stomach, and
then to the lungs.  All were constantly un-
der the influence of the  magnetized gold pills,
and of those that have died, all were in the
last part of the last stage of the disease before
we commenced magnetizing them, and some
of these were not magnetized more than five
or six times.
  Nothing could be more gratifying to us than
to see  other physicians curing consumption
in the same or  a  greater proportion to the
number treated by them, but before they can
hope to do so, they must first learn to distin-
guish the disease by the magnetic symptoms,
or before  the  sexton is called, or they have
made a post-mortem examination.
   Nothing can be easier, or more certain, than
the manner by which we can distinguish con-
sumption, or tubercular disease of the lungs,
or any other  organ, and there  are now  a
great many  thousand  non-prbfessional per-
sons in the Union who distinguish the disease 
1?7
in any  of  the organs in  the  same manner,
with great facility  and certainty; yet there
are comparati"ely very few physicians that
can do so,  in consequence of their adherence
to the  old Astrological  symptoms of  the
schools, in this as well as other diseases, to
the motions of the pulse, and  the aspects of
the tongue, the  urine, the stools and  the
6tars.
   When they have learned to  distinguish the
disease  in  its first stage in the manner we
have  suggested,  then, and not till then, will
they be capable of  forming any just concep-
tions  of the proper remedies for the disease;
as the notions of physicians generally upon
this subject are, confessedly, a jumble of in-
consistent  opinions, of no value to such pa-
tients.
   *' How much  have  we yet  to  learn, how
little do we really know, of  the nature  and
rational treatment, not only of the diseases of
the cerebro-spinal system, hut of diseases in
general!   Assuredly, the uncertain and most
unsatisfactory art that we call  medical  sci-
ence, is no science at all,  but a jumble of in-
consistent  opinions;  of conclusions hastily
drawn; of facts  badly arranged; of obser-
vations  made with carelessness ; of compari-
sons instituted which are  not  analogical;  of
hypotheses which are foolish  : and of theo- 
178
nes which, if not useless, are dangerous.-
This is the reason why we have our homceo.
pathists,  and our hydropathists;  our mes-
merists and our celestiali6ts !"—Dr.  Evans
of Edinburgh."
  Dr. Lawson, of Cincinnati, Ohio, was one
of the  first  physicians in the Union, who
broke the shackles that bound him  to the old
astrological symptoms and  practice  of the
schools,  and as there  are now many hun-
dreds of  physicians who  have followed his
example,  it cannot  fail to be interesting to
them, and useful to others, to see his testimo-
ny on  the subject of the magnetic symptoma
and treatment of a large class of chronic dis-
eases.

          From the Cincinnati Whig.
     Dr.  Sherwood's Magnetic Remedies.
  The following correspondence  has been
handed to us for publication, in the belief that
it will interest as well as benefit the communi-
ty.  Doctor Lawson, who testifies to the value
and efficacy of Dr. Sherwood's remedies, is a
regular graduate of the Ohio Medical College,
and a physician of good standing.   We have,
ourself, made trial of the remedies,  and think
we derived essential benefit from them.

             Tor the Hail; Wi it.
             Cincin n ati, January 23,1839.
  Dft. Lawson.—Sir : Having been informed 
                   179

that you  have,  during the last  year,  pre-
scribed in your practice Dr. Sherwood's Elec-
tro-Magnetic Remedies in  upwards  of  fifty
cases, all of which were chronic diseases,
including scrofula, with great success, I  take
the liberty of making the inquiry of you,
whether my informant was justified in mak-
ing such a report from your own admission of
the facts.
  If you confirm this report, I should consider
it a duty we owe to the cause  of humanity to
give it publicity as  much as possible, and if
false, we should  disabuse the public  mind of
the imposition.
  Dr. S. also challenges investigation as to the
electro-galvanic  symptoms.   Please inform
me if you, in your practice,  detect diseases by
his method of examination.
                     Respectfully.
                                 B. W.

  D e a r S i r : Your communication of the 23d
instant  was duly received, and   an  answer
should more promptly have been given but for
the want of a leisure hour, and a doubt resting
on my mind in regard to the propriety of notic-
ing anonymous letters.
  Nothing, now, so much influences me to ac-
cede to your wish, as a conviction of  the im-
portance of the facts which you wish  to elicit
from me, and thereby to diffuse them more gen-
erally through society.
  I have a perfect detestation of everything 
180
that has been presented to the world  in the
form of what has been generally denominated
"quack  medicines," and on this account I
have always felt a delicacy in appending my
name, or  giving  my  influence  to  anything
which may justly be "dubbed" with such an
appellation.
  In the case of  Sherwood's remedies, I am
somewhat  relieved from  this difficulty, by
two considerations: first, from the stubborn
fact that, in my own person, I derived the most
decided beneficial effects from their use, and
at a time when  all other  means were pro-
nounced as incompetent to a cure ; and, in the
second place, from  being myself pretty well
acquainted with the composition of the " rem-
edies."
  These two facts will serve as an apology for
me, in candidly expressing my opinion with
regard  to the medicine.  If I did not believe
that thousands were suffering from diseases,
incurable under any other system of practice,
and certainly curable under this, I would not
dare to offer one word in favor of Sherwood's
remedies.  From a conviction of this kind, I
hesitate not, for one moment, to recommend
them as infinitely superior,  in chronic diseas-
es, to any other course at present known  to
the medical profession.
  I did use upwards of fifty boxes during the
last year, and generally with success.   I am,
however, of the opinion, that in advanced sta-
ges of pulmonary consumption, they are not 
181
so effectual as one would suppose from read-
ing Dr. Sherwood's pamphlet.
  In almost every other form of scrofula, they
have surpassed my most sanguine expecta-
tions.  There are many citizens of Cincinnati
who will certify to cures, in certain cases of
long standing, which were not  benefited by
any course  which had been pursued (and in
these cases you know everything is tried that
is heard of), and their certificates will be of
sufficient  variety, too,  to prove all that is
claimed for them, even by Dr. S. himself, with
the single exception which I have made above.
  I do not wish to be understood to convey the
idea that they are infallible ; that is not my
meaning, nor impression, concerning anything
on this earth ; but I do believe them to be as
effectual in curing chronic diseases as ordina-
ry remedies are in curing  the ordinary diseas-
es of our  climate.  I must be understood to
have in view, in such a declaration as this, the
exception which was made, and again referred
to.
  With regard to the symptoms, I believe that
they cannot be gainsaid.   I can detect, with
the greatest certainty, the disease called by
Dr. Sherwood scrofula,  without  any previous
knowledge of the patient, or of the history of
his disease ; and this I do merely by an exam-
ination of the cervical glands and spinal col-
umn.
  The ord lary course of feeling the pulse.
looking at the  tongue, and asking a hundred 
182
questions, more or less, is both useless, and a
waste of time.  I do not think that one skilled
in this mode of examination car. be deceived
once in a hundred cases.   In my practice, I
pursue this mode of examination exclusively,
with a great saving of time, and a much more
satisfactory  result.   This  is as  much as I
deem it now necessary to communicate.
                 Yours, &c,
                       B. S. LAWSON.
  To B. W.

  1 had no knowledge of the above commu-
nication of Dr. Lawson, until two  or three
months after its  publication;  and as there
are  now  many physicians, both in this  city
and in the different States of the Union, who
are  practising the new symptoms and  pre-
scribing the magnetic remedies, I have intro-
duced it here to show the opinion entertained
of them by other  physicians, who have test-
ed the certainty of the one, and  the efficacy
of the other.
  i*  the  advanced  stages of consumption
mentioned, we have constantly  stated  the
Uncertainty of the results, and urged the ne-
cessity of  commencing their use in  the  first
stage of the disease, when  cases like that of
Dr.  Lawson are  uniformly cured by them;
ind as the disease can now be easily distin-
guished, in the first stage as well as the last, 
183
 there is now no longer any excuse for delay-
 ing their  use  until the patient  is in  the last
 stage, when the result must necessarily be
 uncertain.
   In  regard to the Doctor's allusion to secre-
 By I would remark, that in the  course I have
 pursued to defray the expense of the investi-
 gation and cure  of  this  class of diseases,
 through a long series  of years,  physicians
 have no just  cause of complaint: for  I tell
 them  what the remedies are, explain the
 principles of their action, and give them the
 evidence of their efficacy.
   There is, however, a cause constantly op-
 erating to  prevent many physicians  from
 prescribing them in their practice; and that is a
 self interest, which with them  is  paramount
 to every  other; for  they constantly  prefer
 making up  a  bill  against a patient of from
 fifty to five hundred  dollars,  with the old
empirical  and  useless remedies, to a fee of as
 many cents for a bare prescription;  and the
 tenacity with  which they hang on to the val-
uable cases is truly astonishing to the uniniti-
ated,  as they uniformly prefer  to see  them
sink into  their graves, than saved from them
by another physician
  This is perfectly natural, and is an exam-
ple of the almost  insurmountable  difficulties
attendant  upon  the general introduction  of 
18-1
specific remedies for diseases, that are other-
wise incurable.   Non-professional persons
can now, however, distinguish the diseases to
which  the  magnetic  remedies are applicable
und specific, with much more certainty than
physicians  can  with  the old  astrological
symptoms; for, if pain  more or less  severe
(in proportion to the  intensity of the disease)
is produced By pressure on one or more of the
ganglions of  the  spinal nerves, then  these
remedies  are applicable, and   specific-—no
matter  what  name may have been given to
ihe disease by  physicians,  nosologists, or
other  medical writers; and  those remedies
can be  obtained, and  successfully applied in
ihose cases, without the aid of a physician.
  The following is the case of  Dr. Lawson,
to which he alludes :—

             CHRONIC  SEROSIS.
      TUBERCULA OF THE RIGHT LUNG.
              Consumption.
  Doctor B. S. Lawson, of Cincinnati, rather
light complexion, tall and slender frame, aged
32 years.   Called to  see him about the last of
October, 1836.   His health, he  informed me,
had  been  gradually declining   about eight
years, and about the middle of August last, he
began  to cough and  expectorate very freely.
On  examining his neck, found  the submax- 
185
 illary, and some of the cervical glands tuber-
 culated; and on  applying  pressure  on the
 last cervical vertebra, it produced pain, but it
 was more severe when applied on the right
 side,  between this vertebra and the first dor-
 sal, while  pressure on the other vertebrae of
 the spine produced  no pain or effect what-
 ever.
   I now applied the stethoscope to the right
 side of the chest, and soon found in the mid-
 dle portion of it, a space of about three inches
 in diameter, where the respiration was entire-
 ly inaudible, indicating from the  absence of
 the crepitus and  mucous rattle, a large and
 solid  cluster  of tubercles, rendering this part
 of the lung impermeable and immoveable.—
 The  respiration was natural all round  this
 portion of  the lung, and every other part of
 the chest.
   Diagnosis.  Tubercula of  the middle por-
 tion of the right lung.   He now told me that
 a celebrated physician,*  who was attending
 him, had also examined him  with the stetho-
scope, and with  the same result.  He also
told me that  percussion had  been frequently
applied, which  uniformly gave a null  sound
over that part of the lung.  He has the usual
pale, lean, and haggard look, or consumptive
* Professor Eberle. 
186
aspect of  the countenance;   the  emacia-
tion has made considerable progress; and he
is gradually sinking.   He has had prescribed
for him, and has pursued the usual antiphlo-
gistic  treatment, including a large emetic tar-
tar plaster over the front portion of his right
lung (from which he suffered severely), with
low vegetable and milk diet.
  Prescribed magnetic pills and plaster, with
no restriction in diet.   He commenced gaining
strength in a few days after, and in about sev-
en weeks, or at  the time he had finished
taking one box of the pills, I examined  him
again  with the stethoscope, when the respira-
tion was as audible,  in the before-mentioned
middle portion of the right lung, as in every
other  part  of  the  chest, but presented  now
very clearly in this place the sounds of bron-
chophony.  His cough had now much abat-
ed,  and he had gained  in this time so much
flesh,  as to make him appear better than he
does in his usual health; and had lost entire-
ly the pale, haggard, and consumptive aspect
of his countenance.
  January 18, 1837.   Examined  his chest
again.  The sound of bronchophony in the
circumscribed space in the middle portion of
the right lung, and his cough and expectora-
tion, have ceased, and percussion gives now a
full, clear sound. 
187
  He continues to gain flesh and strength, and
his face, body and limbs, have now the  full
and rounded form of a person in full flesh,
and the most perfect health.
  It will be seen, that after  distinguishing
consumption by the new symptoms, the chest
is, in most  cases, explored with the  stetho-
scope.  This is done  to ascertain the order
and state of the tuberculations; for, although
they are detected in  the  first dawning of the
disease—even in many cases before the cough
commences—yet we cannot tell,  without the
aid of auscultation,  whether  these tubercles
are scattered about  at a distance from each
other, or are adjoining each other in small or
large  clusters, like clusters of grapes,  or have
softened down  and produced a small repara-
Me, or a large irreparable excavation. Hence
the doubt that  must  exist in regard to the
curability of the disease in its last stages in
this organ,  by the natural remedies,  without
the aid of auscultation, and hence its impor-
tance in this, as well as in many other diseases
of  the chest; yet very few know anything
of its advantages, in consequence of a deplora-
ble defect in the education of  physicians.

  " It may be useful for me to add to the above
history of my case, that besides the most per-
fect restoration of my health (for such I be- 
188
lieve to be mv happy fortune, as far as I can
judge), that the above remedies have been a
great benefit to  me in another point of view.
My physician, and other gentlemen of the pro-
fession, aware of the great danger hanging over
me, advised me to change my location for a
more southerly one, as affording the only hope,
not of a restoration of my health, but of pro-
longing my feeble  existence;  and beyond all
doubt it  was the  best  prescription in their
power to make.  Now, I do candidly believe,
that my case was incurable under the common
mode of practice, and that the most judicious
 Eractice known to the profession was pursued
 y him to whom I submitted my case.  Ac-
cording  to the above advice. I determined to
remove to the south, and had commenced pre-
paration by selling off a part of my property,
when I  was. by the kindness of a friend (a
physician too), directed  to  Dr. Sherwood and
his remedies—for which I consider  myself
under eternal obligation to  the Merciful Dis-
poser of all good.
  " I do believe that every case of incipient tu-
bercular consumption may be radically cured
by a use of the above remedies; and I feel it
my duty to submit my case, with these  few re-
marks, to the public, from {he fact that thou-
sands are carried  to  an untimely grave, in
spite  of  the most scientific practice  of  the
sch< ols—that  would, in my opinion, have
beer., with all  certainty, saved by the  use of
the etectro-magnetic remedies.
                   B. S. LAWSON,M.D. 
189
  Consumption.—In  77  deaths  which  oc-
curred in our city last week. 9 were by con-
sumption.   In   New  York 33 perished  by
consumption in 179 deaths.  We  believe the
proportion  in  New England  cities is still
greater.
  According to a statistical paper  which was
recently read at Manchester, one death by con-
sumption occurred in that town, out of every
thirty-four families; in Liverpool 2 deaths out
of every forty-nine families; in Birmingham,
one death out of every thirty-six; andinLondon
two deaths out of every one  hundred and five.
In the agricultural districts of England, the
proportion of consumptive cases  to deaths is
four in every twenty-one; and  in the  factory
districts, three in every nineteen.  The  vic-
tims by this disease in every year  must form
quite an ai my of martyrs—many, we fear, mar-
tyrs to fashion ; others to poverty, exposure,
occupation, or climate.
  It seems  to us that when we consider the
immense mortality, and the few cases of resto-
ration, little attention, comparatively speak-
ing, is paid to this disease, its causes and c.ire,
by the medical profession  generally.   Doubt-
less many have abandoned the possibility of
cure, except in the early  stages.   But when
victim is added to victim every hour—when
all  sexes, ages,  conditions  of life are  swept
away by the thousand  each year—more than
ordinary attention should, in our view, be be-
stowed upon the subject, not only by phy6i- 
190
cians individually, but by our medical colleges
and universities.—Philad. Enquirer, 1S42.
  Alas ! alas !  the brains of the professors of
these  colleges  and universities are so cram-
med with knowledge, there is no  room for
more.

          SEROSIS OF THE UTERUS.
 TURIRCULA OF THE UTERUS, TERMINATING
               IN CANCER.
    Menorrhagia terminating in Cancer.
  Miss P. F.----, of----, of full habit and
light complexion, aged 22  years; called to
see her, May 16, 1812.  She has menorrha-
gia, which commenced four months ago.   I
prescribed  the  usual  remedies  for  many
months, during which time,  as before,  she
had been constantly confined to her bed : but
all  to no purpose, and it now became neces-
sary to abandon the  patient or commence a
new treatment.
   She had from the first complained much of
pain and weakness in the small of her back;
which was attended with leucorrhoea.  I pro-
posed now to examine her  back, and applied
pressure on and around  the lumbar vertebrae,
and this  produced  violent pain, which, on
every repetition of the pressure,  darted into
the uterus, and they appeared to be the same
darting pains we find in cancer of the breast. 
191
  1 now prescribed the magnetic  pills  and
plaster.  The  plaster  over the  small of the
back,  or lumbar  vertebrae, with  injections
into the uterus of a strong  solution  of acetate
of iron,  by means of a catheter and small
pointed syringe.
  Her symptoms  began to improve slowly
from this time, and in about three months, a
very thick  membrane  separated from the in-
side of the uterus,  and was discharged fspm
it, rolled up—round—half an inch in diame-
ter, and two  inches in length,  which  was
presented to me in  a paper, and on unrolling
and spreading  it out on a  stand, it presented
two tumors or  bunches, of dark colored fungi
near the middle or centre of it,—one of which
was near the  size and shape of a chestnut,
and  the other of the size  of a pea, and flat-
tened on the sides that  adhered to the mem-
brane, and at a  distance from each other of
half an inch.
  These fungi were  on the  outside of the
membrane, or that next the uterus, and ad-
hered  to and sunk deeply into it;  and  there
arose out of their  tops and sides small white
or light colored substances of the size and
appearance of small threads, and from a line
to a fourth of an inch  in length.
  On examining the  other side of this mem-
brane, small holes or chinks were found op-
posite to these fungi. 
I!'2
   In a few weeks after this, her health was
 restored.   She married about a year after, but
 has had no children.
   Note.—It is now (1842) 30 years  since  I
 treated the above case, and  the remedies by
 which this lady was cured, have fully main-
 tained their reputation  to this time; not only
 in tubercular disease of the uterus but in cases
 of the same disease affecting other organs.

 fEROSIS OF THE KNEE,  STOMACH AND  LUNGS,
  TUBERCULA OF THE LEFT KNEE, STOMACH,
             AND LEFT LUNG.
 White Swelling, Dyspepsia and Consumption.
  Master Alexander Benedict, of  light com-
 plexion, aged  15 years, came  into my office
 on crutches, in June, 1837, accompanied by
 his father.   On examining the son, I found
 he had a white swelling on the  left knee,
 and tuberculated stomach and left lung. The
 disease commenced  in  the knee about  five
 years before, and progressed gradually under
 the treatment of the best physicians and sur-
geons of this  city,  until  February,  1837,
when the  disease commenced in the lungs,
with cough and  expectoration, which  still
continued,  and he was  then  pale, feeble  and
emaciated.   Prescribed  the  magnetic  reme-
dies.  I heard  no more from the case until
October of the  same year, when he called at 
193
my office with  hi6 father m perfect health
The while swelling of the  knee, with the
cough and expectoration, had entirely disap-
peared, and he had gained so much flesh and
strength  as to make him appear in as good
health as that of any other  person, and his
health has continued good to this time.

               New York, June 8, 1840.
  I have  read the above description of the
case of my son, and  will add to it the fact of
my having paid the  best physicians  and sur-
geons of  this  city, about a thousand dollars
For their attendance on him, and that they had
given up  the Case, and told me that he  could
not be cured, but  must die;  when a gentle-
man (Mr. Baker) advised me to take him to
Dr. Sherwood; I did so, anu got him cured
at last, as stated above, for ten dollars*
         SAMUEL W. BENEDICT,
              No. 2 Merchant's Exchange.

  * I have had a great number of  similar ca-
ses which have terminated in the same  man-
her,  and  in which from fifty to five hundred
dollars had been first paid to other physicians
and surgeons for their attendance upon them. 
Ml
          SEROSIS OF THE EYES.
        TUBERCULA OF  THE EYES.
           Scrofulous sore eyes.
  Miss M. Wilkinson, of Syracuse, N.  Y.,
aged 3 years.   She had scrofulous sore eyes,
with ulcers of the cornea.   The disease com-
menced in 1836, when she was about a year
and a half old.   It gradually grew worse,
and she became blind in  about  eight months
from the time it commenced, and continued so
until the spring of 1838, when she commenc-
ed the use of the magnetic remedies.  In two
weeks  after she began to see, and in three
weeks  could see very well, when the shade
she had worn a year and a half was removed
from her eyes. I saw her in July  of the seme
year, when her eyes were  entirely well, and
she enjoying fine health.
  Her father is wealthy, well educated,  and
intelligent, and obtained the attendance  and
advice of the  best physicians in the case;
but the  disease continued to make progress
until it was arrested by these remedies. 
196
   tn a great majority of the cases  of curva-
 ture of the spine, we use a magnetic scrophu-
 lous plaster over the white-swellings, by which
 they  are  reduced much faster than they are
 by the use of the machine alone.   The plaster
 is removed and renewed once or twice a week,
 when these swellings are magnetized.
   The effect of this plaster with the magnetiz-
 ed gold pills, without the use of the magnetic
 machine, will  be seen in the description of the
 following case, which we treated and publish-
 ed before we introduced the use of  the above
 Instrument.
  Miss E. B., of Stratford, Conn., aged twelve years. I
 called to see her in Dec, 1639. and on an examination
 found a lateral curvature of the dorsal vertebrae,  a por-
 tion of which extended under,  and raised the right
shoulder blade.  The right hip was also raised  above
 the left, and her health and strength much reduced.
  Prescribed the magnetic remedies.  The plaster to
extend the whole  length of the spine.  The weight of
her body  was also directed  to be suspended by  her
arms, with any simple contrivance, as by taking hold
of a stick suspended from a ceiling, a few minutes, five
or six times a day.
  t called to see her again  the last part of  April, 1840,
when, on examination of the spine, it was found to have
resumed  its natural position, and  ber health and
strength perfectly restored.
  I frequently find such patients harnessed with  cush-
ions and  splints,  but regarding them as  worse than
useless, I  always remove them.
  The true cause of lateral curvature of the spine Is
not understood.   They are always cases of tubercular
disease of  the muscles of  the spine.   The tubercula-
tions, or white-swellings, are always on the posterior
side of the curve, and produce  the  deviations of  tha
cpine. 
196
PLATE M.
Lateral or Side View of the Throat.
  1. Part of the ear and right temporal bone. 2,2. Jaw
bone of right side. 3. Tongue.  4. Epiglottis. 6. Glot-
tis, or  upper part of the larynx.   6. Trachae, or wind-
pipe. 7.0<;sophagus. or gulfet.  8. Thyroid cartilage.
9.  Cricoid cartilage.  10.  The upper  part of the
oesophagus and pharynx laid open.  a. Tuberculm in
the pharynx, or upper part of the oesophagus. 
197
   Tubercula of the Throat —In tubercular disease of
 the throat, it is always  contracted and  smaller than
 natural, in consequence of the tuberculations, and
 consequent  thickening of Its walls.  In recent and
 alio in slight cases of this disease, there is a thicken-
 ing and elongation of the uvula or palate, and of the
 tonsilar curtain on each side of  it; but in  the older
 or more severe ca.^cs, tubercula may be seen in the
 hack part of the throat, a. and the uvula large  and
 elongated.  From a mere hawking to raise matter from
 the throat, a cough generally succeeds from an ex-
 tension of the  disease to the lungs ; and we should
 here  observe that in about nine cases out often of
 tubercular  consumption  in males, the  disease com-
 mences in the  throat first, and is  from  there  propa-
 gated to the lungs : but in females this order is  re-
 versed, and the tubercular disease propagated from
 the uterus  to  the lungs.  The  excretions  from the
 tuberculations are from the throat in males, but are
 from  the uterus in females, and called leucorrlicea.
   In a few of the older  and more severe cases of tu-
 bercula of the throat, the disease is propagated to the
 epiglottis, Plate M., Fig. 4, which becomes more or
 less thickened, and its motion over the glottis or up-
 per part of the larynx. Fig. S, more or less impeded
 in breathing, talking or swallowing, and there is now
 more or less hoarseness.  In some of these  last cases,
 the disease extends to the larynx, when the hoarse-
 ness is greatly increased, or the voico  entirely lost,
 from the immobility of the epiglottis, the thickening
 of the  muscles ana membranes in the upper part of
 the larynx, Fig. 5, and of those of its  ventricle a little
 below the lower part of Figure 6.   Many of these
 cases terminate in ulceration of the larynx in the last
 stage of the disease, as  seen by clairvoyants, and in
 post mortem examinations.
  The magnetic  remedies, or the magnetized  gold
 pills and plaster, cure every case  of this disease  in
its  first stage,  and very nearly all in its last stage.
It, however,  should never be forgotten that these pa-
tients generally recover much faster with  the daily
use of the magnetic machine at the same time.  Cases
of aphonia, or loss of the voice, from  an extension of 
198
the disease to the larynx, as described above, uni-
formly recover their voice  by the  action  of these
remedies.   The progress of the cure is sometimes
                 ^much increased by the use of gar-
                 gles of a strong solution of the ni-
                 trate of silver,  and by spreading
                 this solution  over the larynx, or
                 epiglottis and glottis,  with a pro-
                 bong N. armed with a small piece
                 of fine  sponge wet in the solution.
                  We have used from thirty to six-
                 tv grains of the nitrate of silver to
                 an ounce of water in these cases.
                 The  probang is  made of whale-
                 bone, and is  about 12  inches long,
                 including the handle.   It  is bent,
                 as seen in the figure, and the sponge
                 full of the solution, thrust down the
                 throat  to the top  of  the larynx.
                 The throat is first gargled a few
                 times with this solution to lessen
                 the irritation  of the throat before
                 an attempt is made to introduce the
                 probang. when we will generally
                 succeed the first time  in  reaching
             J  the larynx.  The operator should
                 then press  hard  upon it, so as to
                 make the  solution pass from the
                 sponge through   the  glottis and
                 chorda; voralis,  into the ventricle
                 of the larynx, and if the case is  a
                 very bad  one,  the sponge  itself
                 should  be thrust into the ventricle.
              N   There is not the slightest danger
In introducing the solution into the larynx in this man-
ner in tubercular disease of the throat, which may be
repeated once or twice a  week for a few weeks, as
may be required.
  Acute serosis,  or  inflammation  of  the larynx
(croup), has been treated thus with great success.
  The  passage of thi*. solution from the sponge into
the  ventricle of  the  diseased  larynx, does not in
  eneral produce as much irritation as is often pre-
  uced by the passage of  a drop of water into it in a
healthy state
I 
199
         MAGNETIC MISCELLANY.
  In magnetizing a boy aged 12 years on the
23d of March inst., with recent paralysis of the
left  arm, tongue and face, and tetanic rigidity
of the muscles of the neck, &c, we placed the
positive button in his left  Viand, and the nega-
tive button in our left hand, while we made
passes with the right hand over the face during
four or five minutes.   In about five minutes
from  the time we  finished the operation, our
left arm began to ache* and the intensity of this
sensation increased so rapidly, as to completely
paralyze the arm in one minute, and in about
two minutes  it was so great as to be insup-
portable.   A sinking sensation began  to per-
vade  the system, when we called  for assist-
ance, and  had  the  negative  button quickly
placed in the left hand, and the positive on the
neck, under the full  power of our largest ma-
chine.  We soon felt a pleasant sensation from
the action of the  instrument: the  horrible
aching  sensation began to  give way, and in
about five  minutes it  had ceased very nearly,
and the motion of the arm was restored. In this
case the disease in the left arm of the boy was
conducted  to our left arm by the current from
the positive button in an opposite direction from
the current which was at the same time moving
from the negative to the positive button.
  This  manner of magnetizing is a very plea-
  *  Achino  is the sensation  produced  by the preva-
lence of the  positive over the  negative force, and pain
the  sensation produced by the  prevalence  of the nega-
tive over the positive force. 
200
■ant one for patients, but sometimes, as we
have  now  learnt, a  very dangerous  one for
magnetizers.*
  The most severe  cholic pains are  reduced
with great rapidity by the action of the ma-
chines, as we are informed by several physi-
cians.  Two cases of recent dropsy—one from
chronic serosis or tubercular disease of  the
heart and muscles, and the other from chronic
serosis of the liver and right kidney, have, we
are also informed, been promptly removed by
the action of these instruments.
  Asthmas which have long defied every other
remedy, have readily yielded  to the action of
these machines. In these cases, patients should
be magnetized as in Bronchitis.
  The importance of a scientific application of
the buttons may be seen in the fact, that many
eases of disease which resisted an empirical
manner of magnetising, have yielded readily
to a scientific application of the buttons.
  Dr. Cox, of Williamsburg,  N. Y., has cured
a bad case  of white  swelling of the knee, with
the Savage Rotary Machine alone.
  Dr.  Baker, of Brooklyn,  New York, has
brought a child about two years old to life, and
saved  it with one of these machines, after it
had been apparently dead 10 or 15  minutes.
  Di.—— brought a child to life under similai
circumstances. It breathed a  few minutes, but
in consequence of some difficulty in running tho
  * We hive taken disease in  mesmerizing patient*,
and in each case it wa» the exact countrrpnrt of tb«
disease with which the patients were affected. 
201
machine, the child was lost. On learning these
circumstances, we determined, if possible, to
have a machine which should not be subject to
such accidents, and we have succeeded  in the
Vibrating Machine, with tke assistance  of the
ingenious Mr.  Cornell, of the  Magnetic Tele-
graph*
  Salt Rheum.  The worst cases of this dis^-
ease are quickly cured  by the action of the
machine.   Dilute sulphuric acid is the reme-
dy to use at the same time.  One drop  of the
acid to  ninety of alcohol—magnetize.   Dose
three to five drops two or three times a-day, in
a wine-glass of water.
  Dr. Milspaugh, of Orange county, N. Y, has
cured a  case  of Amaurosis with the Savage
Rotary Machine.
  There are  some cases of rheumatism in
which pain in a limb or other part of the sys-
tem commences or is increased  on becoming
warm in bed at night. In these cases the Tinc-
ture RhusToxicodendront is the remedy which
should be used in conjunction with the action
of the machine. Dose. 1 to 8  drops in a wine-
glass of water, three times a-day, according to
the age and condition of the patient.
  Bilious Fevers.—A number of physicians
of this city and country, have reduced violent
paroxysms of  fever with these instruments, in

  *  Impostors are already engaged in attempts to  im-
pose on tke  public miserable imitations of these ma-
chines.
  t  Weismann & Cassebeer,  German  Apothecaries,
New York. 
202
,rom  five to  ten  minutes.   The excessive
action of the instrument on persons in health,
produces fever.
  The blood is dark-colored in fevers and in
acute and chronic diseases, and becomes more
florid under the action of the instrument.
  In  the Vibrating Magnetic  Machines, the
circuit of the forces is broken so fast  as to
make their motions continuous, without varia-
tion  of intensity except by the  action  of the
piston, and they consequently accumulate in
the system with great rapidity.
  In from five to ten minutes from the time we
commence magnetizing patients, the pores of
the skin are  generally opened by the action of
these forces, and they begin to perspire.  It is
commonly only necessary for patients to hold
the buttons in the hands,under a moderate pow-
er of the instrument, to obtain these results.
  Nothing can be compared  to  the  curative
action of these machines in acute diseases, or
in inflammations.  The Lancet,  Calomel, and
Blue Pill, which entail diseases on millions of
the human race every year, may now be lain
aside with  perfect  safety to  patients, and
abiding benefit to their posterity.
  Some  physicians think these  instruments
ere of greater importance  in  acute diseases
than in those that  are chronic, from the great
rapidity  of  the  cures  in such  cases.   They
should, however, never forget  the fact, that
chronic diseases  are slow  in their progress,
and consequently necessarily so in the cure 
203
Magnetizing in Lateral Cnrvatures of tbe Spin*.
   Drawn and Engraved from a Daguerreotype.
 
204
  In magnetizing for lateral curvatures of the spine, wa
have introduced the chair represented in the engraving.
It is a strong common office arm-chair, the upper and
back part of which being sawed off, and the front part
cushioned—the right arm  resting on one cushion, and
the magnetizing buttons on the other.  A loose cushion
Is crowded into the space on the right side, and a strong
gallon glass-bottle  placed upon  it; when  the  young
lady with a right and  left  spinal curvature—or having
the upper part of the spine curved to the right, and the
lower part to the left side—is drawn over the boMle by an
assistant, in the manner seen in the figure, and the but-
tons applied in the usual manner, as described In p. 60-61.
  In this case, it was eight years since  the  curvature
commenced;  and there was, as  usual,  a  large white
swelling of the right scapula, or shoulder-blade, which
drew the spine under it
  On the 23d time we magnetized this patient (May 17,
1845), the white swelling being greatly reduced, and
the atrophied or emaciated muscles on the opposite side
much thickened, the spine passed the centre, under the
action of the  machine, and began to curve to the left
side, as seen in the figure.
  The most  prominent part of the white swelling was
of a dark red color, produced by the heavy brass corsets
the young lady had long worn, which was consequent-
ly shown in the daguerreotype.
  We have here presented in the plainest manner, the
extraordinary phenomena of the reduction of hypertro-
phied muscles on one side of the spine, and the thick-
ened atrophied muscles on the other, by the action of
the machine alone,  directed by a scientific and easy ap-
plication of the buttons. 
     TOBL'RCULA OF  THE MUSCLES.

Effects of Magnetising upon the Magnetiser—
  Rheumatism—Dizziness—Cold feet and hands
  —Neuralgia—Tic Douloureux—Hahnemann
  and Homoeopathic remedies.

  We probably receive, on  an  average, fifty
shocks  a day  in  magnetising  our patients,
either from  accidentally touching the unpro-
tected parts of both buttons, or from touching
the patient with one finger and a button with
the other, and were at first much  alarmed at
the consequences  that might result from  it
We  have been, however, not  only happily
disappointed  in our expectations  of injury,
but have found it a great  benefit to us.   It
has  removed every vestige of chronic rheu-
matism  with which we have been much affect-
ed during the last fourteen years.
   We never had so much elasticity in our
body and limbs,  and never  had  so much
strength; we never walked with  so much
ease as  we now do; and besides, we frequent-
ly, even after  having gone through  a great
labor during the day, feel so much elasticity
and  buoyancy  that it is rather difficult to sit
or stand still, from a strong inclination to be
moving, jumping, or dancing;  these sensa-
tions are in fact sometimes so strong as to re*
quire great efforts to repress them 
206
  Persons  affected  with  rheumatism,  and
especially those in the  decline of life, are
more  or less  subject to turns of dizziness,
which sometimes  compel them to  sit or lie
down suddenly, to prevent them from falling;
and we had been much  affected in  this way.
But these  premonitory  symptoms  of palsy
have  entirely  disappeared with  those  of
rheumatism;  and we have removed  these
symptoms in many other cases, by magnetis-
ing the brain—a practice much more simple
and effectual than the old routine practice of
the schools.   Those  who are affected with
rheumatism are very subject to colds, and to
cold feet and hands.
  A great number of the cases of head-ache,
are those of rheumatism affecting the muscles
of the head, and the membranes of the brain;
and the muscles of the face are affected with
rheumatism under  the  names of  Neuralgia
and Tic-Douloureux;  and those  of the heart
under the name of hypertrophy of the heart.*
Many of the cases of vacillating pains about
the chest—of  the  front, right, and left side,
along the  pectoral and  intercostal muscles,
are cases of rheumatism, often mistaken for
disease of the lungs.  These cases  are all

  * In magnetising for headache, the negative button
should be placed over the point where the  pain is most
intense, as In other cases. 
207
distinguished  in an instant  by the  pain pro-
duced by pressing with the  thumb and finger
on the intervertebral spaces of the middle and
back  part of the neck, the intensity of which
increases with the intensity of the disease;
and  physicians, on commencing the  practice
of the magnetic symptoms, are often surpris-
ed to  find the  great number of  cases of rheu-
matism—of tubercular disease of the muscles,
as well as  of the organs.
   Hahnemann  committed  a  great error  in
mistaking  tubercula of the  organs and mus-
cles  for Psora  or Itch,  as every physician
knows who practises these symptoms; and in
searching for  remedies for this imaginary af-
fection,  or " anti-p&orics," justly  subjected
himself and his followers, or homceopathists,
to the imputation of chasing a  phantom.
  These remedies, like those of the Allopa-
thists, have no effect in  chronic diseases of
the organs and limbs, but  that of palliating
urgent symptoms in the periods of excitement,
which  uniformly  follow  those  of  repose.
They never cure the disease, and  have little
or no effect upon those who are not very sus-
ceptible to  mesmeric or  magnetic influence.*
  * The great number of cases we have examined with
the magnetic symptoms during the last seven years,
after they had been a long time under the treatment
of the homcBopathists of this city, has left no doubt
upon this subject. 
208
Homoeopathic  remedies  are, however, gene-
rally very efficient in acute diseases, and are
useful as palliatives in those that are chronic
  The negative and  positive surfaces of the
facia of the muscles are  both equally affected
in acute rheumatism, and the affected limb or
limbs are  consequently paralysed; and  in
chronic  rheumatism, the positive surface of
the  facia in which the motor nerves terminate,
is more or less affected, and the motion of the
limb or  limbs more or less  impeded,  and
hence the necessity of using positive as well
as  negative medicines,  or  combinations  of
positive and negative medicinesi in many cases
of this disease.   The uncertainty in regard to
the  extension of  the disease in the different
surfaces, relatively to each other,  necessarily
makes the true  remedy for any given case
 uncertain, excepting only the magnetized
 gold pills and plaster.
   Rheumatism.—R.  Rotary Magnetic Ma-
 chine,  Animal   Magnetism,   Magnetized
 rings.
  Rheumatism.—R.   Nitrate Potash,   §j. ;
water,  8 oz.  Mix.  Dose,  a teaspoonful  3
times a day, in a wine-glass of water.
  Rheumatism.—R.   Tinct.  or  Vin. Colchi*
cum,   5 ■•      Dose, 5 to 30 drops, accord- 
209
»ng to the age of the patient and the severity
of the pain.   Repeat the dose, if necessary, 2
or 3 times a day during one week only.
   Rheumatism.—R.    Iodide Potash,   3 ij„
water, 8  oz.   Mix.  Dose,  a teaspoonful  3
times a day in a wine-glass of water.
   Rheumatism.—R.    Tinct.   Rhus.  Tox.,
 3 ii.   Dose, 1 to 3 drops, morning and even
ing, in a wine-glass of water.
   Morphine  or Belladonna may  be  given
during the use of either of the  articles in the
above Recipes, if  necessary to  allay the se-
verity of the symptoms. 
210
         ATROPHIA RKEUMATICA.
 Urophia of the muscles—Chronic mucosis of the mus-
  cles—{Chronic disease of the negative or mucous sur-
 faces of the facia of the  muscles.)
  In atrophia rheumatics, or chronic mucosis of  the
nuscles, they are always flattened,  emaciated,  aud
feeble.  The disease, with the emaciation, pursues
it^: course in the most quiet manner, without pain or
other disturbance in the muscles, excepting only
tt.hing sensations  from  over-doing, or changes of
lomperaturo.  Like chronic  ccrosis, hypertrophy, or
mbercula of the muscles, it is often produced by  fre-
quent changes of temperature, and  is often  compli-
cated with this disease, and  is sometimes the sequel
of it.—Give mucous pill, p. .    63
  One of these pills should be taken after breakfast
flirt another after  tea every day. excepting; in cases
»here it is  complicated with tubercular disease,
« lien one after breakfast, aud a magnetised gold  pill
:-fter tea should be taken  in place of the above.
  When we  find that in the case of  tubercula of  the
muscles, the tuberculations have  disappeared, as
evidenced by a flattening and emaciation of the mus-
cles, the magnetised gold pills, or other remedies for
tubercula, should be discontinued,  and the above
pills for atrophia substituted in their place.
  The same  course should be pursued in cases of tu-
bercula of the heart, or uterus, as they are muscular
m-gans.   Clairvoyants, who distinguish these different
states of the muscles, and  of the organs, can tell when
we should use one ol these different remedies, or both
of them at the same time.  If the  process of cure
should be very slow in cases of atrophia, Phosphorus
may be  given once a day (5 globules)  during 6 or 6
days, when they  should  be discontinued a few days,
and then repeated, if the urgency of the symptoms
require  it.
  The above medicines, with the  daily use of  the
Magnetic Machine, will be all the remedies that will
be required  in these cases of atrophia, excepting only
those that are in the last part of the last stage of the
disease, when medicines of any kind will be useless.
  These cases of atrophia are comparatively very
rare, about one to 49 of tubercula. 
211
               CONSUMPTION.
  We would again direct the attention of the readers
of this work to the importance of the use of the mag-
netic  machine in the treatment of tubercular con-
sumption, as our  experience  of its effects in  more
than 450 cases of this  disease leaves no doubt  but it
greatly assists the action of other remedies in reduc-
ing tubercular disease of the lungs.
  These cases were all distinguished by the magne-
tic symptoms, which never err ;  and the state of the
tuberculations was often observed through clairvoy-
ance  during the progress of the treatment, as  were
the changes in the appearance of the  tubercles from
the action of the instrument.
  Of 164  cases of  ladies and gentlemen who visited
our rooms in  1S44, in all  the different stages of the
disease, we lost only eleven;  and of 203 who visited
our rooms in 184;>, we  have lost only nine. In two
of these the tuberculations were reduced  as shown
by the magnetic symptoms and  by clairvoyance, but
both died of mucous disease, in the then feeble state
of the lungs, in consequence of colds.
  All the cases  were, from the commencement of the
treatment, under the action of the magnetized gold
pills in conjunction with that of the machine, and in
a great majority of the cases the magnetized plaster
was used at the  same time.   No other medicines were
used  in these  cases,  except, occasionally, different
articles to palliate the cough, and in a few cases the
Hardwood Tar Syrup, or the pill composed of Hard.
Bal. Copa. cubebs and  Ext. Hyos.,  where the tuber-
culations were accompanied with much mucous dis-
ease,  generally from  colds after the  tubercles had
nearly disappeared.
  This course of treatment, in fact, cures every case
of consumption in the first stage  (which is easily dis-
tinguished), and more than nine-tenths of the cases
in the last stage.
  We should have lost but eight cases  in 1845, but for
the interfeience of a  physician, who  persuaded the
mother of a young lady, nearly  recovered from the
disease, to allow him to prescribe for her, when she
soon  began to  grow worse, and then he began to
apply his cupping glasses to the chest, from which she
bled freely, and soon carried her to her grave. 
MAGNEPATHY.
     THE DUALITY OF DISEASES,

AND THEIR DUODYNAMIC  TREATMENT.

  The division of diseases into two classes, is founded
in nature, as  may  be seen from the fact, that one
class originates in, and is connected with, the  serous
membranes, tissues, and  surfaces ; while the other
class originates in, and is connected with, the mucous
membranes, tissues,  and surfaces.  The termination
of the nerves of sensation in the serous, and of those
of motion in the mucous membranes, imparts to these
membranes opposite, or negative and positive charac-
ters ; and they, consequently, impart opposite charac-
ters to their diseases.  The  magnetic or scientific
symptoms by which the diseases of these different
membranes are distinguished, are opposite, or positive
and negative symptoms; and the natural or most suc-
cessful remedies for these different diseases, are also
opposite in character, or positive and negative reme-
dies—the  specific remedy for diseases of one class
having no curative effects in diseases of the other.
  These dual divisions of the membranes, nerves, dis-
eases, symptoms, and remedies, correspond with  the
known duality of the human frame, and have  the in-
delible marks of truth and nature stamped upon them. 
213
         The Selection of Medicines.

  A very great difference has long been observed in
the susceptibility of different persons to the influence
of medicines ;  and the same  difference  is now con-
stantly observed in the susceptibility of different per-
sons to the influence of mesmerism, and the magnetic
machine :  those  who are very  susceptible to one,
being equally so to the other.
  The magical effects of these influences upon some
persons, gave  rise  to the practice of mesmerising
medicines in Germany, and of magnetising them in
this country, and at about the same period (1810.)
  The powers of medicines are greatly exalted by
these processes ; and hence  tha cause of the  use of
small infiiiitessimal doses of medicines, as practised by
the homoeopathists.
  The effects of these medicines upon children under
ten years, and upon adults who  are  susceptible to
mesmeric or magnetic  influence, are very prompt
and salutary ; but they have little or no effect upon
the naturally  insusceptible, or  upon those who have
become so from disease.  And as large doses of me-
dicine are as  dangerous to those who are very sus-
ceptible to these influences, as  very small doses are
useless to the insusceptible, it is a matter of great
importance, in many cases, to ascertain the degree of
susceptibility of patients ; and tbis can be ascertained
in a moment by  a mesmeriser, or by the action of the
magnetic machine.

          The Repetition of Doses.

  In acute diseases, the  doses  should generally be
repeated in from one to four  hours, according to the
greater or less  urgency of the symptoms, and the
effects produced by the medicines, with low diet.
  In chronic diseases, the doses should be repeated
from one to three times  a-day only, according to the
urgency of the symptoms, with full diet. 
214
             The Action of Medicine.

   Chemical affinity, by which matter  is decomposed
 and recomposed,  depends  upon the magnetism in
 innate matter, and magnetism is also innate in medi-
 cine as in every other kind of innate matter, and is
 modified more or  less by the medicine  or matter
 with which it is combined, and this  modified mag-
 netism in medicines acts  upon the magnetic or  spi-
 ritual forms of our bodies through the nervous sys-
 tem, as  the  magnetism  of one magnet acts upon
 that of another.*
  It is not, therefore, the mere matter of medicine ab-
 stracted from its essence or spirit, that acts upon  our
 spirits, but  it  is the magnetic essence or  spiritual
 parts of medicines that thus acts.
  The  magnetism  in inanimate matter  is unorgan-


  * Originally in the formation of our  globe, its
 nebulous  or  etherial magnetized matter was con-
 densed  by  the  action   of the  magnetic   forces,
 and formed  an immense  hollow sphere  or globe or
 water.   The process  of condensation  continued, and
 these opposite forces formed first  muriatic acid, and
 then soda, and these  being mixed by the action of
 the waters, formed a strong solution  of muriate of
 soda, and hence the muriate /of soda was universally
 diffused over the globe as we see it at the present
 period, in the ocean  and on the  islands and conti-
 nents from which the ocean  has receded.  Conden-
 sations continued, and from the combination of these
 new elements with the water, granite an insoluble
 compound was formed, and sank  to  form the inner
crust, and foundation  of the future earth,—of islands
and continents, and for an infinite number of combi-
nations of different kinds  and forms of matter, in the
mineral, vegetable and animal kingdoms. 
215
lied,  and has comparatively very little power, b:.
when we magnetize this matter  and thus give forni
to its magnetism, its power is  increased a thousand
fold, as  is seen in magnetizing a piece of iron or
steel; for before  it is magnetised it will affect th■■>
compass  or variation needle  very  little or only i.i
the  slightest manner, but when we have magnetised.
added to, and given form to its magnetism, its power i-
increased a thousandfold, and hence the origin of en
idea or notion of magnetising medicines, which \ri
commenced in 1810 and have continued to this time
  It may be objected that  magnetism is a physical
and not  a  dynamical power.  It would, however, in-
a great mistake to suppose so, for magnetism is  both
a physical and dynamical  power, and is the origin
and foundation of duodynamics, or of the two pow-
ers  or  forces, male and female, which not only pro-
duce  motion everywhere  and  in  everything, but
are  endowed witHWie divine power of creating and
forming  everything  in  nature—the solar  systems,
and their mineral, vegetable, and animal kingdoms.
Magnetism is unorganised or without  form in inani-
mate matter, but is organised in regular forms in ani-
mate  matter, hence  organised magnetism is neces-
sary to the existence of vegetable and animal  life—
of living beings, and hence  living beings are organ-
ised with regular magnetic or spiritual forms, or are
magnetised bodies ;  for  to magnetise a body is to
make a magnetic or spiritual form in that body ; so
when we have magnetised a person we have made
a spiritual  form in that person, in addition to their
natural spiritual form.
  The magnetic power is  identical with the nervous 
216
power, as shown by  the  magnetic symptoms, and
by  the  experiments  of  Dr.  Philip,  Dr.  Ure,  M.
Donnie,  Professor  Matteucci's,       in  the  ap-
pendix  to this work.  Magnetism  is  accumulated
through  the nerves in the opposite hemispheres of
the brain, from  the opposite or serous  or mucous
membranes or surfaces, including  the outer skin or
surface, and the inner skin or surface that lines the in-
side of the lungs and alimentary canal.   The positive
force is accumulated in the left hemisphere from the
outer and the negative force in  the right hemisphere
from the innersurface, and there form positive and ne-
gative poles, in the same manner they are formed by
the accumulation of the opposite forces from the op-
posite surfaces to  the  opposite poles of the common
Galvanic battery.   The outer or serous  surfaces ot
the human system excrete negative  matter  which
gives out the positive force, while the inner or mu-
cous  surfaces excrete positive matter which  gives
out the negative force, to be attracted through the
nerves to  the different  hemispheres, and corres-
ponds with the diflerent surfaces of diflerent  kinds
of matter from which the diflerent or negative  and
positive forces issue by the action of an acid upon
the said surfaces  of  the  Galvanic  battery.  The
first, however, is a natural and sustaining battery,
while the last is artificial and transitory.
'  The discovery of the  magnetic symptoms  sug-
gested the theory of the  magnetism  of  the  human
system and of  the identity of the magnetic and ner-
vous power, and by the practice of those symptoms
we discovered and demonstrated the exclusive con-
nection of the nerves of sensation with the skin and 
217
serous membranes,  and of the  motor  nerves with
the mucous membranes.  The exclusive connection
of the nerves of sensation with the skin and serous
membranes, was demonstrated by the presence  of
the magnetic symptoms in diseases of the skin and
serous membranes,  acute  or  chronic, and their en-
tire absence in diseases  of the mucous membranes.
This  evidence was direct, irresistible  and conclu-
sive ;  but  it was directly opposed to  the theories
and practice of the schools,  which  taught a great
sensibility in the mucous membranes, and they and
their dupes continue to practice  upon these theories
to this time, and we  consequently sought for other
and corresponding  evidence  on this subject;  and
first we inquired of clairvoyants in regard to these
exclusive  connections  of  the   different  kinds   of
nerves with the different kinds of membranes, when
they traced them from the diflerent fibres of the brain
through the different spinal nerves to these diflerent
membranes, and from  these different membranes  to
the different fibres and organs  of the brain.*
  We  then obtained  a brass cylinder five inches
long,  and half an inch in diameter, with  a  brass nob
three-fourths of an inch  in diameter, soldered on
one end of the cylinder, and a loop of brass wire on
the other, and connected  this loop with one of the
wires of one of our most powerful magnetic  ma-
chines, and directed a female affected with leucor-
rhcea, to  introduce  the whole length  of this  instru-

  * The concurrent testimony of clairvoyants is as
good evidence as any other. 
218
ment into  the vagina, and  then  apply the button
attached to the opposite wire over  the lumber verte
brae, when after having remained in this situation
about ten minutes under the full  power of the ma-
chine, she removed the instrument and came out of
her retreat to inform me  that she felt the button
over the vertebras very  powerfully, but contrary to
her expectation she did not feel the  slightest effect
from the instrument she  introduced into the vagina.
We induced  her  to repeat this  experiment  more
than a dozen times in  the course of a few weeks,
which  were always  attended with the same result,
and we also induced more  than sixty females affect-
ed with tubercula of the  uterus  to  magnetise  this
organ in the manner above described, in the course
of as many days, and with  the same result  as in the
first case.
  The  result  of these  experiments  with  the  mag-
netic machine, like those of the magnetic symptoms,
are therefore perfectly fatal to the theories and  prac-
tice of the schools, and are conclusive and final.
  The discovery of the exclusive  connection  of the
different kinds of nerves with the different kinds of
membranes, suggested the theory of the  necessity
of different or opposite characters  in  the diseases of
the different  membranes,  requiring  a  different or
opposite  treatment,  and  subsequent  observations
have confirmed  this  theory  in the most conclusive
manner,  upon which  a simple, safe and uniformly
successful practice is founded.
  The  discoveries  of the  magnetic  symptoms, the
magnetic organzation of the system, the identity of
th»  magnetic and nervous power,  the exclusive 
219
 connection of the different kinds of nerves with the
 different kinds of membranous  surfaces,  and of the
 different diseases of the  different  kinds of mem-
 branes, requiring diflerent kinds of treatment, and
 the introduction of the magnetic maohine to cure dis-
 eases, cannot fail  to produce an  entire  revolution in
 the theory and practice of medicine, in this country
 —on this continent—in Europe—in  Asia,  and over
 every part of the civilised world.


 Changes in the Magnetic States of the Atmosphere.
   Acute and chronic diseases are often produced, and
 also often aggravated by changes of temperature, by
 colds, over-doing, and by other causes, and the symp-
 toms of aggravation, and also of alleviation, are uni-
 formly and constantly changed with  the changes of
 the wind, the consequence of the changes in the mag-
 netic states  of the atmosphere ; and hence persons
 who are very susceptible to magnetic influence, are
 also very susceptible to these changes.
  The magnetic machine, magnetized medicines, mes-
 merism, and homoeopathic medicines, will generally
 be found much the  best and  also much the safest
 remedies, or paliatives in these cases, and are gene-
 rally indicated by the symptoms,  as  the magnetic
 machine, in acute pain, spasms, aconite in colds, sore
 throat, hasmorrhage,  &c. ; colocynth in aching pain,
spasms, &c. ; colic,  and  arnica  in shocks, bruises,
sprains.  Page 180, &c. 
220
         ON TEE USE OF MEDICINE.

  Tn introduction of the Magnetic Machine forms si
new era in the practice of medicine.  The lancet, calo-
mel, and blue pill—the universal panaceas of the pro-
fession, which entail diseases on millions of the human
race every year—may now be laid aside,  with perfect
safety to patients, and abiding benefit to their posterity.
The action of the  magnetic machine, colchicum, aco>
nite, and mercurius solubilis, answer all the purposes for
which the lancet,  calomel, and  blue  pill have been
used, and in the most prompt and satisfactory manner.
These are the reasons why we have not recommended
the use of these remedies in the foregoing  pages.
  Colchicum  removes acute  pain in the  most violent
inflammations in a more prompt and satisfactory man-
ner than the lancet; and many distinguished physicians
have, consequently, long  believed that the profession
might safely dispense with its  use.  The  influence of
the magnetic machine has since been brought to the
aid of the colchicum;  and there is now no doubt of the
great  superiority of their  combined influence over the
lancet, in reducing  inflammations—one or  two doses of
the tincture of sem. colchicum being generally sufficient
in these cases.
  The use  of this remedy, like every other in  acute
disease, should be discontinued when its specific effect,
or the effect for which it was given, has been obtained,
and another  remedy  substituted  in its place, if  the
symptoms in the course of the  disease make it neces- 
221
saiy to do so.  So if we find we have not selected the
right remedy, it should be discontinued, and another
substituted in its place; and  we have,  consequently,
arranged the remedies for the different diseases of the
organs,  as  seen in pages £39,241,243, and 245,  com-
mencing generally with the most potent or important
remedy first, and the next, second, sic.
  The action of the magnetic machine should be com-
bined with the use  of either or  of all the  different
articles of medicine, as the case may require.
  Persons who attempt to treat diseases, or administer
medicines, must also  be supposed to know the Import-
ance of diluting the doses with water—of  warming
their patients in the cold stage of fever, and of cooling
them in the hot stage—of the application of steam, if
necessary, in the first, and of ablutions of cold water
In the last—of the internal use of cold  or ice water—
and of the necessity of keeping the bowels regular.
  In the treatment of fevers, it should never be forgot
ten that Intermittent fever, or ague, is the likeness or
type of other fevers ; that remittent, or  bilious fevers,
differ  very little from  intermittents;  and that, conse-
quently, the treatment of the  former should vary but
little from that of the  latter.  As nearly all of those,
however, who are said to die of bilious fever, actually
die of chronic diarrhoea, or chronic dysentery, from ul-
ceration of the intestines, no time should be lost in com-
mencing the use of the remedies for chronic serosis, If
such patients do not begin to gain strength immediately
after the inflammatory symptoms have subsided ; as the
adoption of this course will save nearly every com
 which would otherwise be lost 
222
  In treating bilious, congestive, and yellow tevtt, we
should first take a pin or needle, and scratch through
the epidermis, or  scarf-skin, in lines from about one-
eighth or a quarter of an inch apart, and from three to
six Inches In  length, according to the intensity of the
disease, as seen  in the figure  page.
Emetic  tartar ointment should then be rubbed over
these lines, when an  acute  eruptive  process com-
mences instantly, and  the Irritation continues very
steadily seven or eight days,  which includes the  pe-
riods of tuberculatum and ulceration in  these  fevers.
We have pursued this course constantly, and with uni-
form  success, in  a very great number and variety of
cases of bilious and congestive fevers.  Even cases we
have found abandoned  by their physicians, in  a tym-
panitic and comatose state, have been saved by the use
of this ointment on lines thus made, and extending
nearly the whole length and breadth of the abdomen.
   This  practice Is strictly Homoeopathic and  effective,
and should always be resorted to in cases of any im-
portance, in the absence  of  the  magnetic  machine
For after-treatment, see Index of Diseases.
   This remedy is very effective, and may also be re-
sorted to In any other  acute  disease of the stomach,
abdomen,  chest, or trachea, where the  most  prompt,
acute, and steady inflammation of the skin is required
 as a counter-irritant. 
223
                RECAPITULATION

   in arranging  the remedies for acute serosis of the
 organs and limbs (page 173), the magnetic machine has
 been placed in the first rank, because it reduces acute
 pain in  disease of the serous  membranes in a more
 prompt manner than any other; and colchicum and
 aconite are placed next in order, not only because these
 medicines stand next in importance, but because  they
 should generally be used at the same time with the in-
 strument.
   The machine has also been placed in the first rank in
 the treatment of acute mucosis, and other remedies  in
 the order of their importance, which should be used at
 the same time, or follow the action of the instrument.
   In  arranging  the remedies for  chronic serosis, the
 magnetic remedies, or magnetized gold pill—compound
 chloride  of gold—have beeri  placed in the first rank,
 because they are the specific and homoeopathic remedy
 for the disease, with or without the machine, no matter
 what part of the system Is affected by It.  They, more-
 over, neutralize or destroy  tubercular or scrofulous
 taint, hereditary or acquired.
  Besides the ordinary  cases of confirmed chronic tu-
 bercula, this remedy should be used in the last stage of
 many acute diseases—as in cases of bilious and infan-
 tile fever, cholera Infantum, &c. — when  the  acute
symptoms have  subsided,  and the disease has become
chronic.  If, however, this specific remedy is not at
hand, or cannot  be obtained, the common remedies for 
224
chronic tubercula should be  prescribed, as iodine, the
iodide of potash, muriate of gold, of tin, mercury, sile-
cia,  Ate.  Little or no  dependence,  however,  can be
placed upon these common remedies, or in the common
manner of distinguishing the diseases in which they
are used, as will be seen from the following extract
from  M.  Lugol's  lectures on tuberculous diseases, or
scrofula—Paris, 1841.
  " Tubercles may exist in parenchymatous organs, may
even  partly  annihilate them, without their  existence
being revealed  by any external symptoms.*   Our want
of success in the use of the ordinary means of diagnos-
ticating tubercles, proves that those means are inade-
quate, that we  follow an erroneous course in our inves-
tigations, and that we must resort  to new  modes if we
wish to be successful.  The  numerous checks  and  re-
peated deceptions to which  physicians are  dally  ex-
posed  in  the diagnosis  and   treatment of tuberculous
diseases, do they not prove that it is necessary to leave
the beaten track of inquiry, and  pursue some other
which is less fallible 1"
  Besides, every physician of learning and experience
knows that no dependence can be placed on the old as-
trological symptoms, by which they have been taught
to distinguish tubercular disease, or on the common im-
becile remedies for it.
  • H. Lcbert, M. D., as well as M. Lugol, has recently ibown, by
microKopical observation! in pott mortem examination!, that tu-
bercular disease  pervades the organs and limbs, and every other
part of the system, as shown by the magnetic symptoms. Sea
Mallei's Archives, Nos. 2 and 3, 1844.  These confirmations, with
that of  the magnetic machine, of the correctness and importance
of the use of magnetic remedies in this class of diseases, gives our
magnetic practice a most extraordinary triumph over tjft old astro.
logical practice of the school*. 
225
  We many years since discovered with the magnetic
symptoms (by which tubercular disease is distinguished
in little children with the same certainty as in adults),
a direct connection between the posterior spinal nerves
and the  ganglionic or  sympathetic system of nerves
connected with the organs, which connection has been
constantly denied by the advocates of  the ridiculous
notion of referring tubercular disease of the organs to
" spinal disease "—" spinal irritation"—" nervous affec-
tions of the spine "—" spinal  neuralgia," fee., with all
their horribly torturing appliances.  We also traced this
connection with clairvoyants, and Volkmann and
Bidder have now traced it with the microscope ; and as
this connection is now confirmed by foreign authority,
it will be taught in  our  medical colleges, In connection
with the magnetic symptoms, as soon  as the conceited
professors of these schools can be replaced by men who
have  talents  and industry to keep pace with the im-
provements  in our profeasion.  The quackery which
these professors have practised and disseminated in their
lectures,  and the amount of suffering they have inflicted
upon their patients, while they were literally groaning
under the weight of their knowledge or " spinal dis'
base"—"spinal irritation"—" nervous affections
OF THE SPINE"—"SPINAL NEURALGIA," &C, Which it is
now seen were never favored with a  real existence, Is
absolutely appalling ; yet they have the vanity to es-
tablish rules of practice, and the barefaced effrontery to
denounce every physician who varies from them.
  In chronic tubercula, the fluids which nourish  and
support  the  solids of the system, are  changed from a
healthy to an unhealthy and unnatural state 
226
  The secretions which are conveyed  to the heail are
thicker, and the blood is at first thicker, and has always
a darker color than natural.
  The excretions from the  stomach, pancreas, liver, In-
testines, kidneys, and skin, become more or less  un-
healthy, wheu generally  constipation first,  and then
diarrhoea, sometimes supervenes.
  On commencing the use of the magnetic or magnet
lzed gold pills, the secretions become thinner, and the
color of the  blood  becomes more florid, imparting, In
from one to three weeks, a more florid and natural color
to the skin. In  from one to three weeks, the motions
of the  bowels  generally  become  regular, and in the
meantime they should  be kept so with the dally use of
small doses of medicine, or as long as they are required.
The only effects observed from the use of these pills,
are the  gradual disappearance  of the  disease, and im-
provement  In the general health.
  Tubercular disease is propagated from one  part of the
Bystem  to another, is slow in its progress, and necessa-
rily so in  Its cure; yet children under  ten  years, and
adults who are very susceptible to mesmeric or magnetic
influence, recover their health very fast under  the use
of these pills. The time required to cure any given case
depends, therefore, not only on the susceptibility to this
Influence, but upon the  stage of the disease, and the
progress it  has made.  One box of the pills, which will
last a patient from four  to five  months, is generally
sufficient for a case in the first stage of the disease, and
it is sometimes all that is required in cases in the last
stage; but these last, and especially of those who are In-
susceptible to magnetic influence, generally require two 
227
 or three boxes, and there are  a few cases that require
 four or five boxes, before the health is entirely re-estab-
 lished.
  in cases of disease of the organs in the last stage.with
great tenderness along the spine, and in cases of dis-
tortions of the spine,  backwards or forwards, and In
white swellings of the joints, a magnetic plaster is ap-
plied along the spine, and also over the white swellings.
  We have used these remedies 35 years, with a suc-
cess that justly entitles them to the character of a spe-
cific, as they have cured every case in the first stage of
the disease, including tubercular consumption, and  a
great majority of cases in the last stage.
  The specific character of these remedies is now well
known  to a great number of physicians in the Union,
many of whom  are now using them in their practice,
while  others  continue to use, by  authority, the long-
acknowledged fu.ile remedies of the schools, and con-
sequently entail upon  confiding families an enormous
amount of suffering and  bereavement.
  If a person has tubercular disease requiring these re-
medies, more or less tenderness will be felt on applying
pressure with  the thumb on the ganglions of the spinal
nerves in the  intervertebral spaces  along each side of
the spine.  Any person of common sense can determine
this fact.  It is no matter whether there are one or more
places where tenderness is found, or one or more organs
or limbs are diseased, or which organs or limbs are dis-
eased, as the curative process proceeds, under the use of
these remedies, in one  and  all of the organs and limbs
at the same time.
  The ganglions of the middle portions of the neck are 
228
connected with the muscles of the limbs and body,
and the others with the organs, &c.
  Physicians who are not well acquainted with these
magnetic  symptoms, are necessarily entirely ignorant
of the  proper remedies for them, and consequently
should never be allowed to interfere in the treatment.*
  Tubercular disease is entailed on a great many fam-
ilies by the frequent changes of temperature, and by
the abuse of mercury, the taint or seeds of which are
uniformly destroyed  by the use  of these  pills, in a
safe and satisfactory manner.
  In arranging the remedies for chronic mucosis, as
well as for chronic serosis, the magnetic machine has
been placed in the last rank, not on account of its less
importance, but for the purpose  of presenting a re-
versed order of this remedy in chronic diseases.
  Chronic Mucosis or atrophia, attacks and pervades
the mucous membranes or surfaces in every part of
the system, including the muscles ; as chronic sero-
sis or tubercula does the  serous  membranes or sur-
faces, including  the muscles, and  is always distin-
guished by chronic or slow disease, and the absence of
pain and of the magnetic  symptoms.  Such patients
are, however, sometimes  affected with aching sensa-
tions from overdoing, changes of temperature, or from
colds, from which  the disease is  often produced.  It
sometimes (although rarely,) accompanies  tubercula
in some of its stages, and is sometimes, and in these
eases,  the  sequel  of  it—the tuberculations having

  * Incipient consumption is frequently detected by these symp-
toms, even before the cough commences, when no time should b«
lost in commencing the use of these remedies. 
229
 disappeared by the action of the remedies for tuber-
 cula, while the mucous  disease has remained sta-
 tionary.
  The specific  remedies for chronic mucosis are
 Hard Bal. Copavia, Cubebs, and Ext. Hyosiamus, and
 Carb. Amonia.  They should be prepared for use ac-
 cording to the following formula.
  R. Hard Bal. Copa and  Cubebs, 3iiiss. Ext. Hyos.
 3s«. Carb. Amonia, 3ss.  Make 100 pills.
  Dose.  One pill after breakfast, and another after
 tea.
  No effect is noticed from the use of these, except a
 steady improvement in the general health.   No other
 medicine is absolutely required in this disease__no
 matter what part of the system is affected by it.  We
 may however give other medicine  temporarily to
 remove any urgent symptoms that  may appear from
 changes  of temperature—from  colds, or from  over-
 doing.
  In the  cases in which this  disease is complicated
 with  tubercula, the  remedies  for the latter disease
 should be used at the same time, and generally one
 mucous pill after breakfast, and  a  serous or magne-
 tised gold pill after tea, will be sufficient.
  When  in some rare cases tubercular disease has
 apparently disappeared or nearly so, but the patient
 does not  gain strength, but remains feeble  and lan-
 guid, there will  be some  reason to  apprehend the
 development of mucosis. and the necessity of the use
of the mucosis instead of the gold pills.  Under such
circumstances a clairvoyant should be consulted who
would give the required information ; and when the 
230
mucous pills are requirod, such patient* regain their
health with great rapidity under their use.
  We  should  observe  here that in the treatment of
this disease, as well as of tubercula, the magnetic
machine should never  bo forgotten—that in the first
stages of these diseases patients recover their hculth
much  faster than under the combined influence of
this instrument and those remedies, and that in their
last stages it is in many cases indispensable to  a suc-
cessful treatment.
  Finally, on  a critical or fair  examination of this
little work, it will be  seen that we  have simplified
the theory and practice of medicine in the most ex-
traordinary manner, and that the success of this new
or magnetic practice,  has  not only been also most
extraordinary, but as anticipated, its results—its sim-
plicity and its  power often excite the most enthusi-
astic expreosions of admiration and astonishment, 
231
  INDEX OF ABBREVIATIONS, MEDICINES,
          AND THEIR DOSES FOR ADULTS.

h cases of Oiildren, they must be reduced, more or less,
  according to age:  and diluted with, or  dissolved in,
  water.
Acid, N...Acid, Nitric............Di. Dose, 3tol0dropi
Acid, P...Acid, Phosphoric.......  "   ••  1--  5 "
Acid, S....Acid, Sulphuric........  "   ••  3--10"
Aeon.....Aconite Napellus.......  "   ••  3--10 "
Ant. P---Antimony Phosphate ...  P.  • •  3* •  6 gr.
Ant. V... .Antimony Vlvum......  "   ••  3"  6„
Arn.......Arnica.................Di. ••  3- -10 dr.
Aur......Aurum, Gold Chloride..  P.  ••  J-- i gr.
Am. C---Ammonia Carbonate....  "   ••  !•• 3 u
Am. M. ..Ammonia Muriate......"   ••  1" 5"
Asa......Assafcetida.............Gl.  ••  3--I0"
Ars.......Arsenic................  "   ••  3--10 "
Bell......Belladonna............Di.  ••  3--10dr.
Bry.......Bryonia................  •*   ••  3--10"
Can......Cannabis, Indian Hemp.  "   ••  3*-10 "
Cham.....Chamoinllla...........  "   ••  3"I0 "
Colch.....Colchicum, Sem........  "   ••  5--30"
China.....Cinchonia.............T.  ••  5"30 "
Canth.....Cantharides............Di.  ••  3" 5"
Coni. M.. .Conium Maculatum ....  "   ••  5"10 "
Cast. O...Castor Oil..............    ••  J--2oz.
Caus......Caustic Potash.........Gl.  ..  3--10 "
Ciua......Wormseed.............T.  ••  l--5dr.
Coch......Cochineal.............. "  ••  1" 5 u
Colo......Colocynth.............Di.  ••  1-- 5 u
Crot. O...CrotonOil............. "   ••  3--10 "
Cal. C.-CalcariaCarbonica.....P.  ••  3--10gr.
Carbo.V..Carbon, Vegetable......"   ••  3--10"
Car bo. A.. Carbon, Animal........  "   ••  3"10 "
Coc. I___Coculus  Indicus........Di.  ••  3--10 "
Clnna..  ..Cinnamon.............T.  ••  3--10dr.
Creos.....Creosote...............Di.  • •  1 • • 3 "
Copa.....Copaiva...............      ••  3* "10 "
Canad. B.Canada Bals. Fir.......    ••  1" 5 "
Cub......Cubebs................  T.  ••  1" 5 "
Cap.......Capsicum (Gargle)...... "  ..  3"10 "
Di........Dilution. 
232
Dr........Drops.
Epis......Epispastie (Blister)
Elat......Elaterimn..............W. Dose, 1 to 5 dr.
Gold M... Mag. Comp. Chlo. Pills..      • •   1 • • 9
CI........Globules.
Hep......Jlopar. Sulphur........P.   ••   l--5gr.
Or........Grains.
Htos......flyosciamus............Di.  ••   3-*5dr.
In,l.......Iodine.................  "   •'   5»-10 "
lod. P.....Iodide Potash..........P.   ••   l--5gr.
Ipecac. ...Ipecacuanha...........Di.  ••   3-*10dr.
Igna......Ignatia.................  "   "   3-* 5 "
IronM___Iron Muriate...........T.   ••   3--10 "
Jalap.....Jalap, Tinct............  "   ••   5--30"
Kino.....Kino, Gum.............  "   ••   5"30"
Lead.....Lead Acetate plumb .... Gl.  ••   5--10"
Lyco.....Lycopodium........-.- T.   •*   5--10 "
Lob......Lobelia Inflata.........  "   ■•   I" * "
Mag......Magnetise.
Merc. S...Mercuris Solubllis......P.   ••   l"5gr.
Mag. M... Magnetic  Machine.
Mor......Morphine..............Sol.  ..   3--10dr.
Musk.....Musk..................Gl.  ••   3"10 "
Mes......Mesmerism.
Magne....Magnesia..............      • •   5- -30 gr.
Merc. V...Mercury Vivum........      •"   3"10"
Mus......Mustard.
Nit. P.....Nitrate Potash.
Nit. S.....Nitrate Silver.
Nux......Nux Vomica............DI.  ••  1"  5 dr.
NutG....Nut Galls (Gargle)......T.  *•   5--30"
P.........Powder.
Opi.......Opium, Tincture........T.   -•   5--30"
Phos.T...Tinct. of  Phosphorus ... Di.  ••   3--10"
Puis......Pulsatilla..............  "   ••   5-10"
Qui.......Quinia, Quinine........Sol.  "   5--10"
Rhus.....Rhus.Tox.............T.  ••   3-5"
Rhel......Rhubarb..............."   ••   5--60"
See. C___SpurredRye............;<   ••   5--20"
Skrani. ...Stramonium............DI.  ••   1*«  S u
Sil.......Silicia, Silex............T.  ••   3--10"
Sang. C...Blood-Root ............"   ..   3--10 M
Bal. T.....Salts Tartar............GL  ••  »•*!<» *» 
                       233

Scil.......SciHe Squills..........T. Dose, 1 tolO dr
Sep.......Sepia..................Gl.   ••  5--10 "
Sol.......Solution.
Sul.......Sulphur..................  i--10rrr.
Sul. T---Tinct. Sulphur.........      ..  3..iodr
T........Tincture.
Tart......Emetic Tartar..........P.   ••  l--5»r
Tin......Tin.Muriate............„    ••  *••*"
Tart. O... Emetic Tartar Ointment.
Ver......Veratrum ..............Gl.   ••  3--10dr.
Zinc......Zinc, Sulphate. 
234
     MEDICINES  IN ACUTE SEROSIS.
SrMfroMi—Anile pain produced bu pressure upon tlie
           ganglions of the spinalnervn
                 DIET VERY  LOW.
 1. Aconite. Colds, fever, sore throat, hemorrhage.
 2. Antimony phosphate.   Fever, bilious.
 3. Arnica. Shocks, bruises, sprains, burns.
 4. Belladonna. Pain, spasms,  eruptive fevers.
 5. Cannabis. Pain in the urethra and bladder, dropsy.
 6. Chamomilln. Acute pains, spasms, irritation.
 7. Colchicum. Acute pain, spasms.
 8. China. Pains, intermittent, debility.
 9. Emetic Tartar. Pain in chest or stomach.
10. Hyosciamus. Wheezing cough, dizziness.
11. Mercurius Sol.  Pain, tcnesmus.dyysentery.
12. Magnetic Machine. Acute pains, spasms.
13. Morphine. Irritation, cough at night, diarrhoea,
11. Musk. Irritation, fainting, convulsions.
1.5. Nux. V. Colds in head, constipation, paralysis.
16. Opium. Pain, irritation, diarrhoea, dysentery.
17. Pulsatilla.  Pain worse at night, palpitations.
IS. Quinia—Quinine. Fever intermittent, debility.
IP. Rhus Tox.  Pain in joints or limbs, eruptions.
20. Secale Corn. Spasms, hemorrhage, parturition.
21. Stramonium. Pain, spasms, dilated pupils.
22. Colocynth.  Spasmodic and aching pains, colic.
23. Mustard-Plaster. Acute pains, spasms.
24. Epispastic-Blister. Acute  pains, spasms.
 a. Phos. Excessive excretions.
  A. The magnetic machine,  aeconite, and colchicum
are the specific remedies for acute serosis, or acute
diseases, or inflammations  of  the  serous membranes
or surfaces, including the muscles, and for acute pain
in any part of  the system, and reduces such pains
and inflammations in the most  prompt and satisfactory
manner.   There are, however, local  and concomit-
ant symptoms in many of these cases which require
their specific remedies, and which should be  given
at the same time or alternated with thorn, as  bella
donna when the throat is swollen, mercurius solube-
lis in tenesmus,  cantharides in painful micturition.
opium or morphine in excessive irritation or frequent
recurrence of pain. &c 
235
                 Acute Serosis.

Stmptoms—Acute pain produced by pressure upon the
  ganglions of the spinal nerves.  Acute diseases of the
  serous membranes, tissues, and surfaces.  Acute in-
  flammations—rapid in their progress.

                  DIET VERY LOW.

26. Brain. Mag. m. aeon, colch. hyos. bell. puis. phos.
26. Eyes. Mag. m. aeon, bell, nux. hyos. mere. s.
27. Ears. Mag. m. aeon, colch. puis. cham. bell. opi.
28. Nose. Mag. m. aeon. nux. puis. rhus. bell.
29. Teeth. Mag. m. aeon. puis. cham. colch. mus.
30. Tongue. Mag. m. aeon. bell. can. mere. s. ars.
31. Throat. Mag. m. aeon. bell. must. nut. galls.
.32. Larynx. Mag. m. aeon. tart. scil. hyos. bell. mus.
88. Lungs.  Mag. m. aeon, colch. tart. hyos.phos.
34. Heart. Mag. m. aeon, colch. puis. bell. dig. phos.
38. Pleura. Mag.  m. colch. aeon. hyos. mus.
36. Stomach. Mag.  m.  colch. tart. o. colo. aeon  nux.
37. Intestines.   Mag. m.  aeon. tart. o.  colch.  bell.
38. Caecum. Mag. m. aeon, tart  o. ant. p. gold  m.
 39. Anus.  Mag. in. mere. s. colch. sec. c.mor. gold m.
 40. Liver. Mag. m. colch. nux. puis. bell, gold m.
 41. Spleen. Mag. m. aeon, colch. puis. am. c. bell.
 42. Skin. Mag. m. bell. rhus. sul. ars.
43. Kidneys. Mag. m. aeon, colch. sec. c. can. bell.
 44. Bladder. Mag. m. colch. hyos. sec. c. cann. canth.
 45. Uterus. Mag. m. colch. opi. sec. c, mere. s. phos. 1.
 46. Vagina. Mag. m. aeon. mere. s. bell. can. goldm.
 47. Muscles. Mag. m. aeon, colch.  bell, nux.  opi.
      Jihos.
      oints.  Mag. m. colch. nux. bell, gold m. phos. t.
 49. Limbs. Mag. m. coloh. nux. bell, gold m. pho*. t.
 60 Breasts. Mag. m. colch. nux. bell, gold m. phos. t. 
236
    MEDICINES IN CHRONIC SEROSIS.

Symptoms—Tenderness more or lest severe, produced
  by pressure upon the ganglions of the spinal nerves—
  disease slow in Us progress.

                 DIET VERY FULL.

61.  Acid Nitric.  Tubercular and scaly eruptions,
        Muriatic. Fever typhus.
62.   "  Phosphoric.  Excessive excretions.
63.   "  Sulphuric. Night sweats, scaly diseases.
64.  Arsenic. Intermittents,dropsies, chorea, eruptions.
65.  Aurum Gold chloride. Pains in bones and muscles.
66.  Cannabis. Pain, retention of urine, dropsies.
67.  Cantharides. Pains in bladder and urethra.
68.  China.  Quina. Pains intermittent, debility.
69.  Conium. m. Carcinomia. cancer
60.  Cuprum. Copper. Emetic.
61.  Gold. m. Pills. Tubercula
62.  Iodine.  Tubercula.
68.  Iodide Potash. Tubercula.
64.  Magnetic Machine. Tubercula.
66.  Magnetised Rings.  Tubercula.
66.  Mesmerism.  Tubercula.
67.  8ilicia,  Silex. Tubercula.
68.  Silver,  Nitrate. Escarotic gargle.
69.  Sang. Canad., Blood Root. Tubercula of lungs.
70.  Spongia Tosta. Tubercula,
71.  Tin, Aluriate. Tubercula.
72  Bitumen-Plaster,  mag.  Tubercula.
73.  R.  Rum 2 oz., Honey oz., mix. p. 187.
74.  Sulphur, Psora, Itch.
  B. The magnetised gold pills and plaster, and the
magnetic machine, are the specific  remedies  for
chronic serosis. tubercula  or cnronic diseases of the
serous membranes or surfaces, including the muscles
They cure  every case in  the first stage of the dis-
ease no matter what part of the system  is  aflected
by it, and about ninety-five in every hundred in the
last  stage,  including tubercular consumption and
white swellings. 
                      23?


      MEDICINES IN ACUTE MTJOOSIS.
  Symptoms.—Aching sensations.  No pain produced
   by pressure on the ganglions of the spinal nerves.
   Acute disease of the mucous  membranes, tissues,
   and  surfaces.   Acute  inflammations: rapid  in
   their progress.
                 JJIET  VERY LOW.
101. Ammonia Carb. Fever, giddy head-ache, catarrh.
102. Ammonia Muriate. Fever, cough, expectoration.
103. Ammoniac Gum.  Fever, no pain.
104. Antimony Viv.  Fever, nausea, vomiting.
105. Bryonia.  Aching  pains, constipation.
106. Castor Oil.  Purgatives.
107. Caustic Gum. Catarrh, hoarseness, expectoration.
108. China.  Intermittents, debility.
109. Cina.  Fever, cough, nausea, worms.
110. Cochineal.  Spasmodic cough, expectoration,
111. Colocynth.  Aching pain, spasms, colic.
112. Croton Oil.  Cathartic, dropsies.
113. Elaterium.  Cathartic, dropsies.
114. Oum Ammoniac  (Oxyme).  Suflocatio cough,
      expectoration.
115. Jalap.  Cathartic.
116. Ipecacuanha.   Nausea, retching, diarrhoea.
117 Magnesia Calcined.   Constipation, acidity.
118. Mag. Machine.  Fevers, aching, griping, spasms.

12o! Merc. Viv.  Fever, dysentery, diarrhoea.
121. Nitrate Totash.  Aching in muscles.
122. Opium.   Diarrhoea.
123. Rheum.   Constipation, diarrhoea,
124. Scammony.  Cathartic.
12«. Salts Tartar.   Hoarseness, cough,  leucorrhoss,
      acidity.
126. Scillae, Squills.  Suffocating cough.
127. Camphor.
128. Pearl-ash.
  R. Gum Ammoniac,3j.; Cubebs, 3s».; Hot Water,
jfviii.   and when nearly cold add Muriate Ammonia,
3ss. • 'Honey or Sugar, one table spoonful.  Mix. Dose,
one table spoonful once in two, three or four hours,
according to the intensity of the disease and the urg-
ency of the symptoms.  This is the best remedy in mu-
cosis when it is affeoting any of the organs, and with
the magnetic machine cures every case. 
238
                  Acute Mucosis,

Symptoms—Aching sensations — acute.  JW pain pro-
  duced by pressure on the ganglions of the spinal nerves.
  Acute diseases of the mucous membranes, tissues, and
  surfaces.   Acute inflammations.

                 DIET VBRV LOW.

130. Brain.  Mag.m. am.  m. t. caus. nux. qui.
131. Eyes. Mag. m. caus. bry. mere. v. qui.
132. Ears. Mag. m. bry. caus. nux.
133. Nose. Mag. m. caus. nux. mere. v. ars.
134. Mouth. Mag. m. caus. ars.
135. Throat. Mag. m. am. m. caus. mere. v.
136. Larynx.  Mag. m. am. m. sal. t. coch.
137. Lungs.  Mag. m. gum am. (oxy.), am. m. caus.
138. Heart. Mag. m. nit. p. nux. bry.
130. Stomach. Mag. ra. ipecac, colo. cans. nux. qui. ars,
140. Intestines. Mng. m. colo. nux. mere. s. opi. qui. ars,
141. Anus.  Mag. m. mere. v. nux. opi. china, ars.
142. Liver. Mag. m. ant. v. caus. mere. v. qui.
143. Kidneys. Mag. m. nit. p. bry. ars.  qui.
144. Bladder. Mag. m. ant. v. ars. can.  qui.
145. Uterus. Mag. m. ipecac, sal. t. coch. qui.
146. Vagina. Mag. m. sal. t. coch.  mere. v. qui.
147. Muscles. Mag. m. nit. p. rhus. nux. qui.
148 Urethra. Mag. m. nux. cub. can. mere. s. 
239
     MEDICINES IN CHRONIC MUCOSIS.

Symptoms— Aching sensations, intermittent.  No pain
  produced by pressure on the ganglions of the spinal
  nerves.   Chronic disease of the mwoui mrmbranes,
  tissues, and surfaces.  Chroiiic injluinmutions.

                 DIET VERY FULL.

149. Assafoetida.   Fainting, dizziness, hysteria, va-
      pors.
150. Calcaria Carboniea.  Aching  sensations.
151.  Carbon, Vegetable.   Fever, debility.
152.    "   Animal.  Aching sensations, fever.
153. Coculus Ind.  Excessive excretions, dizziness.
154. Catechu.  Diarrhoea, loeoorrhoea.
155. Cinnamon.  Haimorrhago, mucorrhcea.
156. Creosote.  Haemorrhage.
157. Copaiva.   Cough, expectoration.
158. Canada Bal.  Fir.  Cough, expectoration.
169. Cubebs.  Cough, expectoration, gonorrhoea.
160.
161. Kino.  Hemorrhage.
162. Hepur. Sulphur.  Aching sensations.
163. Ignatia.  Hysteria, vapors.
164. Iron. Muriate.  Aching sensations, debility.
165. Lead, Acetate.   Haemorrhage, constipation.
166. Lycopodium.  Aching sensations.
167. Lobelia Inflata.  Nausea, constipation.
168. Mag.  Machine.   Aching sensations.
1-69. Platina. Excessive excretions.
170. Phosphorus.  Excessive excretions.
171. Sepia. Aching in muscles, debility.
172. Sulphur.   Aching sensations, eruptions.
173. Tartarum.   Constipation, dropsy.
174. Zinc, Sulphate.  Emetic.
  R. Hard Bal. Copa. and Cubebs, 3>iiss  ; Ext. Hyos,
3ss;  Carb. Amonia. 3ss;   make  100  pills.   Dose,
one pill after breakfast, and another after tea.  This
is  the  best remedy in chronic mucosis  when  it  is
affecting any of the  organs or muscles, and with the
magnetic machine cures every case in the first, and
nearly all or about 95 in every 100 in the  last stage  of
the disease 
240
                Chronic  Mucosis.

Symptoms—Aching sensations, intermittent.  Cktenie
  disease of the mucous membranes, tissues, and sur-
  faces.  Chronic inflammations.

                 DIKT VBRY FULL.

175. Brain. Cal. c. asa. coc. 1. igna. mag. m.
176. Eyes. Cal. c. hep. s. lead, a. zinc, s. mng. m.
177. Ears. Cal. c. hep. s. nux. iron, in. mag. m.
178. None. Cal. c. hep. s. nux. calc. mag. m.
179. Tongue.  Cal. c. cinna. Iron, m. mag. m.
180. Throat. Cal. c. cinna. iron, m. mag. m.
181. Larynx.  Cal. c. copa. cub. hyos. colch. mag. m.
182. Lungs. Cal. c. cop*, cub. hyos. colch.  mag. m.
163. Heart. Cal. c. coc. 1. Igna. iron, m. mag. m.
164. Btomach. Cal. c. magne.  hep.  a. iron, m. nux.
      mag. m.
185. Intestines. Cal. c. magne. cate. iron, m. mag. m.
186. Anus. Cal. c. magne. cate. Iron, m. mag. m.
187. Liver. Cal. c. magne. iron, m. colch. mag. m.
188. Kidneys. Cal. c. cub. hyos. colch. Iron, m. mag. m
180. Bladder.  Copa. cub. hyos. colch.  Iron,  m. mag. m.
190. Uterus. Copa. cub. hyos. colch. iron, m. mag. m.
101. Vagina. Copa. cub. hyos. colch. iron, m. mag. m.
102. Muscles. Nit. p. hep. s. coc. 1. asa. mag m.

                     Addenda..

103. Spigelia, Pink Root. Worms.
104. Capsicum, Red Pepper.
195. Yeast Poultice.
196. Mustard, Emetic—quick and safe.
107. Nut Galls, Gargle.
108 Emetic Tartar, Ointment. 
241
        ANATOMY AND PH1TSIOI.OGT.
  It is now more than thirty years since we
ascertained  by the magnetic symptoms, and
by post-mortem examinations, that there was
a direct connection between the  ganglions of
the spinal nerves, and the serous surfaces of
the  organs, as well  as  with  the  muscles.
These ganglions were thus found to be con-
nected with the different organs, and with the
muscles, in the order described in  diagram

   The  intermediate  ganglions are  no  doubt
connected  with  the  different   viscera, and
a physician of this city has, at our request, di-
rected his  attention to this  subject.   He has
been trying to determine these connections by
the action  of the magnetic machines, and the
result thus  far makes  the probable connec-
tions as marked with interrogation points
  * Within a very recent period this connection  has
been demonstrated by actual dissection, and tl>e Lon
don Lancet of June 24th, 1843, announced it as a new
discovery, that  " Volkman and Butler have found by
the aid of the microscope that the sympathetic nerves
in reality originate in the ganglia; but not only the
ganglia of the sympathetic cord, but those also on the
POSTERIOR   BRANCHES  OF  THE   SPLMAL
NERVES." 
of the head,of the cerebeTIrrniv
  oerebrum, membranes  or
  the brain, throat, eyes, or
  nose, fcc.
 of  the  muscles,  tubercular
  disease of the  muscles—
  rheumatism—whits swell-
  ings.
[of Pleura eostalisf
 f Lungs and Heart.

 f Stomach.

of Duodenum.

of Colon.

 f Pannreut


 f Omentum t

of Liver and Spleen.

jf Diaphragm ?

 ■f Peritoneum 1


of Small Intestine**

 f Kidneys.



of  Uterus, ovaria,  prostate
  gland, vesiculso seminalety
  and testis.

  of Vagina, &c 
                    243

  When the Doctor found tenderness on ap-
plying  pressure  over  the  gangliona, thus
marked? he placed the  positive button over the
ganglion  thus  indicated; and  then  passed
the negative  button  over the  entire surface
of the chest and abdomen, under a moderate
power of  the  instrument, by  which  sensa-
tions, more or less painful, were produced on
different parts of these surfaces, and which
 induced  him  to locate  the connections as
 above described.                      •
               Thomasville, Ga., May 1st, 1843.
Dr. H. H. Shbrwood.
  Dear Sir—Inasmuch  as I recently sent yott a sum-
mary view  of  the merits  of  Swedenborg's Animal
Kingdom, as taken from a foreign medical periodical, I
now send you, In connection therewith, an extract from
the work itself—A. K.,  vol. ii., pa^e 158—in which the
principle* of motion appertaining to the *>-">»an organi- 
                        244
nation are explicitly stated, and apparently in direct ac-
cordance with those which you are now advocating.
Should  they meet an approval, please insert them in
your Dissector, with such comments as you may deem
proper.
               Respectfully yours, &c.
                          Wm. HuNnewell, M. D.

  " It is a truth constantly presented to us as the result
of all our analytic investigations, that every action of
the cerebrum and cerebellum is determined through the
fibres; and that the fibres cannot be determined into act,
excepting by their beginnings or principles; in short, by
the organs that are prefixed to the fibres.  The lattei
must certainly be excited to motion by their principles,
and commence and describe their motions in this way,
It is absurd to suppose that any action can begin in the
middle of a fibre, and not in its first terminus.  If, then,
it begin in the first organs, it must inevitably begin in
the cortical  glands; for the fibres commence, and are
conceived and produced, in those glands, and the arte-
rial  vessels of the cerebrum  terminate also in them.
Hence, if the principles of motion exist in them, accord-
ing to all physical and philosophical  laws, as mutually
confirmed by and confirming each other, those principles
must rfecessarily commence by a kind of active, living,
or locomotive reciprocal  force, that is, by a kind of ex-
pansion and constriction, or systole and diastole, such as
we observe in a gross form in the lungs and heart; for
the same conditions are involved, whither the spirit is
to be driven through the fibres, or the blood through the
vessels.  The blood cannot be driven  through its arte-
ries without the reciprocal expansion and constriction of
the heart;  nor can the spirit be  driven through  the
fibres, which are little canals  and vessels analogous to
the arteries, only more pure, without the reciprocal ex-
pansion and constriction of the cortical glands of the
cerebrum, which on this account deserve the appella-
tion of pure corcula, or little hearts. Assuming or grant-
 ing these points, the necessary consequence is,  that
 every time the cortical and cineriterous substance of the
 cerebrum, cerebellum, medulla oblongata, and medulla
 spinalis, contracts or constringes itself, the whole mass 
245
 of those parts sinks down, and undergoes systole; but,
 on the other hand, undergoes diastole, when the same
 substance, I mean the whole congeries, expands.  This
 is the animation of the cerebrum—using the term cere-
 brum in its widest acceptation—that corresponds to the
 respiration of the lungs.  We must now proceed a step
 farther.  If the animal or nervous spirit, at the intervals
 of the constriction of these organic substances—of the
 little hearts of the cerebrum—is expressed  by the cere-
 brum through the nerves and nervous fibres, of course
 it is expressed by the cerebellum into its grand sympa-
 thetic nerves, the par vagum and the intercostals: and
 granting this, it follows that these nerves act during the
 same intervals upon the fibres of the pulmonary plexus,
 and upon the  fibres of the costal nerves; which cannot
 fail on the instant to act upon their muscles and mem-
 branes ;  nor the latter to act upon the ribs, and this
 upon the internal structure  of the lungs.  Hence, it
 follows that the  animations of the cerebrum (using the
 term  here again in its  widest sense) must necessarily
 be coincident with the respiration of the lungs : and the
 fact is still more plainly declared by the influx of the
 fibres of the  above-mentioned cerebellar  nerves, the
 par vagum, and  the  Intercostal, into all the viscera of
 the abdomen ;  and by the motion of those viscera agree-
 ing exactly, and  keeping perfect time, with the respira-
 tory motions of  the  lungs, as proved in detail in our
 Analysis."—Animal Kingdom, vol. ii.,  pp. 158-9.

  Each convolution of the brain or phrenological organ
 is divided into two equal halves, by a very thin nuri-
 lema, on the opposite sides of which the  different, or
 diverging and converging, fibres are attached. Sweden-
 borg. a hundred  years ago, called  the  convolutions of
the brain, organs, cortical glands, and corcula, or little
hearts.  He was also  familiar with the fact,  that motion
Is produced by the action of two forces.  Wonder how
many hundred years it will require to beat this know-
ledge  into the  heads of the professors  of our medical
colleges!—Edit.  Dis, 
                COROLLARIES.
  1.  " During health, the system is • aimated by a sm
ritual, self mooed, vi.al power which |  feserves it in har
monious order."
  2.  " It is only by means of the sj .ritual influence ol
the morbific agent, that our spiritual vital power, can
be diseased, and in like manner, only by  the spiritual
(dynamic) operation  of medicine that health can be
restored."
  3.  " The homoeopathic healing art developes for its
purpose the immaterial (dynamic) virtues of  medi-
cinal substances, and to a degree previously unheard
of, by means of a peculiar and hitherto untried pro-
cess.  By this process it is that they become penetra-
ting, operative, and remedial, even those that, in a natu-
ral or crude stale, betrayed not the least medicinal  power
upon the human system."—            Hahnemann.
  It was  the  magnetizing process by which Hahne-
mann increased the power  of  his medicines, and the
same as that directed and practiced by Clairvoyants in
the mesmeric state. 
"247
 Hahnemann's Directions for Magnetising Medicines.

  " If two drops of a mixture of equal parts of alcohol
and the recent juicf of any medicinal  plant be diluted
with ninety-eight drops of alcohol in a vial containing
one hundred and thirty drops, and the whole twice shaken
together, the medicine becomes exalted in energy to the
first development of power,  or, as  it may be  denomi-
nated, the first potence. The process is to be continued
through twenty-nine additional vials, each of equal ca-
pacity with the  first, and each containing ninety-nine
drops of spirits of wine; so that every successive vial
after the first, being furnished with one drop from the
vial of dilution immediately preceding (which had just
been twice shaken), is, in its turn to be shaken twice, re-
membering to  number the dilution of each vial upon the
cork as the operation proceeds.  The manipulations are
to be conducted tlras  through nil  the vials, from the
first  up to the thirtieth or decillionth  development of
power, which is the one in most general use.
  " All other medicinal substances, excepting sulphur,
which, of later years,  has  beer employed  only in the
highly diluted tincture (.X), such, for ex-ample, as the
metals, either pure, or oxydized, or  in the forci of sul-
phurets,  and  other minerals, petroleum,  phosphorus,
the parts or juices of  plants, obtainable only In  tbeir
dry or  inspisated  state, animal substances, neutral
salts. &c.,—one and all were, in the first place, exalted
In energy by attenuation in the form of a powder, by
means of three hours trituration in a inortpr, to the mil-
lionth degree.  Of this one grain was then dissolved
and brought through twenty-seven vials,  by a process
similar to that employed  in the case of the vegetable
juices, up to  the  thirtieth development of power."—
Crg-anon, p. 200.
  Whan 1 -make use of the word intimately, I ""can to
say,  that by  shaking a drop of liquid medicine  with
ninety nine drops of alcohJl once—that  is to say, by
taking the vial in the hand which contains the whole,
and Imparting to it a rapid motion, by a single powerful 
248
 stroke of the arm descending,* I shall  then obtain an
 exact mixture of them; but that two, three, or ten such
 movements would render the mixture much closer—
 that is to say, they would develope the medicinal vir-
 tues still further, making them, as it were, more potent,
 and their action on the nerves  much more penetrating.
 In  proceeding,  therefore, to the dilution of medicinal
 substances, it is wrong to give the twenty or thirty suc-
 cessive attenuating glasses more than two shakes, where
 it is mprely intended to develope the power of the me-
 dicine  in a moderate degree.  It would also be well  in
 the attenuation of powders, not to rub them down too
 much  in the mortar; thus, for  example, when it is
 requisite to mix one grain of a medicinal substance  in
 its entire state with ninety-nine grains of sugar of milk,
 it ought  to be rubbed down with force  during one hour
 only, and the same space of time should not be exceed-
 ed  in  the  subsequent triturations,  in  order  that the
 power  of the medicine may not be carried to too great
 an extent."—Organon, p. 207.
  " The smallest homoepathic dose,  when properly ap-
 plied, effects wonders.  It not unfrequently occurs, that
 patients are overwhelmed, by incompetent homoBpath-
ists, with a rapid succession of remedies, which, though
 well selected and of the highest potence, yet produce
such a state of excessive irritability,  that the life of the
patient is placed in jeopardy, and another dose, how-
ever mild, may prove fatal.  Under such circumstances,
the hand of the mesmeriser gently sliding down, and fre-
quently touching the part affected, produces an uniform
distribution of the vital power through the system, and
rest, sleep and health are restored."—Organon, p. 211.
  Latterly,  Hahnemann, and  homospathists  generally,
have used much larger quantities of medicine in  their
first attenuations, as will be seen from the following
extract from Jahr's Pharmacopoeia.

  "Or the Preparation of  the  Attenuations.
  " We have already said, on many  occasions, that the
  • We  see clairvoyants iu the somni>cicnt«Utc, magnetize watci
 ey the passe* descending. 
249
 homoepathic attenuations are obtained, in general, in
 such a way, that the first contains one grain (5 centi-
 grammes), or one drop of the medicine to attenuate,
 mingled with 100 grains (5 grammes) of sugar of milk,
 or 100 drops of alcohol; and that after sufficient tritu
 rations and  successions, the second is obtained in ma-
 nipulating, in the same manner, the 100th part of the
 1st with 100 new parts of vehicle ; the 3d, in submit
 ting  to the same process the 100th  part of the second ;
 and  so on to the 20th.   This way of making the atte.
 nuations, in the  proportion of 1 to  100, is that of Hah
 nemann, and which is always understood, when we
 indicate an attenuation by its number.  Latterly, how
 ever, it has  been found more suitable to make the mix-
 tures only in the proportion of 10 to 100, so that instead
 of mingling but one grain or one drop with 100 parts of
 vehicle, we mingle each time 10.  This process has the
 advantage of giving more certitude, that in each prepa
 ration the molecules of the medicine are well mingled
 with those of the vehicle, though,  on the other hand,
it permits less extension.  But as we can easily repair
 this inconvenience, in preparing each time two attenu-
ations, in  the proportion of 10 to  100, instead of 1 to
 100, we recommend this process to  all the homoepathic
 physicians and pharmaceutists; in cautioning,  how
ever, these last, that every time that they shall make
use of any other proportion than that of 1 to 100, they
shall take care to indicate it on the label of the  prepa-
rations, in order that we may know in what proportion
 the number, which each attenuation bears, is made.
  " The attenuations obtained in the proportion of 10
 to 100, are much more sure than those of 1 to 100."

  Jahr also  directs  the attenuations to be strongly
 shaken from 100 to 200 times, instead of twice, as for-
 merly practised  by Hahnemann.—See page 90 to 94,
 also page 126. 
250
   Synopsis of the Homoeopathic Practice of
                    Medicine.

*** The figures refer to the medicines for each case in tke
     corresponding numbers, from page 239 to 246.

Abortion, Premature birth................6,116, 20,15
Abscess In the Chest.........
    "  In the Breast........
    "  In the Brain.........
    "  in Joints.............
    "  in Kidney.............^61,64,68,62,150,11
    "  Lumbar.............
    "  of Prostate..........
    "  Psoas................
    "  Labia Pudenda........._
Achor, A small pustule, ending in a scab..........53
Acne, Pimples on the face.........61, 54, 64, 62, 63, 67
Alopecia, Loss of hair, baldness.......150,170, 172,64
After Pains, after confinement............3, 6,17, 4, 15
Amaurosis, Paralysis of optic nerve..............  64
Amenorrhoen, Chlorosis..........................  94
Angina Maligna, Putrid sore throat......101, 51, 58,194
Anasarca, Dropsy of cellular tissue..........54, 112, 4
Aneurism, Varix...............................67, 17
Angina Pectoris, Disturbances of the heart.. 1, 116, 149
Aphonia, Loss of voice..........................  81
Apthte, Thrush, sprue, white ulcers in the mouth..  54
Apoplexy, Sudden cessation of sense and voluntary
    motion......................................  25
Anus, Pain in the................................172
Ascarides, Small worms.............1, 150, 108, *15 11
Ascitis, Dropsy in abdomen......112, 168 111, 113, J15
Asphyxia, Suspended animation..................188
Asthma,  Difficult breathing, peri Jical  .........".".188
Atrophia, Wasting of the flesh, marasmus......168 67
Back-ache.............................54, 105, 19.'23
Biliouc.Fever............................25,36,37,38
Black Vomu....................................
Black Jaundice............................"."."!
Bladder, Inflammation of...................I!*""  44 
                        251

 Bleeding from Nose.............................1,3
    "    from Lungs.........................1,165,3
    "    from Stomach....................20, 1, 54,3
    "    from Bowels............................  30
    "    from Hemorrhoides......................  30
Blood, Morbid..................................61,64
Blue-skin Disease....................61, 64, 71,19, 62
Boil..........................................3,4,15
Rones, Caries of the.............................  99
Brain Fever......................................  25
  "   Inflammation of............................  25
Bronchitis, Acute................................137
     "     Chronic..............................182
Breast, Spasms of the........................7,11,  12
Bruises.........................................3,  12
Bronchocele................................61, 64,70
Bubo, Syphilitic......................61,62, 11,67,71
Burns, Hot applications...........................
Calculous Diathesis..............................  93
Cancer of the Brain...................~)
   "   of the Lip.....................
   "   oftheNose...................!„. gg „   .
   "   of the Breasts.................f8*' 08' 91> *
   "   of the Uterus..................I
   "   oftheAnus...................J
Carbuncle, Gangrenous serosis..............195,12, 8
Carbuncled Face...............................19, 54
Cardialgia, Heart-burn.....................116, 15,17
Carditis, Serosis of the heart  ....................  34
Caries, Ulceration of bones..............61, 62, 64, 67
Catamenia, Suppressed...................1,17, 15, 21
    "      Irregular.............................  94
    "      Excessive..............94, 161,53, 150,20
    "      Deficient.............................  94
Catalepsy, Sudden  fit, apoplectic........61, 64, 66, 75
Cataract,  Opacity oi crystalline ;ens .....64, 172, 17, 5
Catarrh,  Cold in the head................15, 17.6, 116
Chest, Abscess of the.....................71,67, 11, 4
Chicken Pox.............................1, 104,11, 4
Chilblains, Cold applications.........12,15,4,3,6,172
Children's Sore Mouth.................53,4,54,11,15
Chlorosis, Retention of menses..................••  94 
252
Cholera Morbus Vomito......125,16,12,107,16,11,20
   •"   Infantum. (See page 86). .104,54,4, 61, 58, 20,66
    "   Asiatics..................127,12, 54, 11,16,20
    "   Dysenteries......................11, 12, 16, 20
Chorea, St. Vitus's Dance........................ 75
Colds...................................1,15,12,17
Colic, Flatulenta...................22, 11,54, 15,4, 17
  "   Menstrualis..........................17,20,22
  "   Saturnina, Painters'...................15, 16, 22
Coma, Lethargy, stupor  ......................168, 16
Congestion, Cerebral............................. 25
Constipation........165, 103, 106, 123, 115, 111, 112, 113
Consumption, Tubercular......................... 82
Contusions.....................................3, 12
Convulsions..............................14, 12, 7, 4
      "     Infantile......................1, 4, 23,12
      "     Puerperal..............7,12, 11, 112, 115
Cornea, Spots on the.........................64, 150
Coryza, Catarrh  ................................ 28
Croup, Serosis of trachea...........9, 126, 198, 70.162
Coxalgia,  Pain in hip joint.....................48, 98
Cramp in the Stomach................107, 15, 125, 127
Crusta Lactea, Scald head.....................61, 54
   "   Serpiginosa, Ringworm..............54, 64,19
Cutaneous Eruptions.....................4,19, 54, 64
Cyanosis, Blue Disease...............61, 64, 71, 19, 62
Cystitis, Serosis of bladder........................ 44
Day-sight....................................4,10,21
Deafness.....................................77, 177
Delirium, from Fever.............................25
    "   Tremens, from rum.................15,16, 8
Dentition, Difficult...........................1, 6, 150
Diabetes,  Excessive urinary excretion ---4, 120, 52, 64
Diarrhoea, Excessive looseness of bowels.53,54,11,4,16,8
    "    Serosa...............................37, 86
    "    Mucosa............................140, 185
Dizziness, Vertigo............................10, 149
Double Vision..................................'.  4
Dropsical  Diathesis...................54, 64, 11,17, 7
Dropsy, Serous effusion.......................112 61
Dysentery, Frequent mucous or bloody stools, with'
    tenesmus .......................11,12,1,54,58 
                       253

Dysmenorrhea, Painful menstruation  ............45
Dyspepsia, Tubercula of stomach..................85
Dysuria, Painful urination................44, 149, 101
Ear, Inflammation of ............................ 27
  "  Discharge from the..........................73
Ear-ache.........................................27
Ecchymosis, Extravasation of blood under the skin, 15,64
Emaciation, Marasmus.........................8,168
Emphysema, Air effused in the cellular tissue......168
Encephalitis, Phrenitis............................25
Encysted Tumors, Bursa mucosa..............12, 107
Enteritis, Serosis of intestines..................37, 24
Epidemic Catarrh................3,4, 116, 11, 15,7,12
Epilepsy, Epileptic fits........................... 75
Epistaxis. Bleeding of nose.......................  1
Erections, Painful.........•..................... 17
Ergotismus, Disease from the use of ergot......8, 4, 12
Eruption of Vesicles........................19, 4, 64
Erysipelas, St. Anthony's fire...........1, 4, 12, 19, 54
Eyes, Inflammation of........................... 26
  "   Chronic Inflammation of................... 76
  "   of Infants ecchymosed....................6,19
Eye-balls and Lids, Inflammation of.............. 26
Eye-lids, Eversion of the.................162, 11,168
    "     Spasms of the.........................6, 64
    "     Palsyof the............................ 64
    "     falling down.......................6,21,64
Fainting Fits ............................149, 101, 14
Fever, Catarrhal..................................28
   "   Bilious..............................38,18,54
   "   Yellow............................A.,54, 12, 18
   "   Inflammatory............................. 47
   "   Intermittent.....................1,2,54, 18, 12
   "   Miliary...................................116
   "   Infantile ...................107,116,4,111,37
   "   Puerperal................................. 45
   "   Putrid............................54,64,15,58
   ''   Rheumatic................................ 47
   "   Typhus.................................. 86
Fistulous Ulcers.........................61,67,71, 54
Fistula,  Lachrymalis...........................61, 63
   "     Urinaria..............................61,63 
                       254

Fistula in Ano................................61,63
Flatulency............................107, 125,15,16
Fluor Albus,  Whites.....................95,110. 125
FungusH«ematodes,Tuberculaof cellular tissue,7,12,54,59
Furor Uterinus, Nymphomania.................17,12
Gangrene, Mortification...............54, 58, 64, 16, 67
Gastralgia, Pain in the stomach...................36
Gastric Fever,  Serosis of stomach................36
Gastritis, Serosis of stomach...................... 36
Glands, Inflammation of.......................11, 13
       Induration of................70, 65,64, 66, 67
Gleet, Chronic gonorrhoea.........................93
Glossitis,  Serosis of  tongue....................11,12
Goitre, Bronchocele........................70, 64, 150
Gonorrhoea,  Clap..........................159, 12,56
Gout, acute, Serosis of small joints................98
  "   chronic............................170,  64, 67,7
Grippe, Influenza................................ 38
Green Sickness, Chlorosis........................94
Hsematemesis, Vomiting blood.....:..............20
Heematuria,  Hemorrhage from  bladder---57, 64, 17, 15
Hemoptysis,  Hemorrhage from lungs.........20, 1, 65
Heemorrhage, or bleeding from the nose........1, 4,19
      "              "          lungs......20,1,165
      "              "          throat.........1,80
      "              "          stomach........ 20
      "              "          bladder......... 20
      "              "          uterus.......... 20
      "              "          anus........20,165
Head-ache......................7, 12, 25, 75,130, 175
Heart, Inflammation  of the.....................34, 83
Heart-burn................................107,125,15
Hectic Fever.....................61, 64, 62, 63, 65, 66
Hemiplegia, Paralysis of one side.............12, 15, 7
Hepatitis, Serosis of  the liver.................... 40
Hernia, Rupture..............................15, 153
Herpes, Tubercular eruptions........59,  64, 53, 19, 173
Hiccough................................4, 15, 12,17
Hip-joint, Disease of,  Serosis of.................... 48
Hoarseness............................31, 80,138,180
Hooping-cough..............................110, 125
Hydrocele...............................17,64,15,54 
                        255

Hydrocephalus, ac ute,  Dropsy of brain............ SS
      "       chronic........................54, 64
Hydrophobia..........................12, 57, 4,21, 10
Hydrops, Ovaria.............................54, 64, 7
Hydrothorax, Dropsy of the chest..............34, 83
Hypochondria, Vapors, low spirits................ 64
Hysteria, Hysterics ....................12,4,7,17,15
Icterns, Jaundice................4,12, 15, 11, 17, 6, 54
Ileus, Colic in small intestines...............4,  116,16
Impotence, Generative debility........12, 51, 52, 66, 14
Incontinence of urine,  Inability to retain it......12, 44
Induration of the breasts..............7, 12,  61, 62, 66
           of the testicles..............7, 12,61,62,67
     "     of the uterus...............7,12, 61, 62, 66
Indigestion..................107, 125,128, 15,71,4,67
Infantile Fever ....................107, 116, 4,  111, 37
Inflammations, Acute serosis, p....................163
      "       Chronic serosis....................165
      "       Acute mucosis....................167
      "       Chronic mucosis..................169
Influenza,  Epidemic catarrh...................... 28
Iritis arthritica, Seros of the iris.................. 26
Irritation......................................16, 13
Ischuria, renalls,  Difficult micturition............. 44
Itch.........................................74, 172
Jaundice...................117, 123,  106, 168,142,187
Labor pains, Deficient.........................116,20
Laringitis,  Serosis of larynx....................32, 34
Laringical  Phthisis............................... 81
Lead Colic..................................15,12,16
Lepra, Leprosy................................61, 64
Leucoma,  Opacity, Cornea........................64
Leucorrhoea, Whites  ..........................46,95
Locchorrhosa, Excessive  lochia.................7,15, 8
Lochia, Suppressed.............................. 17
Locked-Jaw...............................7,13, 15, 4
Lumbago,  Lumbar rheumatism................... 47
Lumbrici, Large round worms..............1,109,15
Lupia, A wen................................... 13
Lupus, Tubercula of the nose.................... 78
Mania a  potu. Rum Fever...................4,15,15
Marasmus, Atrophy, Emaciation.........150,151, 152 
258
 Measles, Eruptive Fever...................1, 4, 17,15
 Menorrhagia, Excessive menstruation___94, 20, 161, 66
 Menstrual Colic.............................17, 20,12
 Milk, Absence of..............................14, 149
   "  Excessive..............................170, 17
 Milk-leg.........................1, 19, 15,4,54, 17, 12
 Miscarriage, Symptoms of.................6, 16, 20, 157
 Monomania.  ...........................1, 3, 54, 4, 64
 Mumps.................................4, 125, 19, 11
 Nssvus Maternus, Mother's mark.......172, 170, 150
'Necrosis, Dead bone, Caries...................... 98
 Nervous Fever, Chronic serosis................... 86
 Nettle Rash.....................................  4
 Neuralgia, Serosis of the nerves................... 47
 Night Blindness.............................4, 10, 21
   "  Cough..................................4, 10,17
   "  Sweats...............................53, 58,52
 Nodes Venereal,  Knobs of the boaes......61,62, 63, 71
 Nymphomania, Labia furor.....................17,12
 Odontalgia, Tooth-ache....................12, 51, 1,4
 CEdema, Tumefaction.................12, 17, 19, 8, 54
 Opacity of the Cornea............................ 64
 Ophthalmia, Acute...........................26, 131
       "     Chronic..........................76, 176
 Orchitis, Serosis of Testicle..........1)12,7, 15, 11, 17
     "    Erysipelatous ......................4, 12,19
 Otalgia, Ear-ache.........................17, 12, 4, 6
 Otorrhoea, Ulcerated Ears...........R. 73, page
 Ozoena, Chronic serosis of the Nose............... 78
 Ovaria, Female ovum testes....................45, 94
 Pains of Pregnancy...........................105, 17
   "  Gouty....................................]9, p
   "  Rheumatic......................7, 12, 15, 19, 61
   "  Face............................7, 12, 15, 16,61
   "  Spermatic  Cord.....................61, 12,7,11
   "  during Labor, too weak...................... 17
   "  after Labor...........................15, 3, 4, 6
   "  in the Spleen.............................. 41
   "  in the Anus..............................11, 52
   "  in the Feet..........................17,105, 12
 Painter's Colic.................................15,16
 Palpitations in Muscles.......................7,12,17 
257
Palpitations of the Heart...............17,7,12,61
Palsy, Paralysis..................15, 64,3, 66, 19, 105
Paralysis of one side of the Face.............12, 7, 15
    "    of the Tongue .....................12, 7, 15
    "    of one side of the Body..........12, 7, 15, 61
Parotitis, Serosis of parotid gland........4, 125, 19, 120
    "    Chronic........................61, 64, 62, 66
Pneumonia Typhoides, Acute mucosis ........137, 82
      "    Notha, Acute  bronchitis...............137
Peritonitis, Serosis of peritoneum........1,12, 7, 15, 5
    "      Puerperalis, Puerperal  fever..........■. 45
Piles...............................51.6, 15, 151,172
Phymosis, Contraction of  prepuce, anterior....5, 15, 12
Paraphymosis, Contraction of prepuce, posterior.5,15,12
Plithi-i- Tuberculosa, Con-uinptioii.............. 82
1'leuri.iy, Serosis of pleun cost.Us................ 35
Plica Polonica, Tuberculated hair............53, 64, 54
Polypus of the Ear.......................150,168. 170
    "   of the Nose....................150,168.170
    "   of the Bladder  ..................150,168,170
    "   of the Uterus....................15o, lo8, 170
Prolapsus Ani, Falling of  anu<......163, 15, 11, 12, 167
          Uteri, Falling of uterus......4, 15, 20, 12, 55
Prostatitis, Serosis of prostate gland..........17, 12, 7
Pseudo Syphilis, Chronic  tubercula.....61, 162, 168,51
Puer|>eral Fever, Child-bed fevtr.................. 45
Putrid Fever,  Putrid tuberculosa  ........61,194,8,54
Rachitis, Rickets..................4, 61, 62, 54 64, 66
Restlessness at night......................54,64, 149
Retained Placenta................................ 20
Reiensio Mensium, Chlorosis..................... 94
Retention of Urine..............................5, 12
Rheumatic Fever................................ 47
Rheumatism, Acute.............................. 47
      "      Chronic............................ 97
Ring-worm..............................54, 19, 12,53
Ruptures..............................15, 153, 55, 53
         Strangulated.....................1,4, li, 16
Salivation.....................................(K, 51
Sarcascle, Fleshy tumor of testicle..........17, 15,12
Scald Head.............................54,53, 19,64
Scabby Tetter..............................59,64,53 
25S
Scaly Tetter....................................S3.54
Scalds, Hot applications...........Y-oVsi" Ya'il <u
Scabies, Itch.......................1<2, 151, 19, 54, 64
Scarlet Fever......................4'*• U'16?*,i7',  1
Scarlet Miliaria..............................11B> l<*
Sciatica,  Serosis of sciatic nerve.......V/We"«-i" c«
Schirrus, Hard, cancerous..........59, 54, T, 15, b4, too
Scrofula, Tubercula........61, 62, 63, 64,  65, 6b, 67, 69
Schrophula Mesenterica, of mesentery.61, 62, 63, 65, b7
Scurvy, Scorbutus......................51, 52, 53, 58
Scrotum, Gangrene of........................54.16, «
    "    Herpes of............................54, ***
    "    Dropsy of............................17, 64
Shingles, Eruption around the middle........11, 17, 19
Sight, Feebleness of.............................. 76
Small Pox................................1.4, 11,74
Smell, Loss of................................." 150
Sore Mouth of Children...............53, 54, 4, M, 15
  "  Nipples................................3, 74, 15
Spasms of  the Eye-lids.......................5, 10, 12
Spasms......................................5, 10,12
Spine, Distortion of...................61,64, 62, 67, 66
   "   Lateral curvature.......................... 12
Spontaneous luxation............................. 99
Spurred Rye, disease............................. 48
Spots on the  Cornea...........................64, 76
Squinting......................................61, 64
St. Vitus' Dance, Chorea........................ 75
St. Anthony's Fire, Erysipelas................4, 12, 19
Stomach, Cancer of.............................. 85
         Cramps of..............15, 4, 7, 11, 12, 16, 20
    "   Softening of.............................  54
    "   Schirrus in.............................  85
Strangury, Painful urination.................7, 12,15
Strictura Ani, Contraction of anus..............15, 12
Summer Complaint...............................
Suppression of the Menses........................94
Suspended Animation............................  12
Stye.............................................  17
Sycosis,  Tubercula of  scalp and face. .51,11,172, 53, 64
Syncope, Fainting............................101,14
Syphilis, Venereal disease..................12,11, 61 
259
* Tabes Mesenterica, Tubercula of intestines........ 86
 Teething, Difficult...........................150, 117
 Testicles, Induration of........................... 61
     "'     Swelling of..........................17, 12
     "     Inflammation of................7, 12, 15, 11
 Tetanus, Lock-jaw.................12, 1, 4, 17, 21, 26
 Tetter, Tubercular pustule.................59, 64, 172
 Throat, Inflammation of................1, 12, 4, 11, 17
    "    Chronic................................. 80
    "    Spasms of..............................4, 12
 Threatened Abortion...................6, 20, 15, 4, 17
 Tic Douloureux, Rheumatism of face......12, 7, 15, 11
 Tinea Capitis, Scald head............61, 63, 64, 67, 68
 Tongue, Inflammation of.....................7, 12, 15
     "   Paralysis of...........................12,15
 Tonsils, Inflammation of................1, 12, 7, 15, 11
 Tonsilitis, Serosis of tonsils.............1, 12, 7. 15, II
 Tooth-ache...............................12, 7, 4, 17
 Torpidity of the Limbs.....................15, 12, 17
 Tracheitis, Serosis of trachea............1,  12, 7, 15, 4
 Tumor, Encysted Bursa........................12, 15
 Tympanitis, Serosis of the ear.................... 27
 Typhus Fever, Tuberculosus..................... 86
 Ulcer of the Cornea............................. 76
       "     Tongue.............................. 79
       "     Leg ................................ 99
 Ulcer Varicose..............................64, 61, 63
   "   Phagadenic...........*.........;.......... 99
   "   Fungous................................... 99
   "   Fistulous.................................. 99
 Urine, Retention Of...........;.................5, 12
 Urinary Fistula......................61, 62, 71, 67, 64
 Urethritis, Serosis of Urethra ............7, 12,1, 15, 4
 Uterine Haemorrhage..........................20, 1, 4
 Uterus Cancer.................................... 94
 Uvula (Palate),  Inflammation of..............1, 12, 4
 Varicella, Chicken-pox  ......................1, 11, 17
 Variola;,  Small-pox ......................1,4,12). ,72
 Venereal Disease........................11, 12, 55, 61
 Vertigo, Dizziness  .....................10,149,101,14
 Vesicular Erysipelas .........................1,12,19
 Vision, Feeble.................................4,17 
260
Vision, Far-sighted ............................10,13
Vomica, Abscess.................................
    "   of the lungs..........................54, 172
Voice, Loss of................................... 81
Vomiting of Blood................................ 20
Vomiting, Chronic....................54,64, 15,17,85
    "     in Pregnancy................116,117, 54, 15
Warts.......................................... 107
White Swellings ..............................98,72
Whites........................................46,95
Whitlow  ............................171, 12,  19,4, 11
Womb, Cancer of ....(See page 148).............. 94
Worm Fever........................1,109, 15, 17, 129
Worms.............................1,129,109, 15, 17
Wounds........................................3,12
Wry-neck.....................................15, 12
Yellow Fever ..............................55, 12, 18
Zona, Shingles...........................19,  17, 11, 4


 The Magnetic Machine in intermittent Fevers.
  We have already described the prompt  and efficient
action of this machine in subduing the  most violent
paroxysms of fever, but were not, at that time, aware
of its equal efficiency in the cold stage of intermittent
fevers.  We Can now, on the authority of a number of
physicians, as well as private individuals, confidently
recommend its use in this case, as the cold chills are
mitigated immediately, and  cease altogether, in a few
minutes after the commencement of the action of the
magnetic  machine. We are,  moreover, assured  that the
chills, and consequently the fever, very rarely return,
this circumstance^ therefore, is well worthy of the at-
tention of physicians in  the  Western  and Southern
 States, and indeed wherever this disease is prevalent. 
The Muscles of Animal and  of Organic Life, and
     their Connection with the Spinal Nerves.

  The posterior cervical nerves are connected every-
where with the positive or outer surfaces of the mus-
cles, and membranes of animal life, or those of the
body and limbs ; while the anterior cervical nerves
are connected with the inner or negative surfaces of
these muscles and membranes, and as they are more
frequently and more  extensively diseased than any
other part of the system from obvious causes, as is
well known to  clairvoyants, a knowledge of these
facts and of these muscles and membranes, is obviously
a matter of great importance both to the physician
and his patients.
  The sub-occipital posterior dorsal, lumbar and se-
cral nerves are connected with the positive, serous or
outer surfaces of the muscles and  membranes oior-
 fanic life, or those of the diflerent organs, as the
 rain, lungs, stomach, and uterus, &c.; while the an-
terior dorsal, lumbar, and sacral nerves are connected
with the negative, mucous or inner surfaces of these
muscles and membranes.
  In magnetising, therefore, the muscles  and mem-
branes of animal life, we may do so by placing one
button over the cervical nerves, and the other in the
hollow of one foot, in the palm  of one hand, or on the
point of pain or of disease ; but in magnetizing the
muscles and membranes of organic life or of the or-
gans, one button must be placed over the ganglion of
the posterior spinal nerve connected with the dis-
eased organ;  while the other is placed  or moved
over the pole or poles of the said organ.
  Any other manner of magnetizing must necessarily
be empirical, futile and very uncertain in its effects ;
and the importance of this subject has induced us to
describe these connections of the nerves with the
muscles, and also to give a full description of the
muscles of animal and of organic  life ; besides the
connexions and extent of these surfaces account for
the extraordinary effects often produced by the mag-
netic machine, or magnepathy  and hydropathy. 
262
                On the Muscles.

  Muscles are the moving organs of the animal frame ;
they constitute by their size and  number the  great
bulk of the  body, upon which they bestow form and
symmetry.  In  the  limbs  they are situated  around
the bones, which they invest and defend, while they
form to some of the  joints a principal protection.  In
the trunk they are spread out to enclose cavities, and
constitute a defensive wall capable  of yielding  to
internal pressure, and again returning to its original
position.
  Their color presents the deep red which is cha-
racteristic of flesh, and their form is variously  modi-
fied, to execute the varied range of movements which
they are required to effect.
  Muscle is composed of a number of parallel  fibres
 laced side by side, and supported and held together
 y a delicate web of areolar tissue ; so that, if it were
possible to remove the muscular substance, we should
have remaining a beautiful reticular framework, pos-
sessing the exact form and  size of the muscle without
its color and solidity.  Towards the extremity of the
organ the  muscular fibre  ceases, and  the  areolar
structure becomes aggregated  and modified, so as  to
constitute those  glistening  fibres   and cords  by
which the muscle is tied to the surface of bone, and
which are called tendons.  Almost every muscle in
the body is connected with bone, either by tendinous
fibres, or by an aggregation of those fibres constitut-
ing a tendon ;  and the union is so firm, that, under
extreme violence, the bone itself rather breaks than
permits of the separation of the tendon from its attach-
ment.  In the broad muscles the tendon is spread so
as to form an expansion,  called aponeurosis (d^j
longe ;  Vevpov,* nervus—a nerve   widely  spread
out).
  Muscles present various  modifications in  the  ar-

  * The ancients named all the white  fibres of the
body vtvpa; the term has since been limited to the
nerves. 
263
rangement of their fibres in relation to their tendinous
structure.  Sometimes they are completely longitu-
dinal, and terminate at each extremity in tendon, the
entire muscle being fusiform in its shape ;  in other
situations they are disposed like the rays of a fan, con-
verging to a tendinous point, as the temporal, pecto-
ral, glutei. &c ,  and  constitute a radiate  muscle.
Again, they  are j/enniform.  converging like  the
plumes of a pen to one side of a tendon, which  runs
the whole length of the muscle as in the peronei;  or
bipenniform. converging to both sides of the tendon.
In other  muscles the  fibres pass obliquely from the
surface  of a tendinous expansion spread out on one
side, to that of another extended on the opposite  side,
as in the semi-membranosus ; or, they are composed
ot penniform or bipenniform fasciculi as  in  the del-
toid, and  constitute a compound muscle.
  The nomenclature of the muscles  is defective and
confused, and is generally derived  from  some promi-
nent character which  each muscle  presents ; thus,
some are named from their situation, as  the tibialis,
peroneus ; others from their uses, as the  flexors, ex-
tensors,  adductors, abductors, levators,  tensors, &c.
Some again from their form, as the trepezius, triangu-
laris, deltoid, &c.  ; and others from their direction, as
the rectus, obliquus, transversalis, &c.  Certain mus-
cles have received names expressive of their attach-
ments, as the  sterno-mastoid, sterno-hyoid, &c.; and
others, of their divisions, as the biceps, triceps, digas-
tricus, complexus, &c.
  In the  description of a muscle we express its attach-
ment by  the  words ';origin '' and "insertion;" the
term origin is  generally applied to the more fixed or
central attachment, or to the point towards which the
motion is directed, while insertion is assigned to the
more movable point, or to that most distant from the
centre ; but there are many exceptions to this prin-
ciple, and as many muscles'pull equally by  both ex-
tremities, the use of such terms must be regarded as
purely arbitrary.
  In structure, muscle is  composed of bundles of
fibres of  variable  size called fasciculi, which are en-
closed in  a   cellular membranous investment  or 
                      264

sheath, and the latter is continuous with  tb° cellular
framework of the fibres.  E&chfusciculus is composed
of a number of smaller bundles, and these of single
fibres, which, from their minute size and independent
appearance, have been distinguished by the name of
ultimate fibres.   The ultimate fibre is found by micro;
scopic  investigation to be itself a fasciculus (ultimate
fasciculus), made up of a number of ultimate fibrils en-
closed in a delicate sheath or myolemma.  Two kinds
of ultimate muscular fibre exist in the animal econo-
my ; viz., that of voluntary or animal life, and that of
involuntary or organic life.
  The  ultimate fibre of animal life is known by its
                          size, by its uniformity of
                          calibre, and especially by
                          the very beautiful trans-
                          verse  markings  which
                          occur at short and regu-
                          lar distances throughout
                          its whole extent.   It also
                          presents other markings
                          or  strise, having a longi-
                          itudinal direction, which
                          indicate  the existence of
                          fibrillar within its myo-
lemma.  The myolemma, or investing sheath of the
ultimate fibre is thin, structureless and: transparent.
  The ultimate fibre of organic life (100, 4,6), is a sim-
  Sle homogeneous  filament,  much smaller than the
  bre of animal life, flat, and without transverse mark-
ings.  Besides these characters, there may generally
be seen a dark  line or several dark points in its inte-
rior, and  not unfrequently  the entire fibre appears
enlarged at irregular distances. These appearances
are due to the presence of the unobliterated nuclei of
cells from which the fibre was originally developed.
The fibres of organic  life are collected  into fasciculi
of various size, and are held  together by dark nu-
clear fibres, similar to those which bind the fasciculi
of fibrous tissue.
 
265
  The  development of muscular fibre * is effected by
means of the formation of nucleated cells  out of an
original blastema, and the conversion of those cells,
by a process already described, into the  tubuli of
ultimate  fibres, while  their contents, by  a  subse-
quent developmental action, are transformed into ul-

  * 1. A muscular fibre of animal life enclosed in its
myolemma ; the transverse and longitudinal striae are
seen.
  2.  An  ultimate fibril of muscular fibre  of  animal
life, according to Mr. Bowman.
  3.  A muscular fibre of animal life, similar to 1, but
more highly magnified.   Its myolemma  is so  thin
and transparent, as to permit the ultimate fibrils to be
seen through.  The  true nature of the longitudinal
striae is seen in this fibre, as well as the mode of for-
mation of the transverse striae.
  4.  A muscular fibre of organic life, from the urinary
bladder, magnified 600  times, linear measure.  Two
of the nuclei are seen.
  5. A muscular fibre of organic life, from the stom-
ach,  magnified 600 times.  The diameter of this and
of the  preceding fibre, midway between the  nuclei,

wa* 1TSTS oi ** inCn" 
266
timate fibrils.  According to this view the cell mem-
branes constitute the myolemma, and the contents of
the cell are  a blastema, out of which new cells are
formed.
  The disposition of these latter cells, in the produc-
tion of fibrillar, is probably much more  simple than
has hitherto been conceived.   In the  muscular fibre
of organic life, the  process would seem  to stop short
of the formation of fibrillar, the cells  being  accumu-
lated without apparent  order.  The  corpuscles, ob-
served by Mr. Bowman, in foetal muscle  (fig. 98). and
the nodosities of organic fibre, are obviously undevel-
oped cells and and nuclei.
  Muscles are divided into two great classes, volun-
tary and involuntary, to which may  be added, as an
intermediate and  connecting  link, the muscle of the
vascular system, the heart.
  The voluntary or system of animal life, is developed
from  the  external  or serous layer of the germinal
membrane, and comprehends the whole  of the  mus-
cles of the limbs and of the  trunk.  The involuntary,
or organic system, is developed from  the internal or
mucous layer, and constitutes the thin musclar struc-
ture of the intestinal canal bladder, and  internal or-
gans of generation. At the  commencement of the
alimentary canal in the oesophagus, and  near its ter-
mination in the rectum,  the muscular  coat is formed
by  a blending  of the  fibres of  both classes.  The
heart is developed from  the middle, or vascular lay-
er of the germinal membrane ;  and although involun-
tary in its aetion, is  composed of ultimate fibres, hav-
ing the transverse strise of the  muscle of animal life.
  Structure of Serous  Membrane—Serous membrane
consists  of two layers, an external or fibro-cellular
layer, and an internal layer or epithelium.
  Structure  of Mucous Membrane.—This membrane
is analogous to the cutaneous covering of the exterior
of the body, and  resembles  that tissue very closely
in its structure.  It  is is composed of three layers, an
epithelium, a. proper muroui, and a fibrous  layer.
  Structure of the Intestinal Canal.—The pharnyx has
three  coats; i  mucous  coat, a fibrous coat derived
from the pharyngeal fascia, and a muscular layer. 
207
The (esophagus has but two  coats, the mucous and
muscular.  The stomach and intestines have three,
mucous and muscular, and an  external serous invest-
ment, derived from the peritoneum.
  Synovial Membrane, is a  thin  membranous layer,
which invests the articular cartilages of the  bones,
and is thence reflected upon the surfaces of the liga-
ments which surround and enter into the composition
of a joint.  It  resembles the serous membranes in
being a shut sac, and secretes a transparent and vis-
cous fluid, which is named  synovia.  Synovia  is an
alkaline secretion, containing  albumen, which is co-
agulable at a boiling temperature. Besides the syno-
vial membranes entering into the composition of joints,
there are numerous  smaller  sacs of a similar kind
interposed between surfaces which move upon each
other so as to cause friction ; they are often associa-
ted with the articulations.  These are the bursa mu-
cosal; they are shut sacs, analogous  in structure  to
synovial membranes, and secreting a similar synovial
fluid.
  Fibrous Tissue is one of the most  generally distri-
buted of all the animal tissues ; it  is composed offibres
of  extreme minuteness, and presents itself under
three elementary forms ; namely, white  fibrous tis-
sue, yellow fibrous tissue, and red fibrous tissue.
  In white fibrous tissuethe fibres are cylindrical, ex-
ceedingly minute, (about yj-^jjjg- of an inch in diam-
eter), transparent and undulating ; they are collected

into small fasciculi  (from -j^^ to To"^tju~ °f an
inch), and  these latter form  larger fasciculi, which
according to their  arrangement give rise to the pro-
duction of  thin laminae,  membranes, ligamentous
bands and tendinous cords.
  The membranous form of white fibrous  tissue is
seen in the common connecting medium of the body,
namely, fibro-cellular or areolar  tissue, in which the
membrane is extremely thin and disposed in laminae,
bands, or  threads,  leaving interstices of various size
between them.   It is seen also in the condensed cover-
ing of various organs, as the periosteum, perichon* 
268
 drium, capsular propria? of glands, membranes of the
 brain, sclerotic coat of  the  eyeball,  pericardium,
fascial; slieaths of muscles, tendons, vessels, nerves,
 and ducts ;  sheaths  of the orectile  organs, and the
 corium of the dermic and  mucous membrane.
   yellow fibrous tissue is known also by the appella-
 tion elastic  tissue, from one of its  more prominent
 physical properties,  a property which permits of its
 fibres being drawn  out to  double their  length and
 again returning to their original dimensions.
  Red fibrous tissue is also termed contractile tissue.
 from  a peculiar property which it possesses, and
 which places it physiologically in  an intermediate
 position between white fibrous tissue and muscular
 fibre.— Wilson's Anatomy. 
269
                   Poisoning.
  Animal  carbon,  or animal  charcoal purified, it
an  antidote to all vegetable and  animal and  some
mineral poisons, as arsenic, and so is calcined mag-
nesia,  which  besides  arsenic,  decomposes  mor-
phia,  strychnia,  emetic tartar, sulphate, and ace-
tate of copper  and  corrosive sublimate, &c.  In
cases  of  poisoning  with  homoeopathic  medioine,
these  antidotes  should  be used alternately in the
same kind  of doses.   In cases of poisoning by large
aleopathic doses  of medicine, these antidotes should
be alternated, and given in large doses, or from a tea-
spoonful to a tablespoonful each, and repeated once
or twice in the course of twenty-four  hours, or of-
tener, if circumstances should require it.
  When such patients are found in a  profound sleep
from poisoning by laudanum or other  narcotics or
are disposed to sleep, or have become very feeble or
much exhausted by the action of any  other poison,
their  stomachs and  muscles should  be magnetised.
The stomach should be magnetised in the manner de-
scribed in tubercula of the stomach, page 62, and  the
muscles as directed in page 57.
  In cases of poisoning by very large  doses of opium,
laudanum,  arsenic, corrosive sublimate, &c, the sul-
phate of zinc should be given immediately, which
will vomit the patient in an instant, and  clear the sto-
mach,  when the  carbon and  magnesia  should  be
given as above described, or the stomach pump may
be used to clear  the stomach, if there  should be ob-
■cctions to  the use of the zinc 
r,o
SIGNS  USED EN  PRESCRIPTIONS,
B>—libra, a pound.
5—uncia, an ounce.
3—drachma, a drachm.
3 —scrupulum, a scruple.
gr—granum, a grain.        «  ,.  .   •_
M—minimum, 60th part of a fluid drachm.
jt—stands for Recipe.
a, aa or ana—of each alike.
Coch—cochleare, a spoonful.
P. M.—equal quantities.
ss.—half of any thing.
iss.—one and a half of anything.
q. s.—a sufficient quantity.
q. pi.—as much as you please.
O.—octarius, a pint.
i.—one of anything.
ij.—two of anything.
iij.—three of anything.
iv.—four of anything.
x.—ten oT anything.
xij.—twelve of anything.
f., prefixed to dr. or oz.—fluid ounee.
gtt.—gutta, a drop.
|iv.—equal to a cup-ful.
f iss to J ij.—a wineglasa-ful
f. J ss.—a table-spoonful.
f. 3 iij.—a dessert-spoonful.
f. 3j.—a tea-spoonful.
Fugillas—as much as can be held between
      thumb and finger. 
271
MISCELLANEOUS  RECIPES.
  Chronic Bronchitis—Cough and expectoration, but
 io pain produced by  pressure on  the  intervertebral
 spaces between the last  cervical (7th) and first dorsal
 ■irtebrae.
  R.  Hard Bal. Copa. and Cubebs, 3 iilss.  Ext. Hyos.
 3 ss.  Make  100 pills.  Dose,  1 pill three times a-day
 —after eating.—Specific.

  Couqh— Troublesome at night.— B;.  Solu. Morphine,
 Ij.   Syr. Bal. Tolu. 2 oz.  Mix.   Dose, a tea-spoon-
 ful, at night on going to bed.

  Hawking — with expectoration.—Tubercular disease
 of the throat.
  B;. Mag. gold pills, and m;ig. machine.—Specific.

  Hooping-Coi'gh. — B;.  Cochineal pulv. 10 grs. Salts
 Tartar 30 grs. Sugar 1 oz. Hot  water, half a pint. Mix.
 Dose, a tea-spoonful three times a-day.— Specific.

  Purpura. Hemorrhagica.—Purple spots in the skin,
 and bleeding from the gums, &c.
  Rs. Creosote, half a minim  (drop).  Alcohol, a suf-
 ficient quantity to suspend it  in an ounce and a half
 of mucilage.  To be taken every six hours.
  In cases where the gums are bleeding,  the following
 may be used frequently as a gargle :
  R.  Creosote, 30 drops.  Alcohol,  a sufficient quan-
 tity to unite it with twelve ounces of water.


  Ulcerated Ears. — B;.  Jamaica Spirits,  a wine-
glass-ful. Honey, a tea-spoonful.  Mix, and introduce
a little into the ulcerated  ear morning  and  evening,
with a feather.—Dr. Van Buren.—Specific. 
272
  Asthma.—R. Magnetic  machine, and Hyos.  Mag-
netize as directed in Bronchitis.—Specific.

  Bruises, Burns, Scalds.—R.  Tinct. Arnica, 10 dr
Warm water,  a table-spoonful.   Mix, and  wet  the
bruise, burn, or scald, with  the solution.

  Rheumatism — Cold  sensations,  cold  streaks.---
ft.  Tinct.  Phos. 1  drop,  in a  wine-glass  ot water.
The nitrate of potash (saltpetre) is, in many cases of
this disease, far superior to the  hydriod ue or  iodide of
potash.—See prescriptions for rheumatism, page 110.

  Colchicum.—The alcoholic tincture of sem. colchicum
is the  article  to which we have  referred, and which
should be preferred, as discordant results are the conse-
quence of the use of other preparations of this  medi-
cine.
  Antimony.  Phosphate.  Pulvis Antimonialis (James'
Powder).—This medicine  is magnetized hj, it comes
from  the shops, as  is also Dover's Powder; and  the
power and value of both  are greatly increased  by tri-
turating them an hour in a ground-glass mortar.


  Cholera Morbus.—R.  Salts Tartar, Pearl-ash, or
Salaratus,  1  tea-spoonful. Water, 1  pint.   Dose,  a
large table-spoonful. Opium, I  grain,  or 30 drops of
the tincture, for an  adult.  The alkaline solution  and
the  opium to be taken every time the patient vomits,
and every time he has a motion of the bowels.—Specific.

   In  Cholera Infantum, or the  Cholera of Infants,
there  is nothing to be compared to these alkalies and
tincture of opium, which should be given in doses pro-
portioned to the age and  condition of these patients.*
These remedies are also among the most important in
Asiatic Cholera.
 • Among the Homoeopathic remedies for this disease, cadsticum
■nd opium arc the best, and correspond with these ; and are very
useful in the diarrhoeas aud dysenteries, or summer c-nplaiim of
little children.  See pages 86,87. 
273
  Retching and Vomiting in Pregnancy.— R. Me«
merize a small bag of peppermint; place it over tbu
stomach, and fasten it there with a string around  the
body.—Clairvoyant.

  Hooping-Cough. — R.  Causticum, 3 to 5 globules,
with 1 to 3 globules of cochineal, given from one t<i
three times  a-day, in a wine-glass of water.—Momm-
opathic.

  Magnetized Gold Pill.—A magnetized chemical com
pound of gold,  iodine, and chlorine; an intricate and
difficult preparation, and of specific and extraordinary
power.

  Sterility is one of the  consequences of chronic se-
rosis, or tubercular disease of the uterus, for which the
magnetized gold pill is the  specific, as is well known to
many physicians.

  Temperament.—Magnetizing, like mesmerizing, pro-
duces a change  of temperament.  Persons who were
very insusceptible to mesmeric influence, have become
very susceptible to it, from the use of the magnetic ma-
chine.

   Couoh in Consumption, or in Chronic Bron-
 chitis-  R. Tar (hard wood the  best) one table-spoou
 ful, Jamaica spirits half  a pint, honey half a pound
 Mix and shake •well, or one hundred times.  Dose;  a
 tea-spoonful once,  twice, or three times a day.—Clair-
 voyant.

  Nausea, or Sickness of the  Stomach. — R.  Tinct.
Ipecac. 3  to 5 drops, in a wine-glass of water; or ol
first dilution 5 to 10 drops, in a wine-glass of  water."
Homoeopathic.

  Acidity of the  Stomach.—R.  Salts Tartar, Salac-
ratus,  or  Fearl-ash,  1 tea-spoonful.   Water, 1 pint.
Dose, a quantity sufficient  to neutralize the acidity. 
274
  Acidity or the Stomach—R.  Causticum, 1  to
drops, or 5 to 10 globules, in a wine-glass of water.—
Homeopathic.

  Quacks and  Nostrums—R.  Educate  physicians
In a scientific manner, to enable  them  to  distinguish
and cure chronic diseases.— Clairvoyant.


  Imbecility or  Medical  Colleges.—R.   Replace
the professors of the crude notions of a by-gone age,
with the talented young men of the profession.—Clair-
voyant.

  Magnetized Rings.—These rings should  be  made of
steel wire, plated with gold, silver, tin, copper, or brass.
When  finished, they should be magnetized, one  at a
time, by placing a ring flat on one of the poles  of a
strong  magnet, and then  pressing on, and at the same
time drawing it entirely off of the magnet with a quick
motion.  The ring will  then have two  poles, which
will  affect the  compass  or variation-needle; one of
which should be worn on a  finger of the right, and an-
other of the  left hand.
  Gold rings made in this manner have a real value, as
their influence  on children and  adults  affected  with
tubercula,  and at the same time very  susceptible to
magnetic or  mesmeric influence, is very salutary, as
shown  by a  trial of their effects in a great number and
variety of oases during the last three years, and  they
will last a life-time.  They have, however, little or no
effect upon those who are insusceptible to these  influ-
ences.
  These rings are  manufactured by J. St  R.  Elklns,
Jewellers, 60, Reade Streei, near Broadway.
  Acetate of Iron.—To 1 quart of vinegar add 1 doz,
large iron nails, and  leave it in an open  bottle  one
week, and then add an equal  quantity of rain water,
when it will be fit for use. 
       ALLOPATHY,

OR OLD  PRACTICE OF  MEDICINE.
                  A SYNOPSIS,

Containing a short abstract of the most practical arti-
  cles ;  and showing at a glance, the most important
  indications of treatment by diflerent writers, pub-
  lished within the last year, 1846.

    Disorders Affecting the System generally.

                    FEVERS.
  Typhus.—The  great  indication  of treatment  is to  -
 firoduce fibrine, 1. e.. to  separate the nucleus (the
 rue representative  of fibrine), from the envelope of
each blood corpuscle.  By giving chlorine (muriatic
acid) and ammonia alternately, this  is accomplished.
The envelope is decomposed, the nucleus remains
undissolved.   (Dr. Richter. p. 32.)
  Dilute the system with nitrogenized matters, from
the fact of ammonia or nitrogen being deficient in the
system in typhus.  After giving a full dose of castor
oil, give 10 grains of carbonate of ammonia every six
hours until the  return of cerebral  action, and  then
give aperients and quinine.  Good beef tea well sea-
soned with spices and  salt.  Plenty of water and
diluents.  Port wine when the pulse will bear  it,
(Mr. Grantham, p. 29.)
  When the circulation requires it, give wine under
all circumstances of derangement of the functions.
Two drachms of ether in the form of injections every
two hours, when swallowing is difficult.  Blisters in
succession over  the surface, every  six hours, over
chest, abdomen, thighs, and legs, as stimulants tp ex-
pite the  capillary system.  (Dr.  Corrigan, p. 30.) 
276
  Affile.—Large doses of quinine (from 10 to 60 grains
a day), for four successive days, and intermitting it
the six following days, thus embracing  the interval
comprehended in three fits ; or,
  A large dose of quinine as soon as a fit threatens or
takes place, and then omitted till another paroxysm
comes on.  Doses from 15 to 80 grains each day. in-
creased sometimes to 60 grains.   (Dr. Graves, p. 25.)
  Before giving quinine, relieve congestions of inter-
nal organs, which may occur even  in ansmic sub-
jects ; and then give a large dose of quinine, followed
by small doses, in order to keep up its stimulating or
tonic  effects on the capillaries.  (Dr. R. Chambers,
p. 26.)
  Every sufficient dose of quinine or bark loses power
by fractioning it, like a dose of wine ; therefore give
a large or full dose during or just after a fit, and also
during the intermission : the second dose to be given
on any day from the first  to  the  sixth interval, then
to be repeated after intervals of 7,8, 9, 10,  12. 14, 16,
18, 22, and 30 days.  Best time for the dose immedi-
ately after a light  dinner, and the first dose just after
an attack.  A dose from 15 to 20 grains of sulphate of
quinine, or 3 or 4 drachms of cinchona will keep oft"
the fit for about eight days.   (Bretonneau. p. 28.)
  Scarlatina.—As soon as the efflorescence appears,
and when the fauces are  red, apply a solution of ni-
trate of silver to the  inflamed parts in the  throat (10
grains to the ounce) ;  apply the camphor liniment
combined with laudanum  externally ;  and to a child
of three years old, give half a drachm of diluted dis-
tilled vinegar,  in  syrup  and  water,  every three
hours ;  after fifteen years, give two drachms to a
dose.   The solution of nitrate of silver should be ap-
plied once or twice a day. by means of a bit of sponge
at the end of a lead pencil.  (Mr. Brown, p. 35.)
  When there is dropsy, with albuminous urine after
scarlatina, the epithelium separates from the  mucous
surface of the kidney, and there is a desquamation
similar to that on the skin.  Cutaneous action should
be kept up until the renal secretion is restored,  or
all  the consequences of B right's  disease may occur,
and the  patient  die from the retention of urea in the 
277
 system.   It is in the mild forms that dangerous se-
 quelae are to be apprehended, the poison having been
 imperfectly, or not at all, eliminated through  the
 skin.  (Dr.  Todd, p. 124.)

  Cancer.—Use  methodic compression, as  recom-
 mended   by Mr. Young.  Apply perfectly  smooth
 disks of agaric, laid over each other, and retained in
 situ by a roller (Recamier).   Use a laminated plate
 of lead, modelled to the tumor, surmounted by gra-
 duated compresses.  (M. Begin.)  Dr. Arnott's plan
 of applying pressure by means of an air cushion and
 spring, is the  best, as it makes equal and regular
 pressure on the tumor, and is applicable whenever
 a  bony  or  other  solid support exists  behind the
 growth,  where a point for counter-pressure  can be
 ad.  (p. 168.)  Give  the  following internally :  3.
 Arsenici  iodureti, gr. j. ;  ext. conii, 3ij. ;  in pil.
 xvi. J dividend, j. bis dies.  Diet should be light and
 nutritious,  and exercise  moderate.   (Dr. Walshe,
 p.  169.)

  Scrofula.—Give muriate  of barytes in doses of
 from half a grain to three grains.  When given to
 infants, add  a syrup to diminish its  irritant  effects,
 and if there  be spasm, combine it with some aromatic
 or antispasmodic.  The following is a good formula:
 Muriate  of  barytes, muriate of iron, of each  half a
 drachm ;  water distilled, syrup  of orange peel, of
 each half an ounce.  Or give half a grain of barytes
 in a tea-cupful of infusion of hop, or some bitter infu-
 sion, every morning fasting, gradually increasing the
 dose.   Or give it in  pill, the  best way, in doses of
one-twelfth  of a grain three  times a day, increasing
the frequency of the doses, rather than the quantity
in each.  Barytes does not supersede iodine in these
cases, but sometimes iodine does no good, or it does
good only to a certain  point, and then proves nox-
ious ; it is here that barytes is of the greatest service.
—Dr. Walshe, p. 170.
 Scrofulous Tumors.—Consecutive to inflammation
and suppuration of  the lymphatic glands, apply the
following ointment;—Oil of cod livers, 15 parts ;  liq. 
278
of subacetat. of lead, 8 parts ;  yolk of egg, 12 parts :
make into a homogeneous ointment.
  Scrofulous OpWAalmta.—Smear the margins of the
eye-lias with cod liver oil. twice or thrice a day, by
means of a camel-hair brush, or feather.—Dr. Bre-
feld, p. 171.
  Rhf.umatism.—Give  colchicum,  but  should  the
fever  run very  high,  add  bleeding  and  mercu-
rial  purgatives; if the  pain  be  of a  nervous
character give opium  or morphia.  The colchicum
acts  by  eliminating morbid  matter  from the  sys-
tem   The urine becomes  increased  in  quantity,
or specific gravity, or both ; there may be a sedi-
ment, or this may be eliminated as dissolved urea,
and  then there is no deposit.   Continue the colchi-
cum for a week or ten days after the pain has subsid-
ed, to get rid of rheumatic matter ;  combine it with
a mild  tonic,  iodide of potassium, and a good diet.—
Dr. Williams',  p. 165.
  Acute.—Give one or two grains of opium every se-
cond or third hour, or ten. twelve, or more grains in
the twenty-four hours.   The opium is to be increased
in dose, both  as to  frequency  and  quantity,  until
there is decided relief, and kept at that dose until the
complaint is steadily subsiding.—Corrigan.
  Bleed, once  or twice, in the robust only, and  give
gr. v. to gr. x. of calomel, with gr. iss..or gr.  ij. of
opium, every night, and a purgative next morning.
Give also the  following draught, three times a day :
—vin. colchici,  mx. ad. xx. ; pulv. ipecac, co.  ; gr.
v.;  mist, salin.. 3x. ; syrupi, 3j-;  M.  Between the
second and fourth day, and  sooner, if  tenderness of
the gum occurs, omit the calomel,  and continue one
grain of opium at bedtime, and in some cases at noon,
as also the colchicum draught, and morning senna
purge.  [Dr. Hope.]  When sore mouth supervenes,
instead of continuing the opium, if there be not much
pain left, give quinine and iodide of potassium.  Dis-
ease of the heart is  rare under either Dr. Corrigan's
or Dr. Hope's plan of treatment; if it does occur, give
large and  repeated doses of calomel and opium. If 
279
 the disease becomes chronic, or the attendant fever
 is of a hectic character, give quinine  or hydriodate
 of potash, in full doses.—Dr. Griffin, p. 162.
   Chronic.—Give the clear cod-liver oil. in doses of
 a tea-spoonful, and gradually augment the dose to a
 wine-glass full, night and morning.  Do not give this
 oil whe.e dyspeptic symptoms co-exist.  The best ve-
 hicle is a thin infusion of linseed, flavored w.th lemon-
 peel, and sweetened to please the palate.—Dr. Brad-
 shaw, p. 163.
   Muscular.—'■ Fire " the parts with the  instrument
 used by Dr. Corrigan.  [See Paralysis, p. 56.]
   Gouty Neuralgia.—This affection, often called sci-
 atic gout from its seat, is cured by an attack of regu-
 lar gout.  Give a mild mercurial course, with salines,
 especially alkaline diuretics ;  occasional moderate
 detraction of blood, either generally  or locally ; a
 light and lowly animali/.ed diet; and a most rigid ab-
 stinence from all fermented liquors, especially  porter
 and aleo.  The clothing  should  be warm ; and give
 colchicum.—Dr. Robertson.
   In gouty inflammation, apply leeches, and keep up
 a gentle oozing from the bites by warm fomentations ;
 then keep the part covered and apply a lotion made
 of one part of spirit, three of camphor mixture, and a
 little vinegar.  Give colchicum  to stimulate and in-
 crease the secretion of the mucous membrane of the
 bowels, and to eliminate lithic acid and other nitroge-
 nized elements from the system.—Med. Chir. Review-
 er, p. 162.
  Rheumatic Gout.—Mix phosphate of ammonia, say
 3ss., in 3vi- of  distilled water ; and  give half an
 ounce of this either combined with small doses of
 musk or not.  It decomposes the insoluble lithate of
 soda supposed  to exist in the blood, and forms  two
 new soluble compounds, phosphate of soda and lithate
of ammonia.  Give it for a  considerable time where
thickening of the white tissues exists ;  it deprives
the blood of the lithic  acid  and soda, and creates a
demand for them, which  leads to absorption of these
elements from the tissues where they have been de-
posited.  This  remedy is not intended to supersede
the use of the  lancet, and  other remedies in  acute
 rheumatism.—Dr. Buckler, p. 154. 
2KII
        Affections of the Nervous System.

                    TETANUS.

  Traumatic.—Give large doses of tincture of aco-
nite, prepared according to Dr. Fleming's formula'.
Watch the case very attentively.  Dr. Fleming would
not exceed a second dose  of 5 minims 2 hours after
the first.  In traumatic tetanus this will not be suffi-
cient.  Give 18 or 19 minims in eight hours ; the se-
cond day increase the dose to 32 minims in fourteen
lio-irs ;  third day. 25. minims in seven hours ; and
fourth day. 20  minims in  two  hours.   Watch these
doses unceasingly, and  diminish them according to
circumstance.s.—Mr. Page, p. 60.
  Idiopathic.—Do not depend so much on  stimulants,
but support the strength on nutritious diet, such  as
;'.nimal jellies.  Give opium in large doses with hy-
drocyanic acid ; also a well-sustained  course of pur-
gatives, as  colocynth  pills with castor oil ; cupping
over the spine ;  turpentine L'lysters.—Dr. Watson,
p. 57.
  Try the hydropathic method of treatment.   Envel-
ope the patient in a cold wet sheet; over  this place
three or four good blankets ; keep the patient in this
condition for an hour, by which time the tempera-
ture of  the  sheet will probably be  100°.  Then re-
move the  coverings, and plunge tho  patient into a
cold bath ;  rub him quite dry,  and  envelope him
again in blankets for six hours.   Repeat this  opera-
tion if the  symptoms  do  not  abate.—Mr. Preshaw,
p. 60.

  Hydrophobia.—Employ large  doses of the tinc-
ture of aconite, as  recommended in traumatic teta-
nus.—[See Tetanus, Traumatic]

  Delirium Tremens.—Give  opium  and  emetic
tartar.  Antim. potass, tart. gr. iv. ;  tinctura  opii.
3j.; mist camphorae, 3viij.  Mix, and give two table-
spoonfuls for first' dose, and one every half hour af-
terward, until delirium abates or drowsiness  comes
on.—Dr. Graves, p. 96. 
281
   When morphia and other narcotics fail,  and the
 case is extreme, blister the back between the scapu-
 la:, peel off' the cuticle to the extent of three inches
 by two, and cover the part over with a layer of pure
 extract of belladonna.  Within ten minutes  there
 may be twitchings of the  facial  muscles, intoxica-
 tion, pupils dilated, and drowsiness ; immediately re-
 move the  belladonna, or even sooner.—Mr. Flood,
 p. 39.
  Asthe.nic  Form.—The  object is  to  support  the
 strength and  allay irritation.  Give stimulants and
 opium.  The attack has come on gradually,  and the
 patient has lived on stimulants, without proper food ;
 the system is impoverished.  Give  broth and  nutri-
 tious  diet,  with moderate  quantities of good  wine,
 and full doses of opium.
  Sthenic Form.—The patient has  been intemperate
 for a short  time only,  during  an election, &c. ; he is
 otherwise robust; the case borders on inflammation.
 Do not give opium : apply leeches to the epigastrium
 or head ; cold lotions. Do  not  commence by stimu-
 lating, nor  by giving narcotics;  although one or
 both of these  methods may be ultimately required.
 —Dr. Corrigan, p. 41.
  Mania  (Mental Excitement).—In cases with great
 action or excitement without power, the great object
 is to subdue the cerebral excitement by procuring
 sleep.  For this reason give occasionally tinct. hyos-
 ciam. mxxx. ; tinct. humuli, 3'j- ; camphor, gr. v. to
 x.  Or, relieve visceral congestion by leeches to the
 rectum ;  or give a full dose  of opium.  In  anaemic
 cases, it  is often necessary to give a  stimulantj or
 good nutritious food before a narcotic.  A combina-
 tion of opium and tartar emetic ; or calomel and opi-
um ; or the infusion of opium with a bitter ; or the
hydrochlorate of morphia;  or an opiate enema may
be tried.  Rub three  or four tea-spoonfuls of lauda-
num over the stomach; or rub the shaved head with
liniment, camph. fort,  combined with opium.
  Apply a blister to the back, peel off a small portion
of the cuticle, and apply the pure extract of belladon-
na for nine or ten  minutes.  [See Delirium Tre- 
282
mens.]  When mania is periodic, give arsensic, tinct.
ferri sesquichlor., zinc,  copper,  or tonics.  Arsenie
seems to alter the sensibility of the brain.  It is. per-
haps, better to keep the head regularly cold, than to
apply the douche.—Dr. J. Williams, p. 35.
  Puerperal.—Give  opium and tartar emetic, as re-
commended in the treatment of delirium tremens.—
Dr. Graves, p. 96.

  Paralvsis.—In  cases where  there is no organic le-
sion in the central  organs, " fire " the patient every
day, if permissible, along the spine, thighs, and legs,
or other  parts.   Mode  of  application.—" The  iron
consists of a thick iron wire shank, two inches long,
inserted in a small wooden handle, having on its ex-
tremity, which is slightly curved, a disc or button of
iron, a quarter of an inch thick, and half an inch in
diameter.   The face of the  disc is flat, not spherical,
like the French  ones.  Hold  the  button  over the
flame of a small spirit lamp, keeping the fore-finger
about half an inch from the heated button.  As soon
as the finger  feels uncomfortably hot. withdraw the
button, and apply it as quiekly and lightly as possible,
at intervals ofhalf an inch over the whole of the affect-
ed part, bringing  the flat surface of the disc fairly in
contact  with  the skin.  A whole limb  or  the  back
may thus be fired in a hundred places,  if necessary,
in one minute.  By looking sideways at the  spots,
the skin should look first of a glistening white, and,
in a short time, of a bright red.—Dr. Corrigan. p. 55.
  When there is no organic lesion, but only a  want
of nervous  energy, in cases of local  and not general
paralysis, as when a single muscle of a  certain class
of muscles are  affected,  as by the action of  lead,
make use  of magnetic electricity.—Dr.  Neligan,
p. 43.
  In cases depending upon cold, poisons, molecular
changes in the brain and nerves, give strychnine in
doses  from  one-eighth to a quarter  of a grain three
times  a day, and cease on  the  appearance of poison-
ous effects.—Dr. Favell, p. 55.
  £rii.KFsr.—One great difference  between epilepsy 
283
and apoplexy is, that in the former the respiratory
movements are even more active, impeded,  indeed,
by the spasm  of the  glottis  which often exists,
whereas in apoplexy respiration is impaired ; hence
the coma of apoplexy is more dangerous ;  not so
with epilepsy, in which respiration is even exalted.
This may  be owing to the circulation  through the
cerebrum being impeded,  and by means of the circle
of Willis, diverted to the  medulla  oblongata ; hence
the exaltation of the medullary functions in hysteria.
epilepsy,  &c.   Hence  also the  greater  liability to
convulsions during sleep,  the superior hynotic influ-
ence  of moderate doses of opium, which  exalt the
medullary while they impair the cerebral fumctions,
and the wakefulness caused  by prussic  acid, which
impairs the medullary  functions.—The great object
of treatment  is to equalize the circulation ; not to
allow one  part to  monopolize the blood at the ex-
pense of another.  Bleeding is very exceptionable, as
the cases  often occur in anaemic subjects.  Improve
the vigor of  the circulation, and even increase the
quantity of blood.  Apply cold to the head and spine,
and heat to other parts ; purge, give diuretics, coun-
ter-irritate.  Advise regular exercise, warm clothing.
Subdue the action of the heart by  hydrocyanic acid,
digitalis,  henbane,  valerian.  Improve  the general
tone of the system ; give nitrate of silver, zinc, copper,
chalybeates. mineral acids, bark,  quinine.   Terhaps
the best is the  muriated  tincture  of iron.—Dr. C. J
B. Williams, p. 49.

  Apoplexy.—When caused by intravascular conges-
tion, plethora, or hyperaemia, deplete : when  caused
by extravascular effusion, the  system is under the
influence of shock, and does not bear depletion well.
—How shall we know the latter case  ?  Vertigo is a
good characteristic, coming on in the act of stooping,
sudden change of position. &c.  But the best  plan is
to feel our way by a small blood-letting, and watch
the cflect.   When caused  by hyperaemia or inanition.
restore  the equilibrium of the circulation by  good
diet, and  improving the health;  quinine,  iron.  In 
254
 this case the relief from depletion is transitory.—Dr.
 M. Hall, p. 46.
  Neuralgia—(i Fire" the parts affected, and do it re-
  ?eatedly, if necessary.—Dr. Corrigan, p. 55 :  see
  aralysis.
  Give three grains of sulphate of quinine, with one-
 eighth of a  grain of sulphate of morphia, an hour
 before each  expected attack, and then give five drops
 of tincture of  Indian hemp  three times a day, and
 rub some cajeput oil on the part affected.  Continue
 tho quinine three times a day, and increase the Indian
 hemp to seven and ten  drops three  times  a day  till
 relieved.—Mr. Hargrave, p. 66.
  Give  colchicum, either alone  or combined with
 other remedies, especially iu cardiac neuralgia; and
 in this case, apply the tobacco leaf externally over the
 seat of pain : it should be slightly moistened, and re-
 moved on any symptoms of giddiness or sinking  ap-
 pearing.—Dr. Fife, p. 67.
  Make a liniment with one  drachm of tincture of
 aconite  of the  shops,  and seven drachms  of fresh
 palm  oil, or  with two ounces of camphor liniment
 Rub  half a  drachm  or  a  drachm of  the former,
 or double the quantity of the latter, into the part
 affected,  twice or  thrice  a day, according  to its
 effects.   It must be watched attentively, as the medi-
 cine is cumulative.   If its  poisonous effects appear,
give a stimulant, as wine, or get the  patient into  the
fresh air.—Mr. Kirby, p. 65.
  [See Retrospect, Part XII.,  Art. 9. for Dr. Fleming's
interesting Paper on  this medicine ; and for his for-
 mula for the preparation of his tincture of anconite,
see the same article,  page 41]
  Facial.  (Orbital.)—Give half a grain  of valerian-
ate of zinc every eight hours, combined  with two
 grains of extract of  hyosciamus.   Follow  this with
 gentle purgatives.—Dr.  Bell,  p. 62.
  Periodic—Give large doses of sulphate of quinine,
from a scruple to  half a drachm daily.   Combine it,
 if necessary, with Fowler's solution of arsenic ; but
omit the  arsenic  unless unsuccessful  with quinine
 and other remedies.—Sir B. Brodie, p. 62.
  When the sulphate of quinine fails, give the tannate 
285
of quinine  in  the same doses as the sulphate.—Dr.
Hauft", p. 65.
  Sciatica.—Apply a blister to the hip, peel off the
cuticle and dress the part twice a day with one grain of
hydrochlorate  of morphia.  Repeat the blister and
morphia when  necessary.  Give also, three times a
day, two ounces of guaiacum mixture, with 40 mi-
nims, or one drachm of the tincture of gui&cum ; and
apply  some stimulating liniment.  If these fail, try
the internal use of turpentine.—Dr. Taylor, p. 61.
  " Fire" the parts along the course of pain, and also,
if necessary, across the loins.—Do  it repeatedly, if
requisite.—Dr.  Corrigan, p. 55 : see Paralysis.
       Affections' of the Circulatory System.
  An.emia.—Improve the general health and strength,
and  the quantity  and quality of the  blood.   Iron
forms the chief part of the haematosin which is con-
tained within the external envelope of the red glo-
bules ;  therefore; this is one  of the most important
medicines by which to increase  the  quantity of the
globules.  It is better to give iron  in small quantities
for a long time, than in large doses for a short time.
The  first organ to be attended to  will often be the
stomach and digestive organs.  If the stomach will
bear it, begin with mist, ferri.  co. or  with tinct. ferri.
sesquichlor. in  a bitter infusi<vi : or give the sulphate
of iron combined with ext. gent, or with ext. hyosciam,
and a little aloes or rhubarb.   When there  is oedema,
combine the potassio tartrate of iron, with  bitartrate
of potass.  The iodide  of  iron  is also  an  excellent
preparation.  Sometimes iron cannot be borne at first:
in this case give the bitter infusions, or, if the stomach
be irritable and  neuralgic, give  hydrocyanic acid,
with a little muriate  of  morphia, or the oxide of sil-
ver : in this case a belladonna plaster over the stomach,
and even one third of a grain of extract of belladonna,
three times a day, may be  tried.   It  is impossible  to
anticipate all the symptoms which appear in anaemia:
the case must be treated accordingly.  (Dr.  Turnbull,
p. 69.)
  Heart.—(Functional Diseases.)— Palpitation.—Ow ■
ing,  1st. to a  distended  ttomach;  and thus inter 
28(i
faring with the descent of the diaphragm, and confin-
ing the heart's motions : 2d. a distended colon press-
ing on the aorta, causing fullness of blood on the left
side of the  heart: 3d. a distended stomach and colon
pressing on the ascending cava, and  causing a defi-
ciency of blood on the right side of the heart:  4th,
hepatic disease.  Each of these states will require its
particular treatment.  (Dr. Bellingham, p. 77.)

  Aneurism.—Compression  in the  treatment  of.)—
Such an amount of compression is not necessary as
to cause inflammation and adhesion of the opposed sur-
faces of the vessel, nor should the  circulation  in the
artery at the point where it is compressed be entirely
intercepted.  To apply  it successfully, the velocity
of the current should be diminished,  and the amount
of blood  in the sac be diminished, so  as  to encourage
the deposition of fibrine, until the sac is quite  flUed.
It has this advantage over the cure  of aneurism by
ligature, that the artery is obliterated  at the seat of
the aneurism, by which the chances  of gangrene are
diminished.  The cure is also more  effoctual  as the
sac and also the artery leading from  it, become filled
with fibrine, whereas, after ligature, a loose coagu-
lum remains which does not  fill the eac.  (Dr.  Bel.
lingham, p. 209.)
   It is not unfrequently found that the  artery and its
accompanying vein have become adherent, which »'
a great  source of  embarrassment to  the operator
when tying the artery ; this  is avoided by adopting
the treatment bv compression.  A moderate degree
of pressure is all that is necessary  throughout,  so as
 not entirely to intercept the current of blood through
 the vessel.  (Dr. Porter, p. 211.)
   Aneurism by Anastomosis  or Navus Maternns.—
 Tie  the tributary   arteries  in the  neighborhood.
 (Palletan. Wadrope. Dr. McLauchlan.)  Tie the ar-
 teries supplying the tumor,  and then  remove it by
 knife, securing the bleeding  vessels with ligatures.
 (Syme.)  Cut oft' the  supply  of blood to  the tumor
 by making incisions around it,  secure the bleeding
 vessels, and place pledgets of lint between the cut
 surfaces to prevent union taking place.  (Dr. Gibson.) 
e
                        237

Use galvano-puncture for ten minutes at a time, with
16 pairs  of  plates.  The pins introduced  into the
tumor  should  be numerous, and cross  each other at
right  angles;   apply ice after  the operation.  Dr.
Petrequin.)
  N.svi.—Apply lint steeped in liq.  plumbi.  or solu-
tion of alum, and strap it over the part with a band-
age j wet tho lint without removing it, and keep it so
applied for several weeks.  Should this fail cut out
the tumor,  if no  larger than  a crown  piece,  and
close  the edges of  the  wound  by  twisted suture.
(p. 231.)
  Subclavian Artery.—(Ligature of.)—When there
is extensive swelling and suppuration, after the lesion
of an artery, it isnot advisable to cut down upon it, to
tie it at the seat of injury ;  and when this is the case
after the wound of the subclavain, it is better  to se-
cure the artery beneath  the  scalenus, before  it ap-
proaches the tubercle of  the rib ; it is much higher
and more accessible there.  (Dr. Warren, p. 222.)
  Posterior Tibial Artery.—(Wound and ligature
qf.)—Take  the wound  as  a centre,  and cut down
upon the vessel, and tie it bothrabove and below the
seat of injury.  (Arnott.)  If it be a case of second-
ary haemorrhage, and there is a good deal of coagu-
lum in the  parts surrounding the vessel, it will be
advisable to tie the femoral artery.  Wheii there is a
wound in the calf of the  leg, with sufficient bleeding
to warrant a belief that the posterior tibial artery is
wounded, separate the soleus from its attachment to
the tibia, cutting through the deep fascia, and secure
the vessel.  (Mr. B. B. Cooper, p. 217.)
  H.«morrhaoic Diathesis.—Apply to the bleeding
part pads soaked in acetate of lead mixture, and
cover  it also  with  pulverized   matico.    Give the
following mixture : R. Plumbi super acet. 3ss. acid
acet. dil. Jss. syr. rhoead. 3ss. ;  aquae 3v. M. sumat,
oochl.  ij. magn. omn. tertia hora.  If the acetate of
lead begins to  affect the  system,  substitute for it the
sulphate of soda.  You must rely on constitutional
'reatmeut.   (Dr. Clay, p. 234.)
  Epistaxis-—Give  the  oxide of silver  internally
 (Mr. B, Lane, p. 103.) 
288
      Affections  of the Respiratory System.
  Bronchitis.—(In Infants.)—If very severe  make
use of the warm bath, and give one grain of calomel
and  two  of  ipecacuanha with  a little compound
tragacanth powder, every  four hours  ; if less severo,
three times  a day, and lengthen the period  as  im-
provement takes  place.  After the  first or second
dose, the  ipecacuanha does not act  as  an  emetic.
When necessary to apply n blister to  an  infant, place
a piece of tissue paper between it aud the skin, or
dip a piece of blotting paper into acetum  cantharidis ;
apply it to the part, and in ten  or fifteen minutes you
will have  a blister.  (Mr.  Miller, p. 88.)
  Chronic  or Subacute.—Cause the patient to inhale
the fumes  of ammonia,  (p. 90.)
  Pneumonia.—(Chronic.)—Cause the patient  to in-
hale the fumes of ammonia, in order  to stimulate the
parts,  (p. 89.)
  Asimmi.—Dip a  charpie-pencil  into  pure   liquid
ammonia  and then into water, and  apply  it to the
velum,  inula,  and upper part  of tho  oesophagus.
Do not let it remain too long iu contact with the soft
parts, nor carry it too deeply into the throat;  whero
there is emphysema,  one application will be suffi-
cient.  The  absorption of ammonia  by tho stomach
will probably produce the same result, if given in
sufficiently large  doses, or its inhalation when  dif-
fused in the atmospheric air.—(M. Guerard, p.  89.)
  Aphonia.—Loss of Voice.)—Inhalation of fumes of
pure ammonia,  (p. 90.)
  Asphyxia.—Use cold affusion, and when respiration
is fully established, open a vein. (Mr. Noyce, p. 288.)
Cause  the patient to  inhale the   fumes  of pure
ammonia,  (p. 89.)
  (Edema.—(Of  the   Glottis.)—When   suffocation
threatens,  poform  the operation of laryngotomy.
(Mr. Drookes, p. 38.)
  Tracheotomy.—In  children :  lay hold  of  the
trachea with a hook, and, having drawn  it forwards,
cut out a portion  with a pair of scissors ;  or  use
Mr. Millikin's instrument, by  which you can both
fix and hook the trachea, and then cut out a circular 
289
portion  from the cartilaginous rings.  Mr. Read's
improved instrument is a very good one ; the cutting
part forms  a curve or obtuse angle with the handle.
(Mr. Carmichael. p. 236.)
  Perform the operation early.  If you cannot avoid
the thyroid veins, cut straight through them ;  the
haemorrhage ceases on the introduction of the canula.
If the case  be not very urgent, keep the  edges of
the wound  apart by some  instrument, for a short
time before introducing the canula, in order to allow
of falso membranes being expelled.   You may ex-
pedite  this by dropping water into the bronchi,  and
sponging  the  trachea.  If the canula become ob-
structed, remove it  immediately  and ompty it, and
when the canula is withdrawn, introduce the dilator.
After the fourth  or fifth day diminish the size of the
canula, and by the thirtieth day, it may be dispensed
with.  Drop into the air passages, fifteen or twenty
drops of a solution of nitrate of silver (gr. v. to 3j.),
and cleanse the  trachea with a sponge dipped in the
same solution.   (Trousseau, p. 237.)
  Paracentesis  Thoracis.—Do not allow air to be
admitted through the canula if it can be avoided.   It
 nay re-kindle inflammation, or convert the adhesive
  \to the suppurative inflammation.  Unless the lung
   capable of fiee and full expansion,  do not attempt
   draw oft'all the fluid : remove only so much as the
ej landing lung and the  surrounding compressed
or ans are capable of replacing.   Watch the opening
ca efully,  especially during inspiration and cough-
inw, and  when  the  stream begins to fail  turn the
patient on his punctured side till there is an alternate
flow and stoppage of the stream  during inspiration,
and  expiration,   then  immediately  withdraw the
canula.   Apply  a flannel  bandage  with moderate
firmness around  the chest.  Precautions.—I. Always
introduce  an exploring needle first, to know if the
diagnosis  be correct.  2.  Do not  puncture one side
before it is presumed that the other is sound enough
to carry on respiration. 3. Draw  oft the fluid slowly
through as small a canula as the density of the fluid
will admit.  4.  Only draw oft" the fluid till the air  , 
290
seems  to  threaten to be  admitted.  (Dr.  Hughes
p. 36.)

       Affections of the Alimentary Canal.

  Hare Lip—(Operation for.)—Make  the  incision
from above downwards, nearly as  far as the red
margin of tho lip. and stop before you have detached
the cut piece ;  then direct tho  incision at a right
angle towards the meridian  line.  Do tho same on
the opposite side, and then unite the two margins in
their whole extent, except towards their free bor-
ders ;  the flaps formed  by directing  the  incisions
towards the median line  are  to  be approximated.
(Mr. Smith.)  If the child bo strong and healthy, and
the fissure only affect the  lip and not the bones, the
operation  should be  performed a few days after
birth.  (Dubois.)  When the features are enlarged,
there is more ground to work  upon,  therefore defer
it until the first set of treth havo appeared.   (Listen,
p. 239.)
  Fr.^num LiNc.u.t.— (New Instrument for Divid-
ing.)—This resembles a pair of scissors; its  blades
are perfectly  blunt and curved, and  do not close
completely, thus leaving an interval for the reception
of the fraenum.   (Dr. Beatty, p. :245.)
  Cleft P.viate and Staphyloraphy.—Dissect the
soft tissues from each side of the fissure in the palate,
to such an extent  as to make a flap broad enough to
join its fellow of the opposite side in  the mesial line,
and stitch the  whole  between  the  uvula  and the
and the anterior extremity.  Re-union to a consider-
able  extent  takes place,  and  towards the inner
margin of the bones, and  also on the upper surface
of the soft portion in the  middle, there will be  a
cicatrix analogous to mucous membrane.  (Warren.)
  The soft velum ought to remain in a state of perfect
repose, and for this purpose, the levator palati, the pal
ato-pharyngeus, the palato-glossus muscles shouldbe
divided. This cuts off all motor influence in an outward
upward, or downward direction. For this purpose use a
knife with a blade like the point of a lancet, the cutting
edge being about a quarter of  an inch in extent, ana 
291
 the  flat surface being bent semi-circularly.  Make
 an incision half an inch long on each  side of the
 posterior nares,  and divide the levator palati muscle
 on both sides, just above  its  attachments to the
 palate ;  then pare the edges of the fissure, and with a
 pair of long blunt-pointed scissors, divide tho posterior
 pillar of the fauces, and,  if it  seems necessary, the
 anterior pillar too,  the  wound in each part being a
 quarter of an inch in extent: then introduce stitches
 by means  of  a  curved needle set in a handle, the
 threads being  tied so as to keep the cut edge of the
 fissure  in  exact contact.   The first incision, that for
 the  division of  the levator palati, should be  made
 midway between the hard palate  and the posterior
 margin  of  the soft  flag, just above the thickest and
 most prominent part ot the margin of the  cleft.  You
 may commence  cutting either at the end  nearest
 you, as you stand- behind the patient, or that furthest
off, as may seem most convenient.   For ligatures,
 those of stout silk, or flaxen  thread, are the best;
 and  it is of the  greatest importance that a stitch be
 used close  to the lower end of  the uvula,  as there is
 a  great tendency  to separation  there.  The  after-
 treatment  the same  as after  ordinary  operations*
 except  that the parts are to be kept at rest as  much
 as possible, and nutriment to be given by means of
 ^ncmata of gruel and soups. (Mr. Fergusson. p. 240.)
   Palate.—(Operations on.)—In cases of small holes
 in the  soft  or hard palate,  pencil their borders
 several times a-day with a concentrated tincture of
 cantharides.   Inflammation and granulation  come on
 and close the opening. Large openings are to be closed
 by suture, after parting the edges ;  and  leaden wire
 is said  to  be  preferable to silk, for ligatures, as  it
 keeps the edges close  together,  and does not cut
 through the textures.
   When there is adhesion between the velum palati
 and posterior wall of the pharynx occasioning deaf-
 ness, and  stopping the communication between the
 nares and  air-passages, the adhesion must be divided
 transversely,  by means of a long scalpel, about half
 an inch below the adherent border of the velum.
 The edge  must be fixed by a hook, and drawn from 
292
the wall of the pharynx, then, with a lancet-formed
knife, the surface of whioh is  curved, directed up-
wards, the velum is to be loosened, and tho separ-
ation  completed by scissors, also curved upon their
flat surface.  The upper adhesions are to be destroyed
by  passing a blunt curved iron instrument, like a
very small spatula,  along the inferior nares.   Next
prepare  a ligature  with  a  small  curved needle at
eacn end;  with  one of the needles transfix the
velum, a few lines from its edge, and bring it out at
a high point on the anterior surface of the palate ;
the other needle must be used in the same manner,
a short distance from the side of the other; and the
edge  of the velum must be brought about half an
inch from  the palate.   All mechanical means  for
closing the  fissured palate, are not  only  injurious
but dangerous ; but if the size of  the cleft, or other
circumstances,  render  an  operation unadvisable,
then it may be covered  with a gold palate, fixed to
the teeth.  In cases of holes in the palate, the edges
of which are so callous  that an operation would be
unsuccessful, the  opening may be stopped  by wear-
ing a  double piece of Indian rubber, without fear of
its  being enlarged.  Two pieces of  Indian rubber,
the thickness of pasteboard, are cut about four or
five times  larger than  the  opening, and between
them a small round piece, and they are  to be trans-
fixed  by  waxed thread  ; thus, one  plate lies on the
anterior, the other on the posterior side of the palate,
and the  small middle strip in the  opening.   The
patient can  apply  it himself, and it should be taken
out to be  cleaned  once a  week.   (Dieffenbach,
p. 244.)
  Cynanche.—Make free incisions, varying them in
depth and extent according to the case, in the follow-
ing manner: Take a long round-pointed scalpel, and
having covered the blade with adhesive plaster to
within three quarters of an inch of the point,  firmly
press down  the root of  the  tongue with the index-
finger of the left hand, and make one or more inci-
sions  in a direction upwards and outwards  along the
tonsil and velum to the base  of the uvula.   The
throat to be gargled with warm water to encourage 
                      293

the bleeding;  in other respects gargles are useless,
since they cause motion  in parts which ought to be
kept 8t rest.  [Dr.  Makin, p. 91.]
  Bowels.—[Acute inflammation  of.]—Where local
or general depletion has  been used, or where they
cannot be resorted to, give two grains of opium, and
then one-grain doses every two  hours, until about
32 grains  have been  taken ; watch the state of the
bladder, and open  the bowels with mild purgatives,
combined with henbane.  If the enteritis be intense,
deplete; and should  the system  resist opium, give
calomel, but substitute opium for it as soon as the
symptoms give way.  Do not give it in small doses,
for then it checks the diarrhoea, but does not relieve
the inflammation.   If dysentery  exists, combine it
with ipecacuanha.   [Dr. Griffin, p. 94.]
  Dyspepsia.—When dependent  on  or complicated
with  hypersematic or sub-inflammatory condition of
the mucous  membrane, direct the use of herbaceous
aliment, as grapes, apples,strawberries, pomegranates,
fee. ;  give them about an hour before breakfast, and
in the intervals of meals.  Should flatulence and faecal
accumulation arise, treat the former with soda and
ginger, and  the latter with a pill of aloes, capsicum,
and quinine.  (Dr.  Dick, p. 96.)  Or, give oxide of
silver in half-grain  doses twice a  day, in conjunction
with aperients and alteratives.  In gastralgia, oxide
of silver acts well as a sedative.
  Pyrosis.—Give half-grain doses  of oxide of silver in
a pill twice  a day ;  where there is deep-seated pain,
apply leeches   to the epigastrium first.  (Mr. Butler
Lane, p. 107.)
  Constipation.—"Where  there  is  no recognized
stricture,  strangulated hernia or  abdominal tumors,
make use of an oleaginous enema, to five pints of
which add an  ounce of sulphate  of magnesia, and a
tablespoonful of common salt.  In giving the injec-
tion, let the patient lie on  his right side, with  the
pelvis considerably elevated; it  should be adminis-
tered slowly,  so that the  intestine may  be filled
before it  is distended, and  when it contracts may
force away  the feculent matter mechanically.  Use 
29-t
well-boiled  oatmeal gruel with  common  salt  and
butter.  (Dr. Hall, p. 97.)
  When it arises from  obstruction near the junction
of the ileum with the coecum, inject air into the bow-
els.  (Dr. Todd, j). 103.)
  When  dependent on  indolence of  the  bowels,
warm water injections are  injurious.  Give  a  pill
containing one-fifth of a grain of the extract of  nux
vomica every morning ; it acts by rousing the con-
tractile power of the intestine.   It is particularly of
service to the paralytic, or where the muscular tone
of the intestine is lost by over-distention.  Injections
of catechu, krameria. and alum are  useful, as they
corrugate the muscular fibres of the  bowels,  and di-
minish the size of the pouches which may be formed
in the intestines by accumulated faeces, particularly
that in the rectum just above the sphincter.   These
astringent injections may be  varied ; they may be
made of the  red  rose,  krameria, oak bark, bistoria,
catechu, alum,  rhatany,  nux  vomica,  &c.   They
should only be small,  10 or 12 ounces, and not re-
tained many minutes,  so that  the muscular fibres
may readily contract.—Or,  introduce tents into  the
rectum.  (Fleury.)  Or, champoo it.   (Recamier.)
Or, give ox-gall ; as auxiliaries, add  drinks of vege-
table  bitters, a tonic diet, and exercise in the open
air.  (Dr. Teissier, p. 100.)
  Constipation  during  Pregnancy.—Inject into  he
rectum a drachm of the inspissated ox-gall, dissolved
in a pint  of  warm  water.   [Dr. Allnatt.]   This may
be repeated every  four hours until relief is produced.
[Dr. Aldis, p. 102]
  Diarrhoea.—[Chronic]—Give half-grain doses of
oxide of silver, twice a day.  [Mr. Butler Lane, p.
103.]
  Diarrhaa in Young Infants.—Give castor oil  with
yolk of egg, and  if necessary, add an opiate.  Pre-
scribe as follows, for an infant of from two  to  four
months old:  R.   01.  ricini, 3j. to 3iss. ; vitelli ovi
semis ; aq. aneth. feneculi, a. a.  3j- ft. emuls. sumat
coch. parv.  bis. die. From two to six drops of lauda-
num may be added, but this, as well  as its  amount 
295
 and frequency,  must  vary with the  case.   [Dr.
 Thomson, p. 104.]
  Hernia.—[Radical cure of]—The means to be used
 are, excision of the testicle, incision of the sac, exci-
 sion suture, and cauterization of the sac. ligature of
 the sac after incision of the integuments, acupunctu-
 ration, and insertion of gold-beater's  skin in the sac.
 These means,  however, do not prevent a fresh her-
 nial descent, although  they  destroy the sac.  The
 best means for procuring closure of the hernial aper-
 ture, are trusses, ligature of the sac, and its  enve-
 lopes, and the  cutaneous plug.  Trusses should not
 press too powerfully  on the abdominal parietes, or
 they may produce inflammation or irritation of the
 parts, or the walls of the abdomen may become atro-
 phied ; or if the pad be very small and convex it may
 produce elongation of the aponeurosis and  muscle,
 and thus weaken  the  parts.  The operation by liga-
ture is  attended with  considerable pain, and even
 loss of life.  There are two ways of introducing the
 cutaneous plug—the first, to detach a piece of integu-
 ment from the neighborhood of  the ring, and intro-
 duce it into the aperture :  the second is effected by
 drawing the loose scrotal integument into the ingui-
 nal canal, and  to  cause adhesive  inflammation be-
 tween  the  invaginated  integument and the walls of
 the canal.  M. Gerdy retains the invaginated integu-
 ments  in situ  by one or  more  sutures.  Mr. B.
 Cooper, in performing M. Gerdy's operation, stitched
 the invaginated skin to the tendon of the  external
 oblique muscle, and brought out the needle an inch
 and a half above Poupart's ligament;  the needle was
 again passed into the canal, and brought out through
 the abdominal  parietes  as before, about four lines
 distant, and the skin between the two ends of the
ligature was thus included and tied over a piece of
bougie.   [Mr. Teale, p. 247,]
  Strangulated.—In order to determine whether
the intestine be still living or not, wait a few mo-
 ments after dividing the stricture, and see whether
 the discoloration becomes  less intense ; or press the
 blood out of the distended veins and see if they be-
 come rapidly  refilled.   If no evidence of circulation 
29G
 exist, cover the Intestine with integuments, or with
 a moist sponge, and wait a little while ; the surface
 of the intestine may then bo carefully and slightly
 scarified with the point of a  lancet,  and perhaps a
 Blight oozing of blood will take place, if so, however
 discolored it may be, the intestines may be returned
 into the abdomen.  Carefully pre-s out the contents
 of the intestine and then replace it in successive por-
 tions ;  then  pass the finger within the abdomen to
 determine that no portion of the intestine is engaged
 within the sac. ana also to determine that the pro-
 truded knuckle of the intestine is not invaginated
 within a neighboring portion of the intestinal canal.
 When  gangrene has taken  place, and  is general,
 make an incision through the whole length of the
 gangrenous  portion, and  leave it to slough  away.
 This opening allows the contents of the  upper part
 of the canal to pass away : but if this does not take
  lace without dividing the stricture, this must  be
  one with as  little  disturbance  as  possible.  The
 wound must bo left open, to  facilitate the free dis-
 charge of matters, and simply dressed with wet linen,
 frequently renewed.  Mr. Travers does not recom-
 mend division  but dilatation of the stricture.   Sir A.
 Cooper  divided  the  stricture generally.  Mr. Key
 also  advises  it.  Brasdor's  practice of excising the
 gangrenous  parts and uniting tho divided extremities
 by suture is universally abandoned.  Recent adhe-
sions, if there be no gangrene, are to be destroyed  by
the finger or  handle of  a scalpel—adhesion  of two
coils of intestine is also to be treated in this way.
 [Mr. Teale, p.  219.]
  It  is  recommended by some practitioners, as Mr.
Key, &.c, to return the bowel without cutting into
the sac, as there is less  danger of peritoneal inflam-
mation afterwards.  The objection to this practice is
the possible gangrenous condition of the bowel, many
of the symptoms of which  are  equivocal, so that it is
the best practice, after all, to open  the  sac.  The
great mortality attending these operations has been
increased by improper  after-treatment, as the early
exhibition of purgatives. (Mr. South, p  2ol ) 
297
   Enterotomy after operation for Strangulated Hernia.
 —It sometimes happens that after  the  operation for
 strangulated hernia, and after the intestine has been
 returned, symptoms of strangulation remain ; the
 part of the intestine is incapable of resuming its func-
 tions, and tympanitis comes on.  Separate the  edges
 of the incision, pass the finger into the abdomen, find
 the distended coil of the bowel, seize it with a pair of
 forceps, and by means of probe-pointed scissors, make
 an opening into it, through which the contents of the
 intestinal canal may escape  ; many a  life  may be
 saved by these  means. (M. Maissoneuvo, p. 254)
  Anus.—(Artificial)—After  the  bowel  has   been
 strangulated so long that gangrene of  a portion has
 taken place, and an artificial anus  is formed, either
 by the knife or by sloughing, and the stools are pass-
 ed  out  of the  opening,  try  the ingenious method
 adopted  by Mr. Trant, of Dublin,  which consists of
introducing a small silver tube (made by Mr.  Milli-
kin, of Dublin.) and pressing  back  the  intermediate
portion of the intestine lying  between the abdominal
and anal position of the artificial opening, and thus
bring the parts into such relation that the stools can
 pass into the natural channel. In this way the open-
ing may  be gradually closed, and the functions of the
 part restored to the normal state. (Mr. Trant, p. 262.)
  Fistula in Ano.—Pass a ligature through the fistula,
 bringing it out at the anus  and gradually tightening
 it upon the included part; use a catheter wire, about
 as thick as small twine.  (Dr. Colvan. p 261.)
  Hemorrhoids.—Where the case is recent, and the
 protruded piles not large, the bleeding small,  and
 the constitution not affected, give a few grains of blue
 pill and rhubarb at night, and a little infus. rosas and
 epsom salts in the morning, for a few  days :  after
which give the ordinary electuary of senna,  sulphur,
cream of tartar, and mel  rosae, or, what is better.
treacle, as the mel  rosae  often gripes.   Also inject
into the rectum a pint of cold water with a drachm of
nitre dissolved in it; enjoin steady exercise, and mo-
 deration  in  diet.   In thin  delicate  subjects, give
 tonics, particularly mist, ferri aromatica  ; and if there
 bs any serious  organic  mischief, particularly of the 
298
chest, interfere with the piles as little as possible.
When the patient is becoming debilitated from the
pain and  irritation, as well as from bleeding, then
remove the protruded hemorrhoidal portions of the
bowel, having secured them by ligature.   (Mr. Ham-
ilton, p. 257.)
  Internal Bleeding Hamorrhoids.—Inject  after eve-
ry alvine evacuation, solution of acetate of lead 3j- to
3viij- of distilled water ; use two ounces of the solu-
tion for each injection ; give an occasional blue pill,
followed by a dose of castor oil and extract of taraxa-
cum.   To remedy the constipation usual in these
cases, give the following confection : common  resin,
well  powdered, one  ounce ;  clarified honey, five
ounces ; half an  ounce of balsam  of copaiba renders
it more efficacious, but is apt to disagree with the
stomach.  (Dr. Watson, New-York, p. 257.)
  Liver (Congestion  of).—In diminished  secretion,
with pale or white stools, give  mercury.  In exces-
sive  secretion, increase the amount of oxygen in-
spired, and  thus, during respiration  there will be
consumed materials that would otherwise  he left for
the liver to excrete ; for while the carbon of the lungs
is  united to oxygen,  and excreted in  a non-com-
bustible state, the carbon of the liver is non-oxyge-
nized, is still combustible, and is intended, not for
excretion, but absorption.  Limit  the supply of food
which contributes to form bile, as spiritous liquors,
butter, cream, fat, sugar, &c.  The patient ought not
to sleep immediately  after  a full meal, nor take sup-
pers.   (Dr. Budd, p. 106.)


       Affections of the Urinary Organs.

  Urinary  Deposits.—Apparatus.—A  microscope,
with a power of 300 diameters ; test glasses ;  phials
containing  nitric  and acetic acids, water of ammo-
nia, and potash ;  some slips of blue and reddened lit-
mus paper, and an urinometer.
  Diagnosis.— Notice whether it be colorless, amber,
saffron, red, &c, transparent or turbid ; ascertain by
litmus paper whether it be acid, alkaline, or neutral; 
299
note its specific gravity; set it aside to see if it de-
posite  a sediment, or throw up a cream  to the sur-
face or crystallize on the sides of the vessel.  Tho
urine should be recent, and if the  patient have leu-
corrhoea or be Menstruating, should be drawn off by
a catheter : take care to have the vessel clean.
  Urates are in excess when the urine  is acid, depo-
sits on  cooling, a red, pink, buff-colored or white pre-
cipitate, covering  the bottom of the vessel with an
even powdery deposit, usually copious, and dissolv-
ing by heat;  viewed by the  microscope, a powdery
appearance ;  dissolved  in nitric  acid  by  a gentle
heat, evaporated to dryness, and held over the fumes
of ammonia,  murexide of  a beautiful red color is
formed.                         , ,             ,
  Uric Acid.—Urine highly acid, and deposits on cool-
ing a red, pink, or buff-colored sediment, adhering to
the sides of the vessel in hard crystaline grains, hav-
ing the appearance  by the microscope of  diamond-
shaped plates or prisms ;  the precipitate is generally
scanty ; forms murexide the same as the urates, with
nitric acid and ammonia.
  When the  urine is acid, alkaline or neutral, but
turbid  on emission, and deposits a white or yellowish
sediment, and is  not rendered transparent by heat,
there will be present,  phosphates, oxalate of lime,
crvstine, mucus, pus or blood ; if the
  Phosphates, it  is  rendered  apparent  by acetic
acid •  the earthy  phosphates appear  as  amorphous
powders by the microscope, the ammomaco-magne-
Bian, as triangular prisms.                    ..
  Oxalate qfLime.-Not aflected by acetic acid pr
ammonia, but rendered transparent by nitric  acid ;
deposit, when viewed by the  microscope, consists of
octohedral crystals.                   ,  *• „ «*„_,
  Custmc.-Rendered transparent  by solution of am-
monia  ; viewed by the microscope it consists of five-
sided olates, clouded in the centres.
  Pusor Mucus.-The sediment is whitish, and not
dissolved by any of these agents j  viewed by the mi-
croscope it7 consists  of minute, irregular,  spherical
hodies with granulated surfaces.
  ^Tool-Sediment red, and  not dissolved bymtno 
300
acid, heat or acetic acid; by the microscope it con-
sists  of minute  yellowish bodies,  the shape of  a
shilling.
  The dissolved constituents in diseased states of the
urine, are :
  Bile.—To detect it, drop the urine and nitric acid a
short distance  from it on  a plate of glass : as they
meet examine them with an achromatic microscope,
and  if bile be present, a  green color will  be  pro-
duced.
  Albumen.—Sp. gr. 1,014, or lower j heat coagulates
the albumen, and this cannot be redissolved by nitric
acid ; nitric acid coagulates the albumen.
  Sugar.—Sp. gr.  1,025, or above ; taste sweet; boil
the suspected  urine with an equal bulk of water of
 Sotash, if sugar be present the liquid will assume  a
 eep porter or beer color.
  Treatment :—Lithic Acid deposits.—Give  gr. x. or
wj. of bicarbonate of potash or soda, three  times  a
day, and if the deposit be  in the form of  rhombic
prisms, indicating  gout, give colchicum, using local
antiphlogistic measures, if the urine be  sanguinolcnt
or albuminous, and there be pain in the  loins. If the
deposit be amorphous, there is either excessive  se-
cretion of the solid constituents of the urine, or a de-
ficiency in  the secretion of water.  In the former
case, the  sp. gr. is increased in proportion  to  the
quantity ;  give iodide of potassium three times a day
in doses of 5 or 10 grs.  In the latter, the quantity of
urine is decreased, there will he fever either idiopa-
thic or symptomatic, which must bo removed, or dys-
pepsia, in this case give a scruple of alum three times
a day in half a pint of water.  If the sediment have  a
pink color, attend to the biliary functions.
  Weakly Acid or Neutral Urine.—This shows that the
kidneys are inflamed.  If acutely, use  general and
local depletion, and exhibit emollients and contra-sti-
mulants; give wj. doses  of iodide of potassium.  If
the inflammation be chronic, use local depletion and
counter-irritation ; setons are very useful; occurring
during typhus, apply blisters to  the loins, and give
wine.
  Oxalate of Lime deposits.—At first give tonics,  the 
301
 mineral acids, vegetable  bitters,  astringents,  da.;
 and after  some time give alkalies largely diluted,
 Alternate  these  plans, and persist steadily in  their
 use.   The following is a  good tonic in these cases :
 —Infus. cascarill. 3vj. ; potass, nitrat. 3j.; acid, nitrici
 dil. 3iss. ;  tinct. opii 3j- M. sumat.  cochl. duo ampla
 ter in die.
   Albuminous Urine.—Use active depletion, both local
 and general; give nauseating doses of  tartar emetic,
 and hydragogue purgatives ; use the  warm  bath :
 give alkalies.  Persevere in this treatment, but should
 the strength fail, and a cachetic state come on. depend
 on active   counter-irritation, especially by setons.
 (Dr. Aldridge, p. 134.)
   Albuminous Urine after  Scarlatina.—If seen  early,
 adopt  antiphlogistic  measures ; and when active is
 succeeded by passive congestion, give two or three
 grains of acetate of lead  threo times  a day, to pre-
 vent the insidious drain on the system,  and then give
 muriated tincture of iron, to repair the anaemic state
 of the system.  (Dr. O'Ferrall,  p. 124.)
  Diabetes   Mellitus.—The sugar in this disease  is
 formed not only in primary but also in secondary as-
 similation from the tissues, as the emaciation proves ;
 hence  the  rigorous  exclusion  of  non-azotized sub-
 stances is  not advisable,  as  it  forces the disease to
 attack the. living  tissues, therefore allow at least fari-
 naceous food.  (Dr. Dick, p. 122.)
  Exalt the  tone of the secreting'capillaries of  the
 kidneys by balsams, ammonia,  strychnia, and other
 excitants, when  the  perspiratory  secretion is sup-
 pressed : if itbenot. give chalybeates, alum sulphate
of zinc, or other metallic astringents : give a moderate
portion of animal food, porter, &c,  but do not enjoin
a strictly animaj diet.
  Diabetes    Insipidus.—Give anti-spasmodics   and
mineral tonics, and apply stimulating liniments to the
 spine.
  Purulent deposits in Urine.—Give tonics, to subdue
 the asthenic inflammation of the mucous membranes ;
 decoction of tb* leaves  of chimaphila  corymbose,
 diosma, crenata, arctospaphylos, uva ursi, or the root 
302
of cissampelos pareira, combined with mineral aoids ;
also give chalybeates.
  Heematuria.—Treat this disease in the same way as
other vicarious discharges ; give astringents, as tan-
nin : or styptics, as oil of turpentine : when you give
the latter be on your guard against nephritis.   (Dr.
Aldridgc, p. 135.)
  Bright's Disease, or Albuminaria.—Enjoin a gene-
ral tonic regimen, avoid as articles of  food, fat and
other highly carbonized materials, attend to the func-
tions of the  skin and, bowels, relieve congestion of
the gland, and, if necessary use small bleedings.   (Dr.
Johnson.)   Make use of cautious small blood-lettings
in the early stages, particularly if acute  ; give hydra-
 fogue cathartics,  and  improve  the general health ;
 o not deplete  where   the disease is chronic.   (Dr.
Williams.)    In  the  very early stages change the
mode of life and habits of the patient, enjoin pure air
and careful  attention to diet and exercise ; in this
stage application for  relief is seldom made.  In the
second and third stages, relieve congestion ; promote
the flow of urine and the actipn of the skin, and pre-
vent the deposition of  fatty  matters by  a diet which
contains neither fat, nor butter,  nor any  of those non-
azotized substances nearly allied to  it, as starch,
sugar, potatoes, &c.  (Dr. Todd. p. 110.)
  In the acute form, remove congestion  of the kid-
neys by blood-letting, regulated according to the in-
tensity of the disease and the patient's  strength ; re-
store the function of the skin, by keeping the patient
in a warm atmosphere,  giving mild diaphoretics, and
the use of the warm or vapor bath.—Dr. Barlow gives
tartar emetic.  Next, remove the dropsy, by diuretics
and  purgatives, nitrate of potash, in   doses of two
scruples or more, with digitalis and cream  of tartar ;
the nitrate should be largely diluted.
  In the chronic form,  first attend to the function of
the skinby warm clothing, diaphoretics, and the warm
bath.  Give tincture of cantharides in doses  of from
four to twelve drops, in some emulsion.  (Dr. Bright.)
Dr. Wells and  M. Monneret advise thirty to  sixty
drops in twenty-four  hours ; or give ioduret of iron
(M. Gutbrod ;)  or hydriodate of potash, and use iodine 
303
ointment  (M. Aiken) ;  or  give chalybeate tonics,
saline purgatives, and nutritious diet (Dr. Reese) ; or
equal parts of tinct. of cantharides and tinct. of ses-
quichloride of iron (Dr. Copeland).
  Treat the dropsy with cream of tartar and  digitalis
(Dr. Christison), give from a drachm to a drachm and
a half of the  former three times a day, and at the
same time a pill containing one or two grains of pow-
dered digitalis, or twenty drops of the tincture in
cinnamon water ; give a blue pill (grs. 5) every  night
for four or five nights.  Diuresis may often be estab-
lished by an emetic of ipecac, and  tartar emetic, or
by  a hydragogue carthartic  ; should these fail, give
squills, broom, spirit of  nitric  ether,  or Hollands and
water, or carbonate, nitrate, or acetate of potash ; or
decoction of horse radish  (Raver).  Diuretics do not
cure the disease, they can only relieve the dropsy.
  Try Seidlitz or Pullna  water ; cream of tartar in
half ounce doses  (Rayer)  : give five, seven, or nine
grains of gamboge, once every  two  days, triturated
with bitartrate of potash, to prevent griping.  Combat
the concomitant  affections  of the digestive organs
with creasote (Dr. Christison) ;  give it as a pill, one
drop of  creasote, two  grains  of rhubarb,  and one
grain of extract of gentian, for the mass ; or with the
sedative solution of opium ;  or with extract of opium
and nitrate of silver, half a  grain of each in a pill.
Apply sinapisms, turpentine epithems,  or a canthari-
des blister, externally ± sprinkle the blistered surface
with muriate of morphia ; check diarrhoea by chalk,
astringents, and opiates  ; or  give acetate of lead with
opium, or strychnine with opium.—Dr. Wood, p. 120.
  Incontinence of Urine.—<T/te result of stricture.)
Endeavor to remove or relieve the stricture by bougies
or catheters ; when  these fail, the lancctted stiletto,
Mr. Stafford's, may be sometimes resorted to with ad
vantage.  It is a dangerous instrument, and should be
used with great caution.  It should be  firmly pressed
against and then through the stricture, and after it be
withdrawn a catheter  should be  introduced (Law
rence). The tone of the bladder,after retention of urine,
may be restored by giving ergot of rye in two-scruples
or drachm dosos, twice a day, about an hour or two 
304
before the bladder begins to feel uneasy from the ac-
cumulation of water.—Braithwaite, p. 307.
  Lithotrity.—The best instrument for  performing
this operation with, is the two-branched curved instru-
ment of Baron  Heurteloup.  A new instrument, by
means of which a large  calculus may be ground to
powder in a few minutes, by oscillatory movements)
it is worthy of attention.—M. Leroy. p. 273.
  Prepare the patient for the operation by enjoining a
light  diet, abstinence from fermented liquors, clear
out the bowels, and order the hip-bath ; if the  urine
be acid, give alkalies  combined with uva ursi or Pe-
ruvian bark ;  if alkaline, give the mineral acids ;  and
if mucous deposits, infusion of Pareira brava ; enjoin
absolute  rest, and  use  occasionally  an  anodyne
enema.  The urethra is to be  gradually dilated, if
necessary ; when preternatural contraction of its or-
fice  exists, divide it.  Introduce the  catheter fre-
quently, as it  allays the irritability of the bladder and
urethra.  The objects of the operation are to reduce
calculi within the bladder to such a  size that the por-
tions  may  be removed  or  discharged through  the
natural passages, to effect this by such means as shall
excite no dangerous irritation in the urinary organs,
and to free the  bladder from  the  small fragments
which remain.  Great care should  be taken that the
case be a suitable one for the operation, as in some
cases cystotomy must be preferred.  Lithotrity may
be performed where the bladder is perfectly healthy
and the stone is  small;  and it is decidedly  advanta-
geous where  there  is phthisis or albuminuria.   It is
a great and valuable addition to chirurgical therapeia,
but cannot, be considered as a substitute for cystotomy.
since there are  numerous cases in which the  last
operation will prove the safest and most effectual.
  Cystotomy, for example, is preferable in boys before
the age of puberty ;  it  is so simple and  the urethra
is so small as not to admit of the lithotrite.  Cystotomy
is also preferable in  the female ; also where the cal-
culus has attained a very large size ;  also where the
prostate gland is enlarged, unless the calculus be of
very small size.—Dr, P. Crampton, p. 366.
   Prostate  Gland—Enlargement  of.—Charge  a 
305
 bougie with iodine, or iodide  of potassium, and than
 dip  it into melted tallow,  so  that a coating may be
 formed upon it:  then introduce  it up the  urethra to
 the part desired, and let it rest upon it until the tallow
 melts, and the iodine. &c,. comes in contact with the
 diseased part.  The preparation of iodine must at first
 be very mild ; a grain of iodide to the drachm of lard,
 gradually increased in strength as the patient  can
 bear it, to two, three, four, five, and even ten grains,
 or a soruple to the drachm  ; after this, add iodine to
 it, half a  grain,  gradually increased.  The bougie
 must be introduced with great care,—Mr. Stafford,
 p. 673.

     Affections  of the Organs  of Generation.

  Syphilitic  Affections.—(Chancre)—Wash  the
 part well with warm water, and then apply the solid
 nitrate of  silver; it will  completely  destroy  the af-
fection, if not more than  three days' standing.   If it
be a pustule, evacuate its contents, and the walls of
the pustule are to be well cauterized.   When there is
a chancre of the frenum, it is more readily  healed by
dividing it. and cauterizing the whole  of the divided
surface.  To check discharge,  apply a solution of
pure tanin.—two grs. to the ounce of water; or sul-
phate of zinc solution, in private practice, as the  for-
mer tells  tales by  staining the linen.  The caustic
should be re-applied as soon as the eschar is removed,
or about once in  twenty-four hours.  If  lint  have
been applied after  the caustic,  take  care  to soak it
well before you  remove it,  or the eschar may be de-
tached, and the part made  to bleed.   If the case be
esen early, one or two burnings  will suffice ; if  at a
more advanced period, it must be repeated at intervals
of twenty-four hours—for a week or  ten days, or as
long as we consider any virus is secreted by the sores,
which is known  by the ulcers remaining stationary,
and the surface being covered with a yellow pellicle :
 when becoming  healthy, granulations  spring up and
 the sore  heals.   Caustic  is not so efficacious  when
 the chancre is situated on the fraenum, orifice of the
 uretha, around the  prepuce, or on the fourohette, in 
306
the female :—enjoin rest and strict attention to clean-
liness, and avoid  rupturing the cicatrix.  (Acton.
p. 274.)
  Buboes.—Apply  a  blister the size of a crown for
twenty-four hours, then raise the cuticle, and apply
a pledget of lintof corresponding size, well saturated
with a solution of bichloride of mercury, (a scruple
of the salt to one ounce of  spt. vini  rectif,) ;  keep it
in situ from two to four hours,  and  then apply cold
applications for some hours ;   an eschar is formed,
which will be  thrown oft",  and the tumor will be dis-
persed.   (Malapert, p. 283.)
  Gonorhma.—Inject the uretha with a solution of
copaiba.  (Ricord. p. 294.)
  Chordee.—Give from 25 to 50 minims of the vinsem.
colchici, for several successive nights,   (p. 295.)
  Or, vincolchici, 3'j-; magnes.carbSj.;  iodide of po-
tassium, 3ss. ;  aquae 3vss.  A1.3J quartis horis sumend,
Or give a combination of iodide of potass and decoct.
sarze comp.  (p. 295.)
  Gleet.—Apply  the  following  ointment, which  an-
swers much better than the nitrate of silver: kino,
ten parts ;  sulphate  of zinc, one part;  lard twenty
parts.  (Dr. Leroy, p. 290.)
  Stricture.—Dilatation.—There are three  modes of
performing dilatation.  1.  Slow or permanent;  the
catheter is left in the urethra and changed every three
or four  days.  2.  Continuous or sudden ;  changing
the catheter every six or seven hours.   3. Temporary
or progressive ;  retaining the catheter or  bougie, from
five  minutes to one hour.  Never  employ force in
introducing a bougie, and when you increase the size
do not do it from day to day, but at the same sitting,
i. e., commence with that which passed freely the day
before.
  When a  bougie  cannot be passed,  but the urine
flows off, use Dr. Leroy's  apparatus for  keeping  the
pressure of a bougie constantly  against  the part;
or press the end of the instrument against the obstacle
for a quarter or half an hour daily, and after each
sitting, try to pass a small bougie: when these means
fail,  apply the caustic bougie.
  When the stricture produces complete retention of 
307
urine, endeavor to pass bougies in conjunction With
bleeding, baths, &c. : try the  application of tobacco
smoke;  should these  fail, press a  small catheter
against the obstacle for an hour.  Cut down upon the
urethra posterior to the obstacle, but should a  calcu-
lus be there  detained, cut through  the  rectum. If
necessary to puncture the bladder, do it through the
rectum.  M. Lallemand cuts down on the strictured
part itself.   (Dr. Leroy d'Etiolles. p. 286.)
  Secondary form of Syphilis.—Give the proto-iodide
of mercury, and should it occasion  irritation,  in the
bowels with diarrhoea, combine  it with opium.  Let
the diet be simple, avoiding all stimulants whether
solid or fluid ; the  diet, however, should not be debil-
itating  but nutritious.  Cold  and damp air is very
injurious ;  fresh air  is highly necessary.  (Ricord,
p. 280.)
   Tertiary form of Syphilis.—The  characteristic of
these symptoms, is there not being transmissible he-
reditarily.  They are manifested chiefly in the subcu-
taneous or submucous  cellular tissue, in the fibrous,
osseous,  cartilagcnous, muscular, or nervous tissues
and  in organs in their  locality. The remedy most to
be depended upon is mercury.   (Ricord, p. 280.)
  Parturition, and diseases  of Women.—Placental
Presentation.—Whatever the condition of the mother
merits, turn the child, and extract the placenta.  The
placenta should ne\er be detached first, unless the
danger to the woman is so great from exhaustion, as
to render turning  hazardous ;  or, unless there exists
some obstacle to the attraction  of the child,  either
from distortion of the pelvis or from tumors.
  Neither  delivery by turning,  nor detaching the
placenta, ought ever  to  be attempted until  the cer-
vix and os uteri will safely allow the introduction at
the hand.  Until this is the case, strict rest, the appli-
cation of cold, and  the  use of  the plug, will be re-
quired.
  Detaching the placenta will  be found the best  line
of practice.   1st,  in  severe  cases  of unavoidable
haemorrhage, with placenta previa, complicated  with
an os uteri so insufficiently dilated  and undilatable,
as not to allow of  turning with safety ; 2d, in many 
308
of the cases in which placental presentation is con-
nected with premature labor, and imperfect develop-
ment of the os and cervix uteri ;  3d, when the uterus
Is too contracted to allow of turning ;  4th. when the
pelvis or passages of the mother  are organically con-
tracted ; 5th, in cases of such extreme exhanstion of
the mother, as forbid immediate turning or forced
delivery j 6th, when the  child is dead, and when it is
premature and not viable.  (Drs. Simpson, Radford,
&c, p. 316.)
  Galvanism.—This powerful agent may be used to
induce or increase uterine action in cases of haemorr-
hage, before,  during,  and after  labor ;  in cases of
placenta previal  where it is  inexpedient to rupture
the membranes and turn ;  in internal haemorrhage,
depending upon uterine inertia.   Its  effects are in-
stantaneous and  much more to be depended upon
than ergot, although it is advisable to try the secale
first, and it will be found especially useful  in those
cases where  exhaustion  is so great as to render it
dangerous to deliver the  child in the  ordinary way.
(Mr. Dorrington.)
  In cases of accidental haemorrhage, in the  latter
months of gestation, where the os uteri is rigid and
nearly closed, and the flow  of blood  cannot be ar-
rested by ordinary means and more especially if there
be uterine inertia, galvanism will be useful.  In ap-
plying galvanism, one conductor should be passed up
the  vagina to the os  uteri,  in  which a moistened
sponge is introduced, and the other to  the abdominal
parietes, over the fundus  in order to pass the current
through the long diameter of the uterus, or they may
both be applied  externally  in the short  axis.  The
galvanic action should not be continued too  long,
and should be  interrupted so as to allow  the uterus
intervals of rest, and so  to  imitate nature's opera-
tions.   (Dr. Radford,  p.  334.)  Galvanism may also
be used as a dernier, ressort in haemorrhage during
the  first month of pregnancy.  (Mr. Wilson, p. 336.)
Electro-magnetism  may  be  applied  in  cases  of
uterine inertia during labor.   (Mr. Clark, p.  337.)
  Uterine Heemorrhage.—When danger to life is im-
minent, give opium freely ;  five grains for the first 
                       309

 dose, and two or three every hour or half hour after-
 wards, until the pulse  becomes distinct, the breath-
 ing easier, and the tossing about in bed allayed.  At
 the same time, give warm wine and  brandy, and ap-
 ply heat to the extremities.   (Dr. Griffin, p. 338.)
   Uterine Hczmorrhage after delivery.—In cases where
 on previous occasions, there has been  haemorrhage
 after the birth of the child, prepare an infusion of
 secale,  3j. to  3iv. of boiling  water, and when the
 child's  head has just  cleared the external orifice,
 give half of it [along with the powder] ; and  when
 the child is  entirely  expelled give  the remainder.
 (Dr. Bcatty, p.  338.)
   Give  ergotine in doses of two grains every two
 hours.  It has  been  found serviceable in cases  of
 uterine haemorrhage, whether acute or chronic, and
 dependent on a dynamic or anorganic cause.—Ebers,
 p. 339.
  When haemorrhage  becomes alarming, after the
 expulsion of the placenta,  turn the patient on her
 back, and grasp the  uterus firmly with the hand,
 through the abdominal parietes, until it contracts ;
 then take a small bowl or basin  capable of holding
 twelve  or fourteen ounces, having a thick smooth
 edge, and invert it over the body of the compressed
 uterus, taking care that the whole of it  is compress-
 ed within the  cavity  of the  basin,  which is to be
 confined in situ with the bandage.—Mr. Harvey,  p.
 339.
  Mr. Pretty has invented an apparatus by which he
 applies  pressure to the abdomen  to avert haemor-
 rhage after delivery ; it consists of a central and two
 side pads,  fastened  by a  strap, and tightened by
means of a torniquet;  it is portable and easy of ap-
plication.—Mr. Pretty, p. 340.
   Transfusion.—This should be adopted as a last re-
source when  the patient is sinking.  Mr. Brown re-
ports a  successful case in  which he performed  it,
where there was the  most alarming prostration, but
no extraordinary discharge of blood.—p. 341.
  Forceps, application  of, in Oceipito-posterior  Posi-
 tions.—In these cases the forehead should be  made
 to rotate backwards, and the occiput  forwards;  i. e., 
310
 the extraction of the head with forceps should be an
 exact imitation of the mechanism of the expulsion of
 the head by nature.—Dr. Simpson, p. 343.
  Forceps, how to  upply.—Having  ascertained  the
 exact position of the head, introduce  the  hand,  well
 smeared with lard, within the os uteri; search  for,
 and pass the fingers ov«jf the ear, so  as to_ guide the
 blade over that organ, whatever may be its position.
 When the instrument  is locked do not tie up the
 handles with tape, as it keeps a degree of pressure
 on the child's head not consistent with its safety.  In
 acting with  the forceps, always bear in mind the
 different axes of the pelvis, viz., of its brim, cavity,
 and ouLlet;  therefore keep the handles of the instru-
 ment back to the perineum, till some  part  of the oc-
 cipital bono  has cleared the arch of the pubis, and
 when this occurs,  gradually  bring  the  handles
 towards the pubis, when the chin  will pass over the
 perineum.   The three powers  of the  forceps  are
 Drought  into operation, viz., compression, traction,
 and leverage ; but compression ought never to  be
 made beyond diminishing the child's head to  three
 inches, indeed, instruments are seldom constructed
to admit of more.—Dr. Wilson, p. 349.
  Uterus, Inversion of, from short Funis.—When this
occurs, lose  no time  in separating tho placenta from
its attachments, and with clenched hand replace the
uterus ; taking care not to withdraw the  hand until
 the uterus contracts.—Mr. Smith, p. 359.
  Prolapsus Uteri.—Mr.  Eagland, surgical instru-
ment maker, of Leeds, has constructed a very effica-
 cious instrument for keeping the prolapsed womb in
position.
  Speculum Uteri.—Dr. Protheroe Smith's new specu-
lum  uteri consists  of a glass cylinder fitted to  an
outer one of metal, within which  it slides.  The in-
side of the metallic tube is  highly polished,  the re-
flecting powers of which are  increased by the  glass
cylinder ; the edge of the smaller or  uterine extre-
mity, is carefully rounded into a smooth ring, which
projects slightly from the inner surface.  In  its side
is cut an oval  aperture of about three  inches in
length and two in breadth, extending to within half 
311
an inch of the end of the cylinder.   Its other extre-
mity consists of a rim which projects about a line
from the external surface of the tube, having its sur-
face blackened for the absorption of  any  rays  of
light, which might otherwise be reflected,  and im-
pede the view by the dazzling effects.  There is also
a corresponding rim to the glass tube, by which it is
more conveniently  withdrawn  from  the  metallic
cylinder.—Dr. Smith, p. 352.
  Dr. Adam Warden  has  invented a new speculum
uteri, particularly adapted for examining the poste-
rior lip of the os uteri.—p.  353.
  Mr. Ferguson of King's College, has also  recom-
mended a speculum uteri, in which  the reflecting
surface, which is very brilliant,  cannot be  tarnished
by any  discharges or lotions.  It is a very cheap
instrument.—p. 356.
  Ricord's speculum uteri consists of two valves,
united about the middle point, allowing both extre-
mities to be widely opened ; the narrowest part  is
thus placed at the vulva.  To each valve a handle is
attached,  by which means space is gained, and the
light falls upon  the interior uninterruptedly, and
pressure upon them causes a dilatation of the two ex-
tremities which can be maintained, diminished or in-
creased by means of a screw.—p. 481.
  Menorrhagia.—Give oxide of silver  in half grain
doses twice or  thrice a day.  It will be of the most
use when the haemorrhage is of a secretive  charac-
ter, occasioned by local excitement, and not from the
rupture of blood-vessels,—Mr. Butler Lane, p. 103.
  Give  nitrate of silver internally.  Argent, nit., gr.
iij.; aquae distillat. 3ij ; solve.  Give ten drops three
times daily, and gradually increase the dose to fif-
teen drops.—Dr. Ditterich, p. 361.
  Pruritus  Vulva.—Apply thrice a day to the affect-
ed parts by means of a piece of sponge, the following
lotion;  Sodae borat., 3ss.; morphiae sulphat., gr. vj.j
aquas rosae distillat., 3viij.M, ft. sol.—p, 361. 
312
               Affections of Joints.

  Knee Joint.—Inflammation of Synovial Membrane.
 —Keep the  joint perfectly at  rest; for this purpose,
 when  the disease is chronic, apply splints of thick
 leather, one on each side  of the joint, keeping them
 in place with a bandage.  Steep the leather well in
 hot  water, so as to make it  exactly   fit  the  joint.
 When the cure  is  nearly  completed, the patient
 should  wear an elastic bandage, so as to allow of a
 little motion, within certain  limits, and the heel of
 his shoe should be raised a little, to keep the knee
 slightly bent.
  In the  acute  disease, use  general  antiphlogistic
 measures, as well  as the local abstraction of  blood.
 After giving  a  brisk  purgative,  then give twelve
 minims of vin. colchici in a saline draught  three
 times a day  ; in two or three days stop  its exhibition,
 and after an  interval of a day or two give it again ; it
 is most useful when there is a gouty diathesis, with
 lithates in the urine ; an occasional purgative is ne-
 cessary during the administration of the colchicum,
 and also small doses of blue pill  to keep up the se-
 cretion of bile which colchicum diminishes.   Give
 mercury so as to affect the system ;  this may be done
 not only in the gouty diathesis, but also where there is
 rheumatic inflammation, and combine it with opium,
 as in iritis.
  In chronic inflammation the same measures  as  in
 the acute, only not quite so active  ; leeches ; blisters,
 apply them in succession, or keep one open with savine
 cerate; give colchicum as an alterative, two grains
 of the  extract with as much blue pill, every night,
 and an aperient every third or fourth morning ; or
 give the acetous extract, with calomel and comp. ext
of coloc,  every second or third  night.  Give, also,
iodide of potassium in small doses, combined with al-
kaline  remedies.  In slight cases, use liniments  to
the  joint,  lin. vol. camph. and sp. terebinth. ; or olei
oliva? 3jss.;  acid sulph., jj. ;  and sp. terebinth. 3ss. :
or paint the knee with  a  solution of iodine.  When
 ulceration of the cartillages is going on give mer-
cury so as to affect the system,  calomel and opium 
313
 two or three times a day ; mere alterative doses will
 not do ; in a  few days the pain will be quite reliev-
 ed.—Sir B. Brodie, p. 185.
   Abscess.—Make a free opening, and keep the joint
 in a state of absolute repose, by  means of leathern
 splints, or by supporting it with pillows and cushions.
 The articular cartilages will have become absorbed,
 and recovery by anchylosis  is the result; the joint
 during  recovery must be  supported with leather
 splints : or if  the leg be bent on  the  thigh,  use  the
 screw instrument, with splints at the posterior part
 of the leg and thigh.—Sir B. Brodie, p. 188.
   Gouty Inflammation of.—Some of the smaller joints
 are affected first, and there is seldom  much  effusion
 Within the joint.—Give a grain of acet. ex. of colchi-
 chum, a grain of bue pill, and three  grains of ext. of
 hop, every night, with a gentle aperient every third
 or fourth morning ; after giving these pills for a fort-
 night,  stop them for two months, and then give them
 a fortnight again, and so on ;  give also a grain and a
 half, or two grains of iodide of potassium, with ten or
 twelve grains of bicarbonate of potash twice a day,
 for six or eight weeks at a time.   This system must
 be continued, with occasional intermissions, for one
 or two years, or even longer.  This chronic gouty
 affection is not  in itself dangerous, but it shows a
 bad constitution, and the person thus  affected is liable
 to other diseases.—Sir B. Brodie, p. 185.
  Scrofulous Disease of— Never abstract blood,  nor
 make  use of counter-irritation.  Here, as  in all dis-
 eases of joints, a state of perfect repose is necessary ;
 use the leather  splints.  As soon as the digestive or-
 gans are  brought into a proper  state, give  tonics,
particularly chalybeate tonics.  To children give the
vinum  fern of the old Pharmacopoeia, for three weeks.
and then omit it for ten days, and so on for several
years,  so as to  improve the weak constitution.   If
fever be produced, decrease  the dose, or omit it al-
together for a while ; or give the tinct. ferri mur.;
or the  syrup of iodide of iron ; or the latter and  the
vin. fern alternately.—When  you have a patient with
 whom  no form of iron will agree,  then give quinine,
 bark, or alkaline solution of  sarsaparilla ;  the latter 
314
Is very useful to delicate children.  Change ol air is
highly beneficial, the sea-side ;  when the joint has
become stiff", do not use  force  to straighten it ;  it
should be done gradually, by means of a screw appa-
ratus ; if an absce<s forms in the joint, continue the
use of the splints ; but have them lined with oil-silk.
If the disease have been  neglected, or it  has been
found impossible to save the joint, amputate as soon
as possible.  If, by examination with  a probe, it is
found that  there be a piece of dead bone  within the
joint, so that it cannot exfoliateVthe sooner the limb
is amputated the bettor.  Bony anchylosis takes years
for  its completion, so that if the  limb be bent there
will be plenty of time to get it into its proper place.—
Sir  B. Brodie, p. 190.
  Primary  Ulceration  of the Cartilages.—Keep the
joint perfectly at rest, and use setons, issues, blisters,
and counter-irritants.  The great remedy is mercury;
two grains of calomel and one-third of a grain of opi-
um, three times a day,  until the  gums are affected.
Where mercury cannot be  borne give sarsaparilla
and iodide of potassium ;  sarsaparilla should also be
given after the  course  of mercury.   Ung. hydrarg.
may be rubbed into the thighs  where it  cannot be
borna internally.—Sir B. Brodie, p. 191.
  Morbid Alteration of Structure of the Synovial Mem-
brane.—Apply pressure by means of several alternate
layers of diachylon plaster and bandage ;  and after-
wards by leather splints, and a  firm  bandage ;  at-
tend also to the general health.—Sir B. Brodie, p. 192.
  Loose Cartilages  in  the Knee.—Remove them  by
operation ; get the  cartilage fixed over the outer or
inner condyle, and while it is retained in  that situa-
tion, divide slowly the  skin, cellular membrane, fas-
cia,  ligaments, and  synovial membrane ;  hold the
knife with a loose hand, or the cartilage will be
pressed into  the joint;  lay  hold of it with a  tena-
culum, but should it recede within the joint, never
grope for it, but bring the edges of the wound  to-
f ether, and perform the operation at some other time,
  .valvular operation has been proposed.—Sir B. Bro^
die, p. 193.
  Hip-Joint, Inflammation of.—Tut the patient under 
315
 mercurial influence.   Before commencing treatment
 determine the probable duration of the disease, as the
 efficacy of the action of mercury depends much on
 the stage in which it  is used.—Dr. O'Ferrall, p. 194.
   Dislocations.—Instead of using extension by the
 hands of assistants in  reducing dislocations, make use
 of a little click wheel, fixed to the wall, and a rope
 attached to it; the extension is not only made more
 easily,  but much more gradually.—Mr. Terrey, p.
 202.
   Compound Dislocation of the Astragalus.—When it
 is necessary  to remove the astragalus,  or saw oft" the
 end of the tibia, in order to return the bones to their
 place, never  make a fresh incision to effect it, if there
 is already an extensive wound in another direction ;
 rather amputate the limb at once, the chances of re-
 covery will be so much greater.  [Sully.]  The  late
 Mr. Colles, of Dublin, was opposed to  amputation in
 compound dislocation of the  ankle joint; and when
 advisable, he thought it best to wait until the symp-
 tomatic  fever had subsided.—p. 200.
  Immobility of the Lower Jaw.—Keep up mechanical
 extension for a considerable period, gradually increas-
 ing it.   An excellent  instrument for this purpose has
 been  constructed by  Mr.  Gay, of Leeds,  under the
 direction  of Mr. Teale.  (See wood cut.)—Mr. T. P.
 Teale, p.  197.

             Affections of the Senses.

  Eye, Inflammation of—-Acute.—Bleed  and give nau-
 seating medicines, purgatives, and low diet, and stimu-
late the liver, kidneys,  and skin, to rid the fluids of
pernicious ingredients.  In the second stage, to pre-
vent or  arrest the consequences of inflammatory ac-
tion, give  mercury or  iodine, bark, colchicum, tur-
pentine, &c.  In the third stage, when  the inflamma-
tory action has subsided, apply belladonna, and give
 mercury or iodine in  smaller, doses, and for longer
  Ssriods, with local stimulation and cutaneous irrita-
  on.
  When the disease has been treated with mercury,
 and returns, try depletion and antimonials, with con- 
316
ftnement to bed, and low living, for two or three days
before you again resort to that remedy.  Give tartrate
of antimony or James's powder, so as at first to cause,
nausea, and  afterwards diaphoresis.   Mercury is the
sheet anchor, given so as just to affect the gums ;  at
first, give three grains of  blue pill, three g tains of
comoound colocynth  powder, and one-eighth or one-
tenth of a grain of tartrate of antimony three times a
day, for a couple of  days ; then five grains of blue
 Sill, with the same  quantity of antimony,  for two
 ays more ; and finally five grains of blue pill three
or four times a day.  If it affect the bowels, add a
little opium to it.  This produces a  mercurial effect
upon  the  system in  ieven or eight days.  Or two
grains of calomel and a quarter of a grain of opium
may be given every  four or six hours, if we wish to
affect the system sooner.   The  length of time we
are to continue the  mercury must be decided by its
effects.
  Iodine, turpentine,  colchicum,  and bark, are valu-
able where the inflammation is modified by spocifto
disease, or constitutional derangement, or where mer-
cury has already been given, or cannot with safety be
used.
  From the very commencement of  an  attack of iri-
tis, extract of belladonna should be used.  Mix it with
water until it acquires the consistence of cream, and
paint  the eyelid, brow, and upper part of the cheek
with it; let it dry, and then apply it  again, and cover
it with a little damp  linen, and keep it  moist by ap-
plying a lotion made with two drachms of the extract
to eight ounces of the water. If its application be not
found comfortable, it  need not be applied  more than
once or twice in twenty-four hours.   When its appli-
cation to the skin does not affect the pupil, drop a
little of the solution upon the conjunctiva,  even dur-
ing the inflammatory  attack ; its effects soon pass off.
It is best to apply it  in the morning.—Dr. Jacob, n.
308.                                         'r
  In the external forms of ophthalmia, apply an oint-
ment of oxide of silver, a drachm to the ounce.  This
is very analogous to Mr.  Guthrie's  black  oint-
ment.—(Mr. B. Lane, p. 103.) 
317
   Accidental Cataract.—Two  modes  of treatment)
 1st.—To allow absorption to take place ; the  inflam-
 mation to be reduced by leeches and mercurials, as
 in internal ophthalmia;  apply belladonna so as to di-
 late the pupil.
   2J.—Remove the fluid mass of cataract by extrac-
 tion of  the  lens  through  a small incision  in  the
 cornea (Barton and  Gibson) ; make the puncture at
 the temporal margin of the cornea with the extraction-
 knife,  or  with Mr. Walker's  instrument,  which
 combines the properties both of scoop and knife,  and
 oarry  the  point of  the instrument into the pupil,
 When  the  lens will  be discharged with the aqueous
 humor.—Mr. Walker, p. 314.
  Depression  of the Crystalline Lens.—The  lens
 should be disengaged from its capsule in depressing
it.  To accomplish this, introduce the cataract bis-
toury through the coats of the eye, about a line and
a half from the margin of the cornea; it penetrates
the vitreous humor,  and forms a breach in it, at the
proper  place  for the reception of the lens when
depressed ;  the point of the instrument directed
towards the lens, is  to be pushed across the eye to
its opposite side, then penetrate the posterior part of
the capsule, and, by drawing  it outwards, incise it
across  its middle ; then push the point of the needle
between the lens and tho iris,  its flat side placed on
the lower part of the lens, and  press it  backwards
and upwards,  then shift  the point of the needle for-
wards upon the lens, and this presses it  backwards
into the breach of the vitreous humor, from whence
it does not rise.—Dr. Watson, p. 314.
   Wounds of Eyelid.—If a large piece of skin be lost,
and the edges cannot be united, subsequent ectropium
is avoided oy making an incision  a quarter of an inch
from the edge of the wound,  which then allows  the
edges to be united.—p. 313.
  Fistula  Lachrymalis.—Dilate the nasal  duct  by
means  of Morgan's  sound and catheter;  pass the
sound along the floor of the nose, directing  its point
outwards, until it lies fairly below tne inferior turbin-
ated bone,  then direct  the point of the instrument
upwards, and move it  gently backwards  and for- 
318
wards  along the inferior surface of the turbinated
bone, until a little cartilaginous ridge is felt—this is
the orifice of  the duct;  depress the handle ol  the
instrument and  its  point glides into the duct.  No
force must be  used, as the bony structures  are very
delicate ;  repeat it daily until the resistance is over-
come, and then keep the passage clean  by injections
of warm water. When well, the patient should be
taught to  pass the instrument, to clear away collec-
tions of mucus.  This instrument supersedes the use
of the style.—p. 312.
  Skin Diseases.—Chronic  Eczema of the Face.—
Give three or four drops of liq.  arsenicalis three
times a day, and cover the part day and night with
lint  spread with zinc ointment, or with ung. hyd.
precip. alb. ;  or. give five grains of Plummer's pill
every  second  night,  and  a saline  draught twice a
day, giving at the same time a course of Harrowgate
waters ;   regulate  the diet, avoiding  all stimuli.
Where the temperament of the patient is irritable,
arsenic and cantharides aggravate the disease.
  It often  attacks the ears of young  females in whom
menstruation is irregularly performed ;  this function
must be established by the usual means ; apply bread
and water poultices to the part during the night and
cover it with  rags  spread over with zinc  ointment
during the day ; and  give ten grains of pil. aloes c.
myrrh, every  second night at bed time.  After using
these means for a week or two, give minims of tinct.
of cantharides, and thirty of liq. potass, twice a  day.
—Mr. Erichsen, p. 297.
  Eczema of the Scrotum, Penis and Anus.—Cover the
parts with lint, wet with lead lotion,  and  enclose them
with oil-silk, in order to keep off the air, and to pre-
vent urine getting upon the part.  Give a small  dose
of hy dr. c. creta at night, and a dose of castor oil in the
morning ; in a few  days  substitute  zinc ointment for
the lotion, and give small  doses of liq. potassae, and
five grains each of calomel  and magnesia, twice a
day.   If it be of long standing, enjoin  a striot  diet,
abstinence from fermented liquors, salted and heating
articles of food, and give 20 minims  of liq. arsenici et
hydrarg.  iodidi twice a day, with five grains of Plum- 
319
 mer's pill at bed time,  and apply a mixture  of zinc
 ointment and the ung. plumbi acetat. to the parts by
 means of a piece of lint cut to the proper shape.   The
 treatment must be persisted in for a length of time.
 A little extract of belladonna rubbed down with the
 ointment, often succeeds in allaying the irritation.—
 Mr. Erich sen, p. 299.
   Eczema of the Scalp.—If occurring to a child, other-
 wise healthy, about the period of dentition, be careful
 how  you  check  the  eruption.  Cut the hair, apply
 bread and water poultices, and subdue irritation by
 application  of rags dipped in olive  oil, or smeared
 with zinc  ointment; or sprinkle the  part with the
 nurse's milk.  Give small doses of hydrarg.  c. creta
 and castor  oil, and  lance  the gums, if necessary.
 Fluid magnesia is often  useful.  If it becomes  inve-
 terate;  wean the  child on beef-tea,  broth, and a
 nutritious diet, and give mild tonics, a few drops of
 tincture of ammonio-chloride of iron, or iodide of iron,
 twice a day (from half a grain to two grains of the
 latter) ;  a great part of the treatment consists in
 keeping the scalp so covered as to prevent the access
 of air.
   When it becomes chronic  and inactive, and pre-
 sents a furfuraceous  appearance, have  recourse to
 gentle stimulants ;  a lotion composed of from one to
 two drachms of  sulphuret of potass, either alone or
 combined with an equal quantity of the carbonate of
 the same alkali, in a pint  of plain or lime  water ;
 wash the head with this lotion three times a day ; at
 the same time, every night after  the last application
of the lotion, apply an ointment composed of from a
scruple to half a drachm of carbonate of potass to an
ounce of lard, or one of creasote in the same  propor-
tion, or of white  precipitate ; or use the nng. hydr.
nit. dil., or the sulphur ointment,  or a mixture of this
and tar or creasote ointment.  Do not  use the oiled-
silk cap ; it confines the perspiration andsoddens the
skin, producing a state of passive conge^ion which
 we wish to get rid of.—Mr. Erichsen. p. 301.
  Chronic Eczema of the Hands.—In the early stages
 apply water-dressing  by means of oiled-silk gloves
or finger  stalls, and  at a more advanced  period, a 
320
solution of nitrate of silver (grain j. to the ottnoe),
instead of the water-dressing ;  or a solution or oar'
bonate of soda, (grain ij. to iv. to the ounce) ; or tM
following lotion :  acid hydrocyan. 3»». ;  •'-mel oxlOi,
3j. ;  aquae  roeas, 3viij. ;  or  cover the hand with tne
ung. hydrarg. precip.  alb. ; either alone or mixed
with citrine ointment.
  If the disease only occupy a small patch, cover it
with a slioe of lemon.   Its spreading may be chocked
by applying the solid nitrate of silver around the part.
Constitutional treatment must  also be adopted :  re-
move any gastric, intestinal, or uterine disturbance,
and  give  vegetable bitters, nitric acid diluted, or
small doses of bichloride of mercury ; the two latter
may be given in infusion of bark.  If two disease be
of very long standing, give Fowler's or Donovan's
solution.   The  hands should be kept at rest.—Mr.
Erichsen. p. 304.
  Chronic.—Apply tar externally ; give it also inter-
nally ; in capsules.—p. 805.
  Pityriasis.—External  applications of  a soothing
nature ; baths medicated with  mucilage of linseed,
milk, yolk of egg, Sic.; at the same  time give demul-
cents, diuretics, &.C., to increase the renal secretion.
Cover the  parts over with glycyrrhine ;  it remains
fluid, and resists evaporation under any temperature
to which tho body is exposed.   It is abundant in the
refuse of the soap-maker.—Mr. Startin, p. 306.
  Itch.—Immerse  the hands of the  patient in an al-
coholic  solution  of stavesacre  for  half an  hour
together, two or  three times, and the acarus scabiei
will be  destroyed.  (Dr. Burgess.)  Use a lotion
made of an ounce of sulphate of copper to a pint of
water; wash off  the scabs before  using it.  It is an
almost certain  cure.   (Mr.  Loyd.)   Use a lotion of
iodide of potassium in  the day, and  sulphur ointment
at night;  a cure may be expected in seven days.
The lotion should be  3i- of iodide  to 3viij., or 3*vj.
of fluid.—Dr. Ward, p. 307.
  Warts.—Apply hydrochlorate of ammonia dissolved
In water, or hydrochlorate of lime; persist in their
application for some time.—p. 308.
  Syphilitic Alopacia.—Cut the  hair close, and use 
321
  warm baths ; and then apply the following liniment *
  Equal parts of rectified spirit, Eau de Cologne, and
  castor oil: or equal parts of honey-water and tinct.
  of cantharides.  Should little red spots or blisters be
  produced, cease the application for a short time.
   Lichen,  Lepra,  Psoriasis,  Impetigo,  trc.—Frequent
  warm baths, taking care to soak the head well ; and
  cover the spots night and morning with  olive oil,
  3ss.: citrine omit. 3i. ; M.  Make a liniment, or use
 the following ointment:  purified beef marrow, six-
 teen parts ; sulphur ointment, sixteen parts ; turpeth
 mineral, two to four parts ; essence of lemons suf-
 ficient to scent it.—Ricord.
   Mucous  Tubercles.—Use a dilute solution of chloride
 of sodium ;  dry the parts  and sprinkle them over
 With calomel.—Great  cleanliness is necessary ; do
 not use ointments.
   Eczma Impetiginoides.—Cut the hair close.and apply
 water dressing, or lin* dipped in an aqueous solution
 of opium ;  do not apply ointments.  It  should  be a
 rule never to apply greasy substances to any eruption
 attended with oozing of fluid, since it mixes with the
 secretion,  becomes rancid, forms a crust, the edges
 of which become excoriated,  and  what was an effect,
 becomes a cause, of irritation.  Paint  gummata and
 nodes with tinct. of iodine : it may also be applied to
 unhealthy  tertiary ulcers.
   Give internally in secondary  forms  of syphilis,
 iodide of potassium or mercury ; some prefer the
 former, as Dr. Williams, others the latter, as Sir B.
 Brodie.  The following should be  our guide in giving
 the iodide of mercury : Secondary symptoms occur-
 ing after a course of mercury, will be benefitted by
 a course of  iodide of potassium.  Secondary symp-
 toms  occurring  where  mercury has not been used,
 will not yield to the iodide, but will to mercury. In
 order to prevent the iodide from causing pain at the
 pit of the stomach, or heat at the back of the throat
soon after swallowing it,  dissolve two drachms in
three ounces of water, and let the patient take a tea-
spoonful of this solution night and morning in a large
cup of tea, and  the same quantity in half a  pint of
beer,  or other fluid, at mid-day ; the dose to be con- 
32-'
tinued and  increased  according to  circumstances.
It is of no use increasing the dose, or indeed of con-
tinuing  this remedy beyond a week  or ten davs, if
no amendment is visible.   If mercury has not been
givon for the  primary symptoms, begin with it im-
mediately when secondary s^ mptoms appear.  Ricord
gives the pure mineral, but the hydr. c. crcta will
answer best.  If the organs of digestion be impaired,
use friction ; direct the size of  a hornc bean of ung.
hydr. to be smeared on the inside of each calf of tho
leg every night; do not rub it in, as you irritate the
hair bulbs by doing so, and you produce subsequent
tenderness.  Direct your patient  to  sleep  in old
drawers, so as to keep tjic bed clean.  Do  not use
the ointment to the  thighs,  as is  usually recom-
mended ; it gets between the thigh and the  scrotum,
producing eczema ; it also dirties the patient's linen.
and excites the attention  of the  washerwoman.  Get
the patient firmly under its influence, before you dis-
continue the use of mercury.—Acton, p. 271.

                   Toxicology<

  Poisons.—Purified Animal Charcoal, an Antidote to
all Vegetable and some Mineral Poisons.—This sub-
stance may bo used as an antidote to  opium and  its
active principles, morphia. &c. ; nux vomica and  its
active principles,  strychnia and hrucia: henbane,
deadly nightshade, bitter-sweet,  thorn-apple, tobacco.
hemlock, bitter-almonds,  prussic acid, the  aconites,
&c. &c, in fact to all  vegetable  poisons ; to animal,
also, cantharides.   The carbo  animalis putificatus of
the pharmacopoeia should be used, and in the propor-
tion of half an ounce to  a grain of morphia, strych-
nia, 8tc.   It combines with and renders inert vegeta-
ble and animal substances, and absorbs some  mineral
poisons, especially arsenic, and renders them harmless,
and exerts no injurious effects on the body.
  It should be  rubbed in  lukewarm  water,  so  as to
form a fluid of slight consistency, and thus given in
quantities of from one to  four ounces.   Emetics also
should be given ; ipecacuanha, however, will not do,
as the charcoal renders  it inert.  Give sulphate  of 
323
iinc in scruple or half drachm doses, or use the
stomach pump, and then give more of the charcoal.
  Might not this substance be tried to prevent the in-
jurious effects of animal poisons, such as rabies, sy-
philis, poison of serpents, Sec, applied in the form of
poultice to the parts ?—Dr. Garrod, p. 142.
  Prussic Acid,  Poisoning by.—Dash cold water on
the patient; apply ammonia to  the nostrils, and heat
to the spine and feet;  give  an injection containing
tincture of a^safoetida, use  friction with a flesh-brush
to the skin ; and as soon as the  jaws become relaxed,
and the patient  can  swallow,  give  an emetic, and
afterwards some weak brandy and water, and  strong
coffee.—Dr. Gray, p. 145.
  Cause the patient to inhale the fumes of nmnionia,
when he has ceased to be able to swallow.—Mr Hicks,
p. 146.
  Opium. PoiiOning by.—After the stomach has been
well evacuated, should  the vital energies sink, make
use of electro-magnetism ; pass the  current through
different parts of the body, and  gradually increase its
power until it reaches its maximum  intensity.  Con-
tinue its use for a considerable period, until sensibility
is not  only evident but  complete.—Mr. Colahan,
p. 154.

   Materia Medica  and General Therapeutics*

  Aq.uje Copaib.e vel  CrsEB.c—1.  Ol. copnibae. or
cubebs. two ounces;  water, five gallons and a half;
draw over from three  to four gallons.  2.   Oil of
copaibiE, or cubebs, two ounces ; magnesia carb. six
drachms ;  rub together, and  add four gallons or less
of water; filter.
  Saccharised Caustic Solution of the Oils of Copaiba
or Cubebs.—Oil of copaiba;, or cubebs,  one drachm ;
caustic potttsh or soda, half an  ounce ;  white  sugar,
six drachms.   Twenty-four ounces of water to be
added gradually.
  Saponiform Solution of these Oils.—Oil of copaibce
or cubebs,  two ounces  caustic  solution of potasn  or
soda, one ounce.   Rub together in a mortar, and add
water as may be required^ 
324
  These forms are not attended with tho gastric  and
nephritic irritation usually met with while adminis-
tering copaibas or cubebs.—Dr. Cattell. p. 294.
  Bromine, a subtitute for iodine.—Where it is wished
to substitute bromine  for the  tincture of iodine, use
bromine one part, distilled water forty parts, and give
from five to six drops in aomo aqueous vehicle three
or four times daily ; for external use, make the solu-
tio, four times as strong ris this.
  Bromide  of  Potassium.—Dose from four to eight
grains three times a day ; for an ointment, rub four
parts' with thirty-two parts of lard.
  Bromide of Barium.—Dose  from one to five grains
three times a day.
  Bromide of Calcium.—Dose from three to tengrains
iu a pill with conserve of roses.
  Bromide of Iron.—Dose from one to three grains in
a pill, with conserve of roses and gum arabic.—p.  172.
  Dioitaline.—This substance  may be given wher-
ever digitalis is indicated ; its  advantage is, that  it
can always be exactly known what quantity of active
principle is being employed.—p. 173.
  Stramonicm Cigars are said to be a good remedy
for asthma, p.  174.
  Amputation at the Middle of the Leg.—The mortal-
ity attenriing the operation performed just below the
knee, is much greater than that lower down; it  is
also much more painful and not so easily performed ;
whilst in the latter  case there  is insured to the pa-
tient the use of the  knee-joint.   The two best  meth-
ods of amputating the leg below the knee, are by the
double circular and anterior and posterior flap opera-
tion.  In doing either, take  care  to leave sufficient
muscle to cover the bones; and in the latter opera-
tion,  the anterior flap, composed entirely  of skin,
should be at least half a diameter in length,  and the
projecting  ridge of  the tibia should be pretty deeply
sawn off in a slanting direction.  The middle  of the
leg or just below it, is the  best point at which the
bones can be sawn.—Dr. Lawrie.  p. 202.
  Venous Heemorrhage during Amputation.—Apply a
bandage from the extremity of the limb nearly  to the
point at which it is to be amputated : it must beappli- 
                      325


 ed carefully and exactly, and with all bearable firm-
 ness.—Dr. Hannay, p. 205.
   Circular Amputation.—Let an assistant dissect back
 the skin on one side, whilst the operator docs the same
 on the other ; this shortens materially the most pain-
 ful and unseemly part of the operation.—Dr.  Hannay,
 p. 206.
  Sutures  after Amputation.—If  the parts  will not
 meet without dragging or putting on the stretch, do
 not use sutures, and  never pass them through the
 muscular structure.—Dr. Hannay, p. 206.
  First Dressing after Amputation.—Give thirty or
 forty minims of laudanum  before the first dressing
 after amputation, particularly of a large extremity ;
 it alleviates the shock which the nervous system  is
 sure to receivo ; give it half an hour before the dress-
 ing.—Dr. Hannay, p. 206.
  Ulcer.—To an irritable ulcer apply oxide  of silver
in the form of ointment of powder.—Mr. Butler Lane,
p. 103.
  Sore Nipples.—Apply ung. argenti oxidi,  3i. to
 the ounce.—Mr. Butler Lane, p. 103.
  Toothache: New remedy for .—Cola saturated so-
 lution of camphor in aether, to which a few  drops of
 liquor ammonia are added.—M. Cottereau, p. 324.
  Caries of the Teeth.—Scrape out the entire  of the
 softened carious part, and rub its interior with a sa-
 turated solution of nitrate  of silver, or with  pulve-
 rised nitrate made wet.  p. 197.
  Pkeumonia.— The treatment consists of 1st. Subdu-
 ing inflammatory action  by moderate bleeding (six-
 teen to twenty ounces), at the beginning of the at-
 tack, followed by three or four grs. of calomel and
 one  gr. opium, and if  crepitant rale persist,  repeat
 the bleeding, and give tartar emetic  in  full  doses,
viz., one or one and a half grains every three or four
hours, making the  interval  afterwards six or eight
hours.  Give the bitter almond emulsion as a seda-
tive, or hydrocyanic acid.  2d. Preventing deposition
by exciting the  capillaries, by giving  hyd.  c. creta,
gr. iv. vel v., or calomel, gr. j. in each interval of the
antimonial, so as to produce a fair constitutional im-
pression short of ptyalism.  Blister with caution.  3d. 
32b'
 Guard  against relapse on  well-known principles.
 (Dr. A. T. Thomson, p. 71.)
  Aphonia,  Chronic.—Emetics,  aperients, merou-
 tials, iodide of potassium, cinchona, and acidulated
 astringent gargles were  given five months unsuc-
 cessfully, and it was afterwards cured in three weeks
 oy the inhalation of iodine from a WoulfT's  bottle for
 fifteen minutes twice a day. and a sulphate of quinine
 mixture.   (Mr. Monks, p.  132.)
  Cholera (Asiatic).—To promote healthy secretion,
 and  allay pain, irritation, and  spasm.  Give calomel
 and  Dover's  powder  freely, until the vomiting and
 purging are restrained. (Mr.  Clark, p. 83.)
  Take thirty grains  of sesqui-carbonate of soda or
 bicarbonate of potash, put iuto a tumbler glass, and
 add a wine glass of water and a little syrup.  Then
 dissolve  twenty grains of tartaric  or citric acid in
 half a wine glass of water, and let  the patient drink
 it off immediately.  Lemon juice may be substituted
 for the citric acid.  The carbonic acid is said to act
 as an antidote to the poison in the system.   (Dr. Par-
 kin, p.  84.)
  First give calomel, rhubarb, aloes, aa.  gr. x. ft. bo-
lus ;  then liq. ammon. m xv.; and repeat in half hour
doses if rejected.  Effervescing draughts, soda water,
 liq.  ammoniae externally  over the chest, abdomen,
and upper and lower  extremities as a  rubefacient,
vinegar and water to  tho head.  Convalescent Treat-
ment.—A laxative after the  second or third day, and
tonics for a week afterwards.   Use opium cautiously.
 For the spasms or cramps, stretch the lower extrem-
ities, taking hold of heel and toes, and bend the toes
and foot towards the patient  as he lies, gently and re-
 eatedly.   Use also shampooing.  (Oliapod, of Ma-
 ras, p. 86.)
  DiARRHtEA.—Try acetate of lead for obstinate and
peculiar diarrhosa, accompanying uterine  phlebitis
 and  peritonitis.   This medicine  seems  to act  by
 checking the peristaltic actidn of the intestines, and
 allaying pain by blunting the sensibility of the mu-
 cous membrane.  (Dr. Smyth,  p. 80.)
  Dysentery.—Battley's  solution  of  secale, one
 drachm;  tinct. of muriate  of  iron, one  drachm:
§ 
327
 water,  six  ounces.  Mix,  and give  a quarter part
 every four hours.  (Mr. Gervis, p. 87.)
  Gonorrhoea.—Gonorrhoea has six  regions  as its
 seat itr the urethra.  1.  Balanic, or the portion within
 and just behind  the  glans  penis.  2.  Spongic, or the
 portion extending from the glans penis to the bulb.
 3. Bulbic. or the portion situated about the bulb, and
 to the membranous portion.  4. Membranic, the whole
 membranous or muscular portion.  5. Prostatic,  or the
 part involved by the prostate gland.  6. Cystic,  when
 the specific  poison affects the bladder.
  Destroy its  existence as quickly  as possible, as
 there is no  fear  of  stricture, if no phlegmonous in-
 flammation.  Take six to  twelve copaiba  capsules
 daily, or one to two  oz. of cubebs.  Use an injection
 often to fifteen grs.  arg. nit. aq. distillat. 3j-  Do not
 mix copaiba and cubebs in one  preparation, or give
 them together.
  1.  Where there is active inflammation, use active
 antiphlogistic  measures, baths,  and  laxatives, and
when subdued as aboye.
  2.  Where dysuria, apply leeches in perineo, cool
 lavements, general baths.  If it continue  very dis-
 tressing, use an elastic catheter of moderate size.
  3.  Open abscesses as  early as'the matter is well
 formed.
  4.  Vesical tenusmus ; inject per rectum aq. 3iv.,
 tinct. opii. 20 v. 30 drops.
  6.  In  commencing  gleet,  inject ter die aq. dist.
 3vij. zinc, sulph. plumb, s. acet. aa. wj.
  6'  In chronic gleet, if no particular thickening or
 stricture, use wine, tannin, alum, or iodide of iron
 \.\q. dist. 3viii.. iod. ferri gr. ij. ad. iv.), injections.
  'njections with copaiba  or cubebs are  generally
ust '»ss.
  7.  Epididymitis, or inflammation of epididymis, use
a suspensory  bandage.  N.  B. Be  careful  not to
confound  orchitis with  epididymitis.  (M. Ricord,
p. 213.)
  Puerperal  Fever.—Endeavor to  throw off  the
 morbific specific matter, and  sustain the powers of
 life : give diaphoretics  and stimulants according< to
 the  stage of the disease.  Adopt every precaution 
328.
•gainst propagation;  cease to  attend midwifery at
the same time with cases of malignant or severe ery-
sipelas ; observe rigid ablution  of the hands, either
With  simple water,  or  chlorinated ; change  gar-
ments, or expose thorn to a free atmosphere or high
temperature, or absent yourself so as to obtain an en-
tire purification, at the"same time using warm baths
and other alterative and purifying means.  (Dr. Ped-
dle, p. 43.) 
APPENDIX.
         Dr.  Ure's Galvanic Experiments.

   " A middle-sized, athletic, and extremely muscular
 man, about thirty years of age, was the subject of the
 following highly interesting experiments.  He was
 suspended from the gallows nearly an hour, and made
 no convulsive struggle  after he dropped ; while a
 thief, executed along with him, was violently agitat-
 ed for  a considerable time.  He was brought to the
 anatomical theatre of our university in  about ten
 minutes after he was cut down.  His face had a per-
fectly natural aspect, being neither livid nor tume-
 fied ; and there was no dislocation of his neck.
  " Dr. Jeffrey, the distinguished professor of anato-
 my, having on the preceding day requested me (says
 Dr. Ure,) to perform the galvanic experiments, I sent
 to his theatre, with this view, next morning, my mi-
 nor voltaic battery, consisting of 270 pairs of four inch
 plates, with wires of communication, and pointed me-
 tallic rods with insulating handles, for the more com-
 modious  application of the electric power.  About
 five minutes  before the police  officers arrived with
 the  body,  the battery  was charged  with a dilute
nitro-sulphuric acid, which speedily brought it into a
state of' intense action.  Tho dissections were skil-
fully executed by Mr. Marshall, under the superin-
tendence of the professor.
  " Exp.  1. A large incision was made into the nape
of the neck, close below the occiput.  The  posterior
half of the  atlas vertebra was then removed by bone
forceps, when the spinal  marrow was brought into
view.  A profuse flow of liquid blood gushed from
the wound, inundating tho floor.   A considerable in- 
330
cision was at the same time  made  in the left hip,
through tho great gluteal muscle, so  as to bring tho
sciatic nerve into sight; and a small cut was made
in the heel.  From neithor of these did any olooa
flow.  Tho pointed rod connected with  one  end ot
the battery, was now placed in contact with the spi-
nal marrow, while the other rod was applied to the
sciatic nerve.  Every muscle of tho body was imme-
diately agitated with convulsive movements, resem-
bling a violent shuddoring from cold.  The left side
was most powerfully convulsed at each  renewal of
the electric contact.  On moving the second rod from
the hip to  the heel, the  knee being previously bent,
the leg was thrown out with such violence as nearly
to overturn  ono  of the assistants, who  in vain at-
tempted to prevent its extension.
  '• Exp. 2. The left phrenic nerve was now laid bare
at the outer edge of the sterno-thyroideus muscle, from
three to four inches above the clavicle ; the cutaneous
incision having been made  by  the side of the sterno-
cleido mastoideus.  Since this  nerve is distributed to
the diaphragm, and  since it communicates with the
heart  through  the  eighth  pair, it was expected, by
transmitting the galvanic  power along with it, that
the respiratory process would  be renewed.  Accor-
dingly, a small incision having been made under the
cartilage of the seventh rib, the point  of the one insu-
lating rod was brought  into contact  with the great
head of the diaphragm, while the other point was ap-
plied to the phrenic nerve  in the neck.  This mus-
cle, the main agent of respit ition, was instantly con-
tracted, but with less for ■<" U.an was expected.  Sat-
isfied, from ample experience ,n the living body, that
more powerful effects can  be  produced  in galvanic
excitation, by leaving the extreme  communicating
rods in close contact with the parts to be operated on,
while the  electric chain or circuit is completed by
running the  end of the wires along the top  of the
plates in the last trough of either pole, the other wire
being steadily immersed iu the last cell of the oppo-
site pole,  I had  immediate recourse to this method.
The success of it wag  truly wonderful.  Full, nay,
laborious,  breathing  instantly  commenced.  The 
331
chest heaved, and fell; the belly was protruded, and
again collapsed, with the relaxing and retiring dia-
phragm.  This process was continued, without inter-
ruption,  as long as I continued  the  electric  dis-
charges.
  " In the judgment of many scientific gentlemen who
witnessed the scene, this respiratory experiment was
perhaps the most striking ever made with a philoso-
phical apparatus.  Let it also be remembered, that for
full half an hour before this period, the body had been
well nigh drained of its blood, and the spinal marrow
severely  lacerated.  No pulsation could  be  per-
ceived meanwhile at the heart or wrist; but it  may
be supposed, that but for the evacuation of  the blood
—the essential stimulus of that organ—this phenome-
non might also have occurred.          ....
  " Exp  3. The supra-orbital nerve was laid bare in
the forehead, as it issues through the  supra-ciliary
foramen, in the eyebrow : the one conducting rod be-
ing applied to it, and the other to the  heel, most ex-
traordinary grimaces were exhibited every time that
the electric  discharges were  made, by running the
wire in my hand along the edges of the last trough,
from the 220th to the 270th  pair of plates :  thus fifty
shocks, each greater than  the preceding  one, were
given in two seconds.  Every muscle in his counte-
nance was simultaneously thrown into fearful action ;
rage  horror, despair, anguish,  and ghastly  smiles,
united their hideous expression in the murderer s
face, surpassing far the wildest  representations of a
Fuseli or a Kean.  At this period several of the spec-
tators were forced to leave the apartment from terror
or sickness, and one gentleman fainted.
  " Exp 4  The last galvanic experiment  consisted
in transmitting the electric power from  the spinal
marrow to the  ulnar nerve, as it passes by the inter-
nal condyle at the elbow : the fingers now moved
nimbly, like those  of a violin performer ;  an assist-
ant, who tried to close the  fist, found the hand  to
open forcibly, in spite of his  efforts.  When the one
rid was applied to  a slight incision in the tip> of the
forefinger, the fist being previously  clenched, the
finger extended instantly; and from the convulsive 
332
agitation of the arm, he seemed to point to the differ-
ent spectators, some of whom thought he had come
to life."
            Matteucci's Experiments.

  " Animal Electricity.—The highly interesting elee-
ti^r^iyllological researches of Professor Matteucci,
of Pisa, have recently excited considerable attention;
the following are the chief facts established by his
experiments :—• 1st, Musclo is a better conductor of
electricity than nerve, and nerve conducts better than
brain ;  the conducting power of muscle may be taken
as four times greater than that of brain or nerve.
  2d. In the muscles of living  animals, as well as of
those recently killed,  an  electric  current  exists,
which is directed from the interior of each muscle to
its surface.  The duration of this muscular current
corresponds with that of contractility : in cold-blooded
animals, therefore, it is greatest; in mammalia and
birds it is very brief. Temperaturo has  a considera-
ble influence on the intensity of the current, a small
amount of electrity being developed in  a cold medi-
um, a larger one when the medium  is  moderately
warm.   Any circumstances which enfeeble the frogs
(the  animals experimented  on), and  derange their
general nutrition, will diminish the power of the mus-
cles to generate electricity, as they also impair the
contractile force. The muscular current appears to
be quite independent of the nervous system.  It is
uninfluenced by narcotic poisons  in moderate doses,
but is destroyed by large doses, such as kill the ani-
mal.  The  development  of this  muscular current
seems  evidently to  depend on the chemical action
constantly taking place as an  effect of  the changes
accompanying  nutrition ; these organic changes, in
short, give rise to an electric current, just as do the
chemical changes  attending the  mutual reaction of
inorganic materials, such as the reaction between a
plate of metal, and an acidulated fluid in  the ordinary
* Med. Chir. Rev., April, 1846. 
333
voltaic pile.  That considerable chemical changes at-
tend the process of nutrition in muscle, seems evident
when we consider the constant supply and waste of
material of which it is the seat, and the evolution of
sensible heat which accompanies its contraction ; in
this way the generation of electricity can be readily
accounted for ;  the muscular fibre represents the me-
tal acted on in the arrangement of the voltaic appara-
tus, and the arterial  blood corresponds to the acidu-
lated fluid.  The surface of the muscle,  which is
more or less  tendinous,  and  therefore  different in
structure and in function from the interior, represents
the second plate of metal used in the voltaic appara-
tus, which does not suffer  chemical action, but which
only serves to form the circuit.  The direction of the
muscular current, therefore, from the interior to the
surface of  the muscle is  just such as might be ex-
 Sected, supposing it  to be due to a chemical action
 iking place in the interior of the muscle.
  " 3d. Another  result obtained by M. Matteucci, is
the proof of the existence in frogs of an electric cur-
rent, distinct from the muscular current; it proceeds
from the feet to  the head,  and is peculiar  to the Ba-
trachian reptiles.
  " 4th. Some curious results were  obtained by ap-
plying electricity in various ways upon nerves.   Up-
on making some experiments on the sciatic nerves of
rabbits, he found that upon closing the circuit of the
direct electric current, or  the current directed from
the brain to the  nerves, contractions in the muscles
of the  posterior limbs were produced, whilst upon
opening this circuit marked  signs of pain, with con-
traction of the  muscles of the back, and feeble con-
tractions of the posterior limbs, were  caused.  Upon
closing the circuit of the inverse current, or that di-
rected from the nerves to  the brain, signs of pain,
contractions of the muscles  of the back, and feeble
ones of the posterior limbs, were produced ; upon
opening it, contractions  of the posterior limbs were
caused.
  •• It will not be misplaced to notice here the marked
analogy between the actions of the electrical organ
of the torpedo   and  those of muscular fibre, which 
334
 Matteucci's interesting experiments illustrate.  Both
 are organized to act in a particular way ;  the one to
 developo electricity without any  visible  change In
 itself; the other to contract,  with a demonstrable
 evolution of both heat  and electricity.  Both will
 manifest their peculiar  phenomena by direct irrita-
 tion,  or  by indirect irritation  through the  nerves.
 Both  are brought under tho control of the will by the
 nerves ;  the section of which paralyses the influence
 of the will over  both, but does not destroy the pe-
 culiar power of either.  In the  electrical fish, irrita-
 tion of the electrical lobe  of the brain is capable of
 exciting  a  discharge of' the organ, just as irritation
 of a segment  of the spinal cord causes contraction
 of the muscles supplied by  it.  A current  of  electri-
 city transmitted through the electrical organ or its
 nerves, causes discharge ; and a similar current sent
 through a muscle or its uerves, causes it to contract.
All the circumstances which modify the nutrition of
 muscle, will  similarly affect that of the electrical
 organ."


           Dr. Philip's Experiments,
  The influence of magnetism on animals in augment-
ing the force  of the  contractions and expansious of
the muscles, and in altering the morbid and estab-
lishing the natural secretion, has been  proved  by a
great number of facts.  The experiments of Dr. Phi-
lip are so well known to the medical and philosophi-
cal world, that it is  almost  an act of supererogation
to repeat them ; but as this  little work is intended for
all classes  of readers, we deem it advisable to intro-
duce an abstract of them.   Dr. Philip " found that the
secretion of the gastric juice in the stomach, which
had been suspended by the division of the 8th pair of
nerves, was restored on establishing the voltaic cur-
 rent of electricity through  the divided portion of the
nerves next to the stomach.  The accuracy of the
experiments on which this conclusion is founded, was
for a long time disputed ;  but it has been lately  satis-
factorily  established, by their  careful  repetition  at
 the Royal Institution, by Dr. Philips, in conjunction 
335
with  Mr. Brodie.  Dr. Philip  appears  also to have
succeeded in showing, that when the lungs and mus-
cles are deprived of their proportion of the nervous
influence, so that their  functions are impeded, and
the breathing has become difficult and laborious, in-
Creased facility is obtained in carrying  on these
movements by the stimulus of the galvanic power.
  '• It appears, then,  from  these facts, that the  gal-
vanic energy is capable of supplying the place of the
nervous influence ;  so that,  by means  of its assist-
ance,  the stomach,  otherwise  inactive, digests  its
food as usual, and the  muscular apparatus  of the
lungs are  roused from a state of comparative torpor
to one of healthy action."  Dr.  Philip, indeed, con-
tends '' that the inferences  deducible from these ex-
periments, establish  the  identity of galvanism, elec-
tricity, and nervous influence."
           M. Donnie's Experiments.

                   Extracts.

  I.  The whole of the tegumentary surface secretes
an acid humor.
  2.  The  alimentary canal,  from the mouth to the
anus, except the stomach, secretes an alkaline mucus,
  3.  The mucous and synovial membranes secrete an
alkaline fluid.
  4.  The external  acid, and  internal  alcaline mem-
branes of the body, represent the two poles of a gal'
vanic pile, whose effects are  appreciable by a galva-
nomctor.  For, if one of the conductors of this instru-
ment be placed in contact with the  mucous mem-
brane of the mouth, and the  other conductor bo ap-
plied to the skin, the magnetic needle will be found
to show a  deviation of 15 to  20, or even 30 degrees ;
and the direction of the needle proves that the mu-
cous or alcaline membrane indicates a negative elec-
tricity, and the cutaneous or aoid membrane a posi-
tive electricity. 
336
0. The acid humors of the system may become al-
                 kaline, and the alkaline may be-
                 come  acid, in a state of disease.
                  If figures of men and women
                 are cut out of paper, and placed
                 between two suspended metauc
                 plates, charged with electricity,
                 or electro-magnetism, they will
                 exhibit a rapid dance, as seeu in
                 the figure.
                  These evidences are perfectly
                 conclusive in regard to the iden-
                 tity of the magnetic forces with
                 those  that produce sensation, in-
                 clination, and motion in man and
                 other animals, which with a great
                 variety of other evidences, afford
                 interesting and beautiful  illus-
                 trations of the action of the hith-
                 erto undefined and apparently un-
                 definable nervous fluid, spirit or
                 vital principle of physiologists.
 
      337
PHRENOLOGY.
  1. Individuality
  3. Form.
  8. Language.
  4. Size.
  6. Weight.
  6. Color.
  7. Order.
  8. Calculation.
 9. Thirstiness.
10. Alimentiveness.
11  Acquisitiveness.
12. Constructiveness.
13. Tune.
14. Time.
16. Locality.
10. Eventuality.
17. Comparison.
18. Causality.
19. Mirthfulness.
90. Ideality.
31. Sublimity
93. Hope.
33. Marvelousness
24. Imitation.
26. Suavity.
26. Penetration.
27. Benevolence.
26. Veneration.
29. Firmness.
30. Self Esteem.
31. Concentrativeness.
32. Inhabitiveneas.
33. Philoprogenitivenes
34. Amativeness.
35  Voluntary Motion.
36. Combativeness.
37. Connubial Love.
38. Adhesiveness.
39. Ostentation.
40. Approbativeness.
41. Conscientiousness
43. Cautiousness.
43. Secretiveness.
44. Destructiveneaf. 
 
339
  C Cerebrum.  D, Cerebellum, E. Dcstructiveness   F Cau-
sality.  G. Comparison.  H Medulla Oblongata 
e Cere
    340
A u, con»ection
,ltb »»•
Brain.
c c. The a^kferior &»&T^\ '** *^
 m m. Poster™1 k
■V 
341
■llous,  Congestive, and Yellow Fever.
 
 
343
  V, Vena cava descendens.  R L, right lung.  L L
leftiung-  H,heart. D, diaphragm. Liyr., liver^Stm
stomacn5.  C  colon,  or large  intestine, extending
alone each  side, and across below the stomach, af
seengin the figure  8, spleen, 1,1,1, small intestines 
  1. The right ventricle ;  the vessels to the right of
the figure are the middle coronary artery and veins ;
and those to its left, the anterior coronary artery nnd
veins.  2. The left ventricle.  3. The right auricle.
4. The left auricle. 5. The pulmonary artery. 6. The
right pulmonary artery.  7. The left pulmonary ar-
tery. 8. The remains of the ductus arteriosus. 9. The
arch of the aorta. 10. The superior vena cava. 11. The
right arteria innominata, and in front of it the vena
innominata.  12. The right subclavian vein, and be-
hind it  its corresponding artery.  13. The right com-
mon carotid artery and vein.  14. The left vena  inno-
minata.  16. The left carotid artery and vein. 16. The
left subclavian vein and artery.  17. The trachea.  18.
The right bronchus.  19. The left bronchus.  20,  20,
The pulmonary veins :  18, 20, form the  root of the
right lung ; and 7,19, 20, the root of the left.  21. The
superior lobe of the right lung.  22. Its middle  lobe
23. Its inferior lobe.  24. The superior lobe of the left
lung  25  Its inferior lobe 
              345

Lungs and Bronchial Tubes*
  1.—Larynx.  2.—Trachea or wind pipe.—
6.—Left lung.  7.—Large Bronchial  or air
tubes  of  right lung.  8.—Minute tubes,  or
continuation of the  large  ones, which termi-
nate in air cells. 
 
347
  Genital Organs.—Pelvis divided in the median
line, and laid open from the right side.
  1.' Vertebral column.—2. Termination of the large
intestine.—8. Bladder.—4. Ureter.—6 and 6. Vasa de-
ferentia.—7. One of'the vesiculffi seminales, opening
into the vas deferens to formj 8. The ductus ejacula-
torious  communis.—0.  Prostate.—10.  Membranous
portion  of the urethra.—\l. Triangular ligament.-
13.  One of Cowper's glands.—18.  Urethra.—14. Bulb
of the urethra.—15.  Pubis. 
348
PLATE A
 
3\9
  Contents of the Female Chest, Abdomen and Pelvis.
 -A. The Heart.—B B. The Lungs.—C. The Liver.
 —D. The Stomach.—E. The Spleen—a. The Aorta.
 —b.  The Vena Cava.—c. The Trachea, or windpipe.
 —f f f. The Colon, or  largo intestine.—g. The blad-
der.—hh.  Theovaries.—1. The Womb.—jj. The up-
  rir part of the small intestines, called the jejunum.—
  k.  The lower part of the small intestines, called the
ileum.—1.  The Gall Bladder.—mm. The Carotid Ar-
teries—Holtick. 
350
Fig. 1
 
3J1
$
  Fig. 1.  The posterior half of the Uterus after
A PERPENDICULAR  TRANSVERSE SECTION  OF  IT  HAS
been made.—1. Cavity of the body of the uterus : it
is continuous  with, 2. The  cavity of the  Fallopian
tubes, and, 3. The  cavity of the  neck.   In this  last
cavity there is seen an arborescent projection, called
the arbor vitse of the womb.—Ligament of the ovary.
  Fig. 2.—1. Bladder.—2. Urachus.—3. Anterior lig-
ament of the bladder. —4. Urethra.—5. Rectum.—6.
Laounss at the inferior extremity of the  rectum.—7.
Fallopian tube.—8. Ovary.—9. Uterus:  the  perito-
neum is seen to envelope it, and to pass from thence
on the bladder and on the  rectum.—10.—Vagina.—
11 and 12. Anterior and posterior pillars of the vagina.
M. Clitoris. 
352
FIG.
 
3."ij
  Fig. 1. A Lateral  Section of the Uterus, between
the second and third month of Pregnancy.
  No. 1,1,1 .—The Walls of the Uterus.  No. 2.—The
Vagina.  No. 3.—The membrane called the Decidua,
which lines  the  Cavity of the Uterus from the very
commencement of Pregnancy.  The  decidua is re-
flected, or doubled, the two folds being connected by
the dotted line.   No. 4.—The  membrane called the
Chorion, which is seen to be covered with Villosities,
or little blood vessels, like hairs.  No. 5.—The mem-
brane called the Amnion.  This contains the fluid
called the waters of the Amnion, in which the foetus
seems  to  swim.  No. 6.—The Foetus.  No.  7.—The
Placenta, or  mass of Blood vessels, which receives
the blood from the Uterus ; it is seen full of vessels,
like roots.  No. 8.—The Umbilical  cord, or Navel
String.  One end of this is connected with the Foetus,
and the other with  the Placenta. The blood flows
down it from the mother to the child.  No. 9, 9.—The
ends of the Fallopian Tubes, cut off".
  Fig. 2.  An Ovum of about twelve days after impreg-
nation ; natural  size.  No. 1.—The  Embryo.  2.—
The Vesicle, or Vitelius.  The Embryo and  Vitelius
are seen to be connected by a cord. 3.—The Amnion.
4.—The Chorion.
  Fig. 3.—An Ovum of about twenty days,  natural
size.  Numbers aud references same as for Fig. 2.
  Fig. 4.—The Fo?tus at about twenty days.—1. The
Foetus.—2. The Vitelius.—3. The Amnion.—4. The
Chorion.—5. The Decidua. -6. The Umbilical cord.
-HoUick 
354
          Generative Organs of Flania.

  Analysis of the Flower of the White Lily, to show
the Organs of Generation in a plant.
 
355
  a, a.—The Petals, or colored Leaves,  b.—The Sta-
mens, or male Organs,  c.—The Pistil, or female Or-
gan,  d.—The filaments, or threads of the Stamens.
e.—The Anthers, or heads of the  Stamens, f.—The
Stile,  or Thread of the Pistil,  g.—The Stigma, or
head of the Pistil,  h— The Germ, or rudiments of
the seeds, answering to the Ovary in an Animal.
  The Pollen (or semen), is formed on the Anthers ;
is shed on to the Stigma, and passes down the stile
(or Fallopian Tube), and  so reaches the  Germ  (or
Ovary).—HoUick. 
356
 
357
              Seminal Animalculae.

  This plate exhibits the form of the Seminal Animal.
cule ; and also its resemblance  to that of the Brain
and Spinal Marrow, to illustrate the Neuro Spermatic
Theory of Generation.                   F
  No. 1, 1, 1.—Magnified views of the  Seminal Ani-
malculse, enlarged many  thousand times.  No. 3.—
The same in bunches, as they are usually seen  No
8.—The Brain.  No. 4.—The Spinal Marrow proceed-
ing from the Brain, with the nerves branching from
it cut off.
  The resemblance between the  Brain and  Spinal
Marrow, and one of the Seminal Animalcules, will be
seen at once by comparing them together as they are
placed side by side. -Hollick 
358
ARTERIES.
  The Nerves
accompany the
Arteries in eve-
ry part of the
system. 
Posterior Spinal
  nerves. 
360
 
361
       OANGLI0NIC SYSTEM OF  PHRENIC LIFE.


  The figure on the opposite page is intended to show
&t one view the situation and comparative size of tho
ganglions of the brain, cerebellum, medulla oblongata,
and spinal nerves.

a a, Great superior ganglions—color, reddish grey.
b b, Great inferior ganglions—color, bluish white.
e e, Cerebellar ganglions—color, bluish white.
t ?', Olivary ganglions—color, bluish white.
h h h. Ganglions of spinal nerves.
n n, Pyramidal bodies—color, bluish white
o o, Restiform bodies—color, bluish white.
d d, Posterior  quadrigeminal  bodies — color,  bluish
      white.
c c, Anterior quadrigeminal bodies—color, bluish white.
s, Pineal gland—color, reddish grey.
/, Medulla oblongata—color, bluish white.
u, Spinal cord—color, bluish white.


          MAGNETIZED MEDICINES.
   It is now more than  thirty years since we first com-
 menced magnetizing medicines, and we have published
 during the last ten years  more than 25,000 copies of
 different works in which we have noticed this subject. It
 has, however, not only been denied, but the idea of mag-
 netizing medicine treated with  derision by  the profes-
 sors of our medical colleges and their satellites.  Baron
 Vou  Reichenbach, of  Vienna,  has, however, recently
 succeeded in magnetizing medicines, to thefull satisfac-
 tion of Berzelius of Stockholm, and of Dr. Gregory of
 Edinburgh.  Hahnemann first succeeded in doing so in
 Germany 
A'rrnrs nf the Face,
      and
Lymphatic Glands
   •f the JVeck-
  I  : <;i>f-.  iy-  ^ 'v ,°


•'\ i li" •   ' / /*'  '^O^Z 
 
                  364
  THE  ANATOMY  OF MAN'S BODY,
As governed by the twelve constellations, ac-
  cording to ancient Astrology.
T Head and Face,  n Arms,  ft Heart.
32 Neck,   b Breast, itr Bowels,  m Se-
crete.   ^ Reins.   $ Thighs.   J8* Legs.
YJ Knees.   K Feet.
  To know where the sign is, first find the day
of the month in the Almanac,and against the day
in the third column you have the sign, or place
in the moon; then find the sign; and it will give
you the part of the body it is supposed to govern. 
365
Fig. 2.
 
 
367
GLOSSARY.
*»* Per words net given here, see Index of Distaste
Ablation, Taking away, abstracting, or cutting oft*.
Ablution, Washing, cleansing.
Abnormal,  Irregular, unnatural, singular, misshaped.
Absorption, The act of sucking up, attracting, or col-
    lecting, as with a sponge.
Absorbents, Vessels taking up and conveying the lac-
    teal and lymphatic fluids.
Abscess, A collection of pus In a cavity, the result of
    morbid process.
Accessories, Helping, additional, two nerves running
    from the medulla oblongata.
Acetate of Lead, A combination of acetic acid, or vine-
    gar, with lead.
Acini, Minute kernels, tubercula, or glandiform cor
    puscles.
Acoustic Nerve, Belonging to the ear, hearing, or sound.
Adipose, Fatty, containing fat
Alkaline, Having the quality of an alkali, or fixed salt,
    caustic.
Anastomatic,  Quality of removing  obstruction, deob-
    struent.
Anaphrodisia, Absence of venery, impotence, sterility.
Anastomose,  To join  two vessels, union of parts of
    currents.
Aneurism,  A tumor, formed by the  dilatation or lesion
    of an artery.
Angina, Quincy, or sore throat.
Antiphlogistic, Opposed to Inflammation; depleting.
Antrum, Cavities in bones, the entrance to which  is
    smaller than the bottom.
Aorta, The great artery arising out of the left ventricle
    of the  heart 
                       368

Arachnoid, Inner membrane covering the brain.
Asphyxia,  Suspended animation or  motions of the
    heart, swooning or fainting.
Asthenic, Relating to a debility of the vital forces.
Ataxic,  Pertaining to disorders characterising nervous
    fevers.
Atony, Want of tone or force, general debility.
Atrophia, Marasmus—washing of the body.
Auscultation, To listen, to learn by sound  through the
    stethoscope or otherwise, the diagnosis of diseases
    in the heart and lungs.
Automatic, Mechanical, like or belonging  to an auto-
    maton.
Auditory, Relating to the ear.
Auricles, Right and left auricular cavities of the heart.
Axillary, Belonging to the armpit.
Bronchia, The tnbes arising from the throat, or trachaea,
    and conveying air into the lungs.
Bronchitis,  Mucosis of the lining  membrane  of the
    bronchial tubes.
Bronchophony, Guttural sound  of words in the lungs,
    like that in the character of Punch.
Calamus Scriptorius, A  furrow or canal in the fourth
    ventricle of the brain.
Calx, Lime, preparations of lime used medicinally.
Cardiac, Relating to the heart or upper orifice of the
    stomach.
Carnivorous, Feeding or living on flesh.
Caries,  Ulcerations of the bones.
Catarrhal, Relating to a discharge from a mucous mem-
    brane.
Catamenia, The menses.
Catenation, A link, a regular connection.
Catholicons, General remedies, panaceas.
Catheter, A tube or instrument introduced through the
    urinary passage  into the bladder.
Cautery, A burning iron, a caustic.
Cellular, Consisting of cells or cavities, tissues of the
    body.
Cellulosity, State of having cells.
Cerebellec, Belonging to the cerebellum.
Cerebelli,  The two hemispheres of the cerebellum. 
                       369

Cerebellum, The small brain, posterior to the cerebrum-
Cerebral, Belonging to the brain.
Cerebrum, The brain anterior to the cerebellum.
Cervical, Belonging to the neck.
Chloride of Mercury, A compound, formed by chlorine
    and mercury.
Chronic Diseases, Those of long duration, organic, im-
    peding performance of functions.
Chyle, A white fluid produced by digestion and assi-
    milation.
Cineriterous,  Color of ashes, the part of the brain, toe.,
    of that color.
Circulatory System, Circulation of the blood and other
    fluids of the body.
Circumflexus Palati, A muscle of the sphenoid bone.
Clavicle. The collar bone.
Clinical,  Relating to discourse or practice at the bed of
    the sick.
Commissure,  A joint of union, senm or bridge.
Comparative  Physiology,  Knowledge or doctrine  of
    functions, derived from study of the lower order of
    animals.
Condyloid,  Shape of a  condyle, or soft protuberant end
    of a  bone.                      •
Congestion,  An unnatural accumulation of  blood  or
    other fluid in an organ.
Conglobate,  Formed into balls—lymphatic glands.
Conjunctiva,  External  coat of the eye.
Contractility, Power or susceptibility of contraction or
    shrinking.
Contractile, A muscle, having the power of contracting
    or shortening.
Convolutions, Turnings, undulating  or  tortuous pro-
    jections, as of the brain, intestines, &c. -
Corpora   Restiformia,  Resting bodies, medullary pro-
    jections from the top of the medulla oblongata.
Corpora Striata, Two ganglions in the ventricles of the
    brain.
Coronary, Belonging to the crown or top, as of the head
Costal, Relating to the ribs.
Corpus Ollvare,  Olivary body or ganglion in the medal
    la oblongata. 
                        370

Cortical, The exterior skin, rind, bark.
Costive, Bound, retentive, close.
Craninm, Tho skull.
Crepitus. Pertaining to crackling  sounds in breathlnfc
    ebullitions of air, or the frictions of bones.
Cribriform, Resembling  a sieve or riddle, like the eth-
    moid bone.
Crura, Bodies resembling legs or roots, as the cnra ce-
    rebri.
Crypts (Cryptm, pi.), Follicles, cavities, small glands or
    cells in the membranes.
uystis,  A bag, the urinary bladder.
Decussation,  Crossing, intersecting at angles, &c
Degenerescence, A change for the words In the compo-
    sition of fluids or solids ol  the  body, or the struc-
    ture of an organ.
Diagnosis, Discrimination of diseases—" What is the
    matter 1"
Diaphragm, The midriff, a muscular  partition dividing
    the chest from the belly.
Diathesis, Disposition, predisposition to certain diseases
Dorsal, Belonging to the back ; the second division of
    the spine, consisting of twelve  vertebra?.
Dorsal Medulla, Marrow of the dorsal vertebra.
Dual, Two.
Duality, Relating to two.
Duodynamics, Laws relating to the magnetic forces.
Duct, A tube, canal, or  passage for fluids.
Duodenum,  First small intestine  recelviug the food
    from the stomach.
Dyspnoea. Difficulty of  breathing.
Electro-dynamic, Laws relating to electrical  forces, ice.
Elixirs, Liquid extracts, the essence,  a medical cordial.
Ellipticity, Oval, liki; an egg.
Embryo, A germ,  el imentary organization, foetus.
Eczema, A hot, painful eruption.
Encephalic, Belongi ig  to the head or brain.
Erotic, Loving, prod iced by love.
Ethmoid Bone, Lyii g  horizontally with the eyes and
    over the nose.
Exacerbation, Increase in the symptoms of disease.
Excrete, To separate, to throw off. 
371
Expectoration, The act of expelling excretions from the
    chest—the matter expelled.
Extra vasated, Forced out of the proper vessel or chan
    nel, as with stagnant blood.
Fascia, A membrane covering the muscles.
Femoral, Relating or belonging to the thigh.
Fibrillar,  Small fibres.
Flexor and Extensor muscles, the  offices of Which are
    to  extend and contract.
Flocculi, Flakes, like snow, leaf-like.
Fmtal,  Relating to the foetus, or child in the womb.
Follicles,  Little excreting glands, bags, or folds, in
    mucous membranes.
Foramen (Foramina, pi.), A hole or opening.
Foramen Magnum, A large hole or opening at the base
    of the  brain,  through which the spinal marrow
    enters the brain.
Foramen Lacerum, A hole In the os phenoldes.
Formula;, Forms of medicinal preparations or prescrip-
    tions.
Fornix, A medullary body in the brain.
Fossa  (Fosse, pi.),  A groove or ditch.
Frontal,  Belonging to the front, or forehead.
Fungus (Fungi, pi.), A spungy excrescence.
Ganglions, Organs formed  of agglomerated globules in
    the brain—the posterior  spinal  nerves, and along
    the course of the sympathetic nerves.
Gangrenous, Mortification, partial death  or  disorgani-
    zation of any  organ or limb.
Gestation,  The act or period of carrying young.
Gibbosity,  Curvature of the  spine;  relating  to rickets
    and caries of the vertebra?.
Glands, Organized bodies, situated internally and exter-
    nally, to secrete fluids or modify those of others.
Glandular, Of the form or texture of glands.
Globate,  Like a globe.
Glottis. The opening of the windpipe or larynx, serving
    in the formation of the voice.
Glossopharyngeal, Belonging to the tongue and pharynx.
Hectic, Fover,  preternatural  irritability,  febrile excite-
    ment, with emaciation.
Homogeneous, Of the same nature;  similarity of parte. 
                       31-2

Hydriodates,  Salts consisting of the hydriodic acid com.
    bined with an oxide.
Hydrocephalic, Relating to dropsy, or water on the brain.
Hyoideal, Relating to the os hyoides.
Hypertrophy, The state of a part in which nutrition Is
    performed with great or unnatural activity,  swelling.
Innervation, Weakness, relaxation of the nervous power.
Increments, Increases, additions, or productions.
Inosculate, Inter-union  of the extremities of arteries,
    veins, &c.; to unite by contact.
Infinitesimal, Indefinitely small quantities.
Intercerebral, Between the hemispheres or parts of the
    brain.
Intercostal, Between the ribs.
Integument, The  skin, an envelope, bark, a covering.
Intermembranous, Between the membranes.
Inguinal, Relating or belonging to the groin.
Involuntary Muscles, Those performing their functions
    without the aid of the will.
Iodine, A violet-colored liquid, obtained  by burning a
    marine plant,  and the ashes with sulphuric acid.
Iris, The variegated circle surrounding the pupil of the
    eye.
Lamina;,  Thin plates or layers.
Laryngeal, Relating to the larynx.
Larynx, Upper part of the trachea or windpipe.
Leyden Jar, A glass vessel, covered with tin foil, for
    electrical purposes.
Ligamenta Dentata, A  small  ligament supporting  the
    spinal marrow.
Ligament, An elastic and strong membrane, connecting
    moveable bones, &c.
Lobes, Round projecting parte or divisions of organs, as
    of the brain, lungs, &c.
Locus Niger,  Dark-colored cells or spots.
Longus Colli, A flexor muscle of the neck.
Lumbar,  Relating to the loins—five vertebras  of  the
    third division of the spine.
Lymph A clear fluid, found in the lymphatic vessels,
    mixing with the chyle and blood.
Lymphafc Tubes, Small vessels of the  body, contain
    Ing ct carrying lymph. 
373
Magnetism,  The two innate forces in every kind of
    matter, and which, in their organized state, produce
    motion everywhere and in everything.
Maligna, Malignant.                       m
Mammalia, Animals which suckle their young.
Mammary, Pertaining to the breasts.
Manipulator, One practising by manual operations.
Marasmus, Chronic mucosis, a wasting disease, ema-
    ciation.
Masseter,  A strong muscle, closing the jaw in chewing.
Matity,  Relating to sounds afforded by the percussion of
    the chest.
Maxillary, Pertaining to the jaw bones.
Maximum and Minimum,  The greatest and least—indi-
    cating the greatest and least number, quantity, or
    power in any case.
Median, The middle line.
Mediastinum, The  fold of the membrane separating the
    chest into two  parts.
Medulla, The marrow.
Medulla Oblongata, The union of the parts of the brain
    to form the spinal marrow.
Medulla Spinalis, The spinal marrow.
Membrane, A  thin, expanded substance, composed of
    elastic fibres,  interwoven like net-work, covering
    and lining the organs  of the body.
Mercury,  Quicksilver—a preparation  of  mercury by
    volatiiization.
Mesmerism, Animal magnetism.
Mesenteric, Relating to the mesentery
Mesentery, A double fold of the membrane lining the
    abdomen and covering the Intestines.
Meteorologico-Medical, Diseases depending on the atmo-
    sphere or the weather.
Microscopic, Seen  only by  the microscope—an instru-
    ment for magnifying minute objects.
Molecular, Small, diminutive, elementary parts.
Motor, Moving, prompting, or acting.
" Mouvements d'ensemble," Combined movements.
Moxa,  An application of cotton, wool, or other sub-
    stance, which is burned on the part intended to be
    snuterized. 
                       374

Mucous Membranes, Linings of the  organs and lnnet
    surfaces of serous membranes.
Mucosis, Disease of the mucous membranes.
Muco-aerous, Partaking  of the quality of mucus and
    serum, or of the mucous and serous membranes.
Mucous, Of the nature of mucus.
Mucous Rale, Rattle or sounds produced by the ah*  In
    breathing, passing through mucus.
Mucus,  A mucilage, a  glutinous thready semi-transpa-
    rent fluid, of a salt savor, excreted by the  mucous
    membranes.
Muriate, A salt formed by the combination of muriatic acid
    and a base,  as soda, or any of the earths or metals.
Muscles, Regular  structure or fleshy bodies, composed
    of fibres, and adapted to distinct functions in all the
    varied motions of life.
Naso Palatine, Relating to the nose and palate.
Nephralgia,  Pain or disease in the kidneys—belonging
    to the kidneys.
Nerves, Cords  composed of filaments, conveying sen
    satlon, motion, and will, to and from tho  brain.
Nervous filament  A thread or fibre of a nerve.
Nitrate, A salt formed  of nitric acid and an earth or a
    metal.
Normal, Natural, by rule, upright.
Nosologists, Those skilled in  the classification of dis-
    eases.
Nnrilema, The  investing sheath  of the nerves.
Nutation,  Tremulous motion of the earth's axis.
Nux Vomica, The vomit nut of India.
CEdematous, Relating to a swelling  from a serous fluid
    in the cellular texture.
Olfactory, Belonging to the organs of smell—sense  of
    smelling.
Olivary, Belonging to the two prominences on the me-
    dulla oblongata.
Ophthalmic, Relating to the eye.
Os Coccyx, The lowest bone of the sacrum.
Os Sacrum, The fundamental hone  of the spinal co-
    lumn—of pyramidal form, base upward.
Os Hyoides, The bone forming the base and support of
    the  tongue. 
375
 Oxyde, A rust or substance, formed by the combination
    of oxygen and a metal.
 Panacea, Universal remedy for human diseases.
 Pancreas, A large gland, excreting a kind of saliva, and
    pouring it into the duodenum—the sweet-bread.
 Papillary, Having emulgent vessels, or resemblances of
    paps.
 Par vagum, Eighth pair of nerves.
 Paralysis, Palsy, prostration of muscular power.
 Parietal, The two bones of the lateral and upper  parts
    of the skull.
 Pathology,  The  part of medicines relating to diseases,
    their causes, effects, and peculiarities.
 Patulous, Of the form of lips, or an extended flower.
 Peripheral, Of a round form—relating  to the circum-
    ference.
 Peritoneum, A serous membrane lining the abdominal
    cavity.
Pericardium, A membranous sack enveloping the heart.
Periosteum, A white fibrous membrane surrounding the
    bones.
 Pharmacopeia?,  Medical dispensatory, formula; of coin-
    pounding medicines, the rules  or bos* of pharmacy.
 Photographic, The  art of producing impressions on
    metallic plates by means of the sun's rays.
 Phrenic, Relating to the mind.
 Phrenologists, Students and advocates of  the physi-
    ology of the brain and  nervous system as propound-
    ed by Gall, Spurzhelm, and others, and on which
    is now based a clear and beautiful system of mental
    philosophy.
 Physiology, The science  of organic life—the  natural
    constitution  and functions of organs, animal and
    vegetable.
 Ma Mater, A  thin membrane immediately investing the
    brain.
 Platina, A greyish white metal, heavier and more dur-
    able than gold.
 Plexuses, Junctions of vessels, nerves  or fibres, repre-
    senting net-work.
 Plenum, Fulness, fleshy, large.
 Pneumatica,  Pertaining to breathing.
 pollen. Vegetable semen or powder. 
                        376

Potassa, Potash—a vegetable alkali.
Premier Mobile, First cause, principle, or impulse.
Premier Moteur, First motive, or impulse to action.
Prolapsus Uteri, A falling down of the uterus.
Psoas, Two muscles situated on the lumbar and dorsal
    vertebra? (tender line).
Pterygoids, Two  processes or wings  of the sphenoid
    bone.
Pyramidal, Of the form of a pyramid-
Pulmonary Catarrh, Mucosis of the membrane lining
    the inside of the air tubes of the lungs.
Purulent,  Matter—pus.
Quinine,  An alkaline substance, obtained from the
    cinchonas, valuable bitter barks from  South Ame-
    rica.
Rachitis, Curvature of the spine—the rickets.
Rectilinear,  Straight in straight  lines.
Rectus Externus,  Muscle attached to the  foramen op-
    ticum and the sphenoid bone.
Ramollissement, Branching like boughs, small sprigs.
Renal, Relating to the kidneys.
Restiform Columns, Parts of the brain.
Retina, A delicate and  sensitive nervous membrane
V   (considered an extension of the  optic nerve), on
    which the images of objects are received.
Rodentia,  Gnawers—a class of  animals  which  gnaw
    their food, as the rat, beaver, squirrel,  &c.
Ruminating, A class of animals which chew the cud- ■
    reflection.
Sacral,  Relating to  the  sacrum—a bone  forming the
    posterior part of the pelvis.
Salaclna, The active principle of the willow bark (sallx
    helix).  A substitute for quina, in intermittents, Slc.
Salivatory, Belonging to  the glands excreting  saliva or
    spittle.
Sanative, Power of healing—healthful.
Sanguineous,  Relating to  or indicating  a fulness of
    blood ; tinged with blood.
Sarsaparilla, The name of a sudorific plant of little
    medicinal virtue.
Scirrhous, Pertaining to sclrrhus—a disease of the
    glandular structures,  and known by its hardness,fee. 
                        377

 Sclerotica, A hard white membrane covering the globe
     of the eye.
 Scrofula, A  depravation of the humors of the body
     chronic swellings, breaking out in sores, &e.
 Secretion, The process of secreting from the blood, or
     from one fluid to another, by the lymphatic glands.
 Semiluna, A semicircular or half-moon shape.
 Semi-paraplegia,  A partial palsy of the lower half of
     the body, with the rectum and bladder.
 Sensorum Commune, Centre of sensations—the cere-
     brum.
 Sensory, The seat of sensation or of perception.
 Sequestration, The separation of  a diseased or dead
     part from the living.
 Serous, Partaking of serum—exudations  from serous
     membranes.
 Serous Membranes, Integuments or skin of the bones,
    organs, and body.
 Serosis, Disease of serous membranes.
 Serum, A thin and yellowish part of the blood—whey.
 Seton, An issue or rowell.
 Spheroidal,  Having the form of an oblong or oblate
    body.
 Sphenoid Bone, A wedge-shaped bone  at the  base of
    the skull.
 Spheno-palatina,  Muscles of the palate.
 Spinal Marrow, The medullary substance of the spine.
Spinal, Belonging to the back-bone or spine.
 Splanchnic,  Relating to the diseases of the bowels, or
    to the three  cavities of  the viscera,  the  bowels,
    head and chest.
Spleen, The milt one of the  viscera of the body-
    anger, spite, melancholy.
Spongloles, Sponges, substances like sponges.
Spontaneity,  Voluntariness, willingness.
Sterility, Barrenness.
Sternum,  The breast-bone.
Stethoscope.  An  instrument  used  for determining by
    sound the diseases of the chest.
Sthenic, Excessive excitement, or excess of strength in
    organic actions.
Striated, Fibrous, channelled, radiated. 
378
Strumous, Scrofulous—pertaining to Struma, the king's
    evil, Ace.
Stylo-Glossal, Muscles expanding the tongue.
Submaxillary, Under or below the jaw-bone.
Sulcus,  Groove—as at the  end of  bones and  other
    organs, and in the interstices of the brain.
Sulphate,  A salt formed of sulphuric acid and an earth.
Supra and Infra Orbita, Situated above and below the
    orbits of the eye.
Syphilis, An infectious or poisonous disease, commu-
    nicated by virus and contact, as in coition.
Sympathetic, Relating to, depending on, sympathy—the
    action and reaction of one part or  organ on another.
Synovial,  Pertaining to synovia—a fluid  like the white
    of an egg,  exhaled  from membranes  around the
    joints.
Tactile, Perceptible to the touch.
Tactual, Relating to touch and tact
Tegumentary, Belonging to the outer  parts—the skin or
    covering.
Telia Cellulosa,  The cellular or adipose membrane.
Temporal, Relating to the  temple.
Tompcranient, The constitution, or tho  remarkable dif-
    ferences of men, arising from  the  peculiarities  of
    organization, relations, and constituents.
Temperament, Susceptible or insusceptible to magnetic
    or mesmeric influence.
Tetanic, Relating to a permanent contraction of the
    muscles.
Thalamus, The place where a nerve  originates—an
    irregular surface in the ventricles of the brain.
Thalmi Optiei, Two round bodies in the brain.
Thoracic,  Belonging to the chest or breast.
Thyroid, Having the form of a shield—belonging to the
Thnraic, Belonging to the chest or breast.   Larynx.
Testes, Testicles, two oval  bodies in the scrotum.
Tibia, Shin-bone—flute or hautboy.
Tissues, The parts of the  body which form the organs
    — the  anatomical elements  of the body and  of its
    diseases.
Tonsils, Glands in the throat, almonds of the ear.
Trachea, Windpipe, composed of cartilaginous rings.
Trigeminus, The fifth pair of nerves. 
                        379

 Trisplanchnic, Belonging to the three orders of viscera
    in the three splanchnic cavities—the head, chest,
    and abdomen.
 Tuber, A knob, knot, or little swelling.
 Tubercle, An enlarged lymphatic knob, knot, or gland.
 Tubercula, Tubercular disease of the  lymphatic sys-
    tem ;  scrofula.
 Tubercular, Having knots, knobs, or little swellings.
 Tuberculous,  Scrofulous.
 Tuberculosis, Tuberculous disease.
 Tubercular, Relating to tubercula.
 Tubercles, Tumors in the substance of organs.
 Tumefied, Of the form and nature of tumor or swelling.
 Tympanum,  The drum or barrel of the ear.
 Typhoid,  Relating to typhus, as  typhoid or typhus
    fever.
 Uterus, The womb.
 Uvula, Pap of the throat, belonging to the palate.
 Vascular.  Relating to or consisting of vessels—arterial,
    venous, or lymphatic.
 Vagina, the canal or passage from the vulva to the womb.
Vesicles, Vessels, bags, or bladders.
Ventricle, Cavities in the brain—the lower, right and
    left cavities of the heart.
Vertebrated Animals, Those having a spine or  skeleton.
Vermiform, Resembling a worm.
Villi,  Delicate fibres on parts  of the body, as on the
    lips, &c.
Villous, Pertaining to villi.
Virus, Poison, Infectious excretion.
Vlscus (Viscera, pi.), One of the viscera.
 Vivi-Sectors,   Those practising  dissections on  living
    animals.
Vulva, Aperture to the vagina.
Volition, The will; the act of willing  or determining
    by choice.
 Voluntary Muscles, Those acting from the will.
 Zoophyte, The class of organic beings partaking  of
    both animal and vegetable life.
 Zygomatic, Relating to the zygoma  or cheek-bone. 
 
INDEX.
                                            Pagk
 Abbreviations,................................ .331
 Accidental Cataract,............................317
 Acetate of Iron,.................................274
 Aconite..........................................91
 Action of Medicines...........................214
 Acute Diseases of the Serous Surfaces,...........78
  "      'c       "   Mucous  "................85
 Admonitions,  ....................................88
 Ague and Fever,................................276
 Albuminous Urine...............................301
 Allopathy, or Old Practice of Medicine,..........27S
 Amenorrnoea,  .........•.......................... 54
 Amputation at the middle of the leg,  ...........324
 Anaemia,...................,....................285
 Ana?sthcsia, Loss of Sense of Touoh,............ 109
 Anatomy and Physiology,.......................241
 Aneurism, ......................................286
 Antrum,.........................................57
 Anus, Artificial,  .............................297
 Aphonia.............................69, 197, 288, 326
 Apoplexy, ................................'......283
 Appendix, ......................................329
 Ascitis, or Dropsy of the Abdomen, ............ 173
 Asphyxia, ........................,.............288
 Asthma,....................................108,288
Atmosphere. Changes in,........................219
Atrophia of the Muscles, &c,...................210
Belladonna,  ..................................89, 90
Bowels, Inflammation of,........................393
Brain, Magnetizing,..............................65
Breast, or  Mamma?,..............................55
Bright's Disease, or Albuminuria,...............302
 Bronchitis (in infants)...........................288 
"1 .V
Bronchitis, Acute.............................q,""«22
          Chronic,  .........................81,288
Bursa Mucosa................................... 83

Caries of the Teeth,............................325
Catalepsy, .......................................fi8
Catarrh, Chronic Nasal,..........................69
Cerebellum and Uterus,..........................55
Cases................................95. 97, 100, 159
Chlorosis, ......................................54
Cholera, Asiatic,  ............................85, 326
  "     Infantum, i..............................88
  "     Sporadic................................85
Chorea, St. Vitus's Dance.........................58
Chronic Diseases of the Serous Surfaces,.........50
  "     Mucosis, or  Bronchitis,.................170
  '•    Serosis of Uterus,  Stomach, or Skin,.....172
Circular Amputation,...........................325
Clairvoyance, Specimen of.  .....................158
Clairvoyant Examination of Disease,............146
    "       Powers.............................143
Cleft Palate, and Staphyloraphy,................290
Colic...........................................107
Colon,...........................................52
Compound Dislocation of the Astragalus,........315
Constipation,  ...................................293
               "      during Pregnancy.........294
Consumption,......................175, 181. 189, 211
Croup,---i...................................... 86
Cynanche,.....................................292
Cystis,...........................................53
Cystotomy,.....................................304
Deafness,  .......................................59
Degrees, Light and Images of,..................123
   "     in the Magnetic state,...................116
Delirium Tremens............................'. .280
Depression of the Crystalline Lens..............317
Diabetes  Insipidus,  .............................301
   "     Mcllitus,  .............................301
Diarrhoea,...........................69, 87, 296, 326
   '•   in young infants,.......................294
Diseases of Mucous Surfaces......................28 
383
Duality of Diseases, and their Duod vnamic Treat-
      ment, .....................................212
Duodynamics, .................................19
Directions for running the Rotary Magnetic  Ma-
      chines, ....................................3"
Duodenum......................-................52
Dysentery,.................................107, 326
Dyspepsia,  .....................................293
Donnie's, M., Experiments,......................335
Eczema, Impetiginoides.........................321
   "     of the hands (chronic),.................318
   "     of the scalp............................318
   "     of the scrotum, penis, anus............318
Effects of the Rotary Magnetic Machines,.........37
Enterotomy after operation in Hernia,...........297
Epilepsy,....................................58,282
Epistaxis,.................... ..................-"»'
Erysipelas,  ......................................88
Eye, Acute Inflammation of,....................315
 "   Diseases of............'.....................57
Eyelid. Wounds' of,.............................317
Examinations of patients at great distances,.....151
Fainting Fits....................................7J
Fever and Ague.................................107
  "   Scarlet. .'..............................80,275
  «   Tvphus,..................................105
Fevdrs, Bilious. Congestive. Yellow, .............80
First dressing after Amputation,................325
Fistula in aim...................................297
  "       Lachrymalis..........................317
Forceps. Application of.  ....................309, 310
Fraenum lingua?.................................290
Galvanism in uterine inertia,.......;...........303
Ganglions of the Spinal Nerves,   ..............23, 24
Gland. Prostate...................................63
Gonorrhoea.....................................327
Griswold's, Rev. S..  Experiments,...............133
Ha?maturia. or Bloody Urine.................108, 302
Hemorrhage during Amputation,...............325
     '•        from Lungs,.......................70
Haemorrhagic Diathesis,.......................287
Hemorrhoids,  ..................................297
              Internal Bleeding.................299 
384
Hahnemann's Corollaries,.......................246
    ''     Directions for magnetizing medicines, 247
    "     and Homoeopathic Medicine,.........207
Hare Lip........................................290
Headaches, ......................................58
Heart, ..........................................51
  '•    Functional Diseases of,..................285
Hernia, Radical  cure of.........................295
  "    Strangulated,............................295
Hip Joint. Dislocations...........................315
    "    Inflammation of,.......................314
Hooping Cough,.................................84
Hunnewell's Extracts,.........................243
Hydrocele......................................70
Hydrophobia...................................280
Immobility of the Lower Jaw....................315
Impressionists in the magnetic state,............144
      '•       their prescriptions,..............155
Impressions transferred,........................155
Information necess'y for distant examinations, 152,156
Incontinence of urine (the result of stricture), ...303
Intestines........................................53
Itch.............................................320
Joints and Limbs,................................59
Kidney Sj.........................................53
Knee Joint, Abscess of...........................313
  "     "  Chronic Inflammation of,............312
  "     "  Gouty Inflammation of, .............313
  "     "  Inflammation of Synovial Membrane, 312
  "     "  Loose Cartilages in,.................314
  "     "  Morbid Changes in Synovial Mem-
                 brane............      ........314
  "     "  Primary Ulceration of the Cartilages, 314
  l;     '•  Scrofulous Disease of,...............313
Larynx. Acute Serosis of.  .......................198
        Ulceration of,...........................197
Lateral Curvature of the Spine,.................195
Lawson, Dr., on the Magnetic Symptoms and
      Remedies, ..............................178
Leucorrhcea,.....................................54
Lichen, Lepra, Psoriasis, Impetigo, Stc.,..........321
Lithotrity,......................................304
Liver,  .........................................5<j 
38S
Lungs and Bronchial Tubes,....................76
  "    Hemorrhage from,...................70, 107
Magnetic Light and Magnetic Poles.  ............139
    "    Machine in Intermittent Fevers........260
    "    Miscellany.............................199
    "    Organization of the Human System,......7
    K           ,;      ';    Organs, ........16, 17
    "    Sleep, ................................116
    "     '■    Insensibility in,  ............  ...126
    "    symptoms and treatment, and the old As-
               trological  symptoms and treat-
               ment.............................95
Magnetized gold  pills...........................169
     "     rings, ..............................274
Magnetizing Aconite,............................91
     "      Belladonna......................89,90
     "      Dry Medicines...................92, 93
     "      in Lateral Curvatures of the  Spine, 203
     "      Medicines.......................89,90
     "      Water.............................94
Magnopathy, Animal Magnetism,................ill
Mania,.........................................281
  "    Puerperal,...............................282
Materia Medica and General Therapeutics,......323
Matteucci's Experiments,.......................332
Medicines in Acute Mucosis,....................2*7
    "          ••    Serosis......................234
    "       Chronic Mucosis,---..............239
    "          '•    Serosis,...................236
Menorrhagia,..................................311
      "     terminating in Cancer.............190
Menstrual Colic,................................107
Menstruation,  Irregular,........................108
Mesenteric Diseases,.............................63
Miscellaneous Recipes,.........................271
Moon, its influence on the Lungs and Uterus,......71
Mucous Disease of the  Throat, ...................83
   "    Surfaces, Acute Disease of,  .............85
   "       "     Chronic Disease of, ............81
   «    Tubercles, .............................321
Muscles,  .......................................262
   "    of Animal and of Organic Life, and their
              connexion with the spinal nerves, 261 
386
Muscles, Rheumatism,............................67
Na?vi...........................................287
Neuralgia,......................................284
           Gouty................................279
Nipples. Retracted...............................69
   "     Sore................................69,325
Nose, Diseases of................................57
Observations on Magnetizing.....................47
OHdema, ........................................288
Oesophagus...................................109
Omentum,.....................................109
Ovaria. ..,.......................................64
Oxalate of Lime, Cystine, &c,  ..................299
Palate, Operation on,  ...........................291
Talsy, Shaking, .............................____8t
Pancreas,.......................................109
Paracentesis  Thoracis,.........................289
Paralysis, ...................................58, 282
    "    Magnetic Sleep,.......................129
Parturition and Diseases of Women,.............307
Philips's, Dr., Experiments, .....................334
Phrenological Organs..........................106
Pleurisy,  .......................................108
Pneumonia.................................288, 325
Poisoning.......................................269
Poisons,  ........................................322
Polarity of the human hand......................133
   "           "     hands distinct,............137
Posterior Tibial Artery. Wound and Ligature of, 287
Preparations  for Magnetizing.....................48
Prolapsus Uteri..............................65l 310
Prostate Gland, Enlargement of.................304
Pruritus Vulvae, ..............................311
Puerperal Fever......,...........................337
Purulent Deposits in Urine.............'.'.!.'!'.*...301
Pyrosis,......................................293
Pytiriasis,  ......................................320
Recapitulation, ............................).'.' [ '2231
Remedies in  Acute Diseases of Mucous Surfaces, 86
             Chronic   "          "      «       82
    "        Acute,    "        Serous    " 81,89,91
             Chronic,  "          "      "    77 78
Repetition of Doses,..........................'gig 
387
Ckeumatic Gout,...............................279
Rheumatism, .................................67, 79
     "      Acute..............................278
     "      Chronic-Muscular,.................,. 278
     "      Tic Douloureux, Dizziness......205.216
Rotary Magnetic Machines,...................26, 28
Scarlatina,.....................................276
Scarlet Fever......................._...........106
  "      "   and Erysipelas....................169
Sciatica......................................... 285
Scrofula,  .....................................277
Scrofulous Ophthalmia.........................278
    "      Tumors, ............................277
Selection of  Medicines..........................213
Setons. Issues, and theAlpxa,  ....................94
Sick Headache......J|n___.....................56
Signs used in Prescriptions......................270
Skin, Diseases of,................................88
  '■      "   Chronic Eczema of the Face,.....318
Speculum Uteri.................................310
Spine, Distortion of...............................59
  "    Engraving of. .............................61
  "    French practice in Lateral Curvatures of, ..67
  "    Lateral Curvatures of.  ....................59
  "    Muscles  of. Engravings, ...............63,65
Spleen, ..........................................62
Stomach,  ........................................62
   "      and Uterus..........................65
Strabismus—Squinting...........................56
Subclavian Artery, Ligature of,.................287
Suspended Animation..........................108
Sutures after Amputation........................325
Swedenborg, Extracts  from.....................244
Symptoms of Diseases of the Serous Surfaces, ....22
    "     Magnetic,  ..............*...............76
Synopsis of the homoeopathic practice of medicine. 260
Syphilis. Secondary Form of, ....................307
         Tertiary,..............................307
Syphilitic Affections,............................308
    "     Alopoeeia,  ............................820
Testicle,.........................................70
Tetanus, Idiopathic and Traumatic,..............380
Throat,..........................................63 
388
Throat, Lateral View of,........................196
   "    Tubercular Disease of,..................107
Tic Douloureux,................................66
Toothache,..................................67, 325
Tracheotomy,..................................288
Transfusion,  ....................................809
Tubercula of the Muscles. Stomach and Liver, ..159
             "   Eyes—Scrofulous sore Eyes. ..194
    "        "   Knee, Lungs. Liver, Throat, &c, 164
    "        "     "   Stomach and Lungs, ....192
    "        "   Muscles.......................205
             "      "    Stomach and Liver, ...159
    "        "   Throat and Larynx,............197
    "        "     "  Lungs, Stomach and Liver, 161
Ulcer,-...................wB^..................325
Ulcerated Uterus.........l^f..............195, no
Urates, Uric Acid.  Phospha tes, ..................299
Ure's. Dr., Galvanic Experiments,  ..............329
Urinary Deposits (Apparatus), ..................298
Use of Medicine.........,.......................220
Uterine Hemorrhage,.......................308, 309
Uterus,  .........................'................64
  "    Inversion of, from short funis,............310
Varicocele,  ......................................70
Vibrating Machine, .............................31
Voice, Loss of,..................................[go.
Vulva, excessive irritation of,..................'. 108
Warts, .........................................320 
                   PLATES.

Arteries,  ......................................  358
Anatomical Signs.....................!!'.!..!!.'  364
Brain, ....................................'.."'.'.  339
Cerebellum,..........................".'.'.!!..!!  340
Fever....................................._222  341
Ganglionic system of Phrenic Life,".".'.'.'.'.".'."....'  360
Genital Organs—Female.....................350
   «      'V   —Male...........................  346
Generative Organs of Plants, ..................  354
Heart and Lungs,..............................  344
Lungs and Bronchial Tubes,...................  345
Miss Mary B. B..............................97.  365
Nerves of the Face............................'  362
Organs of the Chest and Abdomen.............'.  342
Organs of the Chest, Abdomen, and  Pelvis-
      Female, .................................  348
Phrenological Organs,.........................   337
Seminales Animalculse..........................  356
Spinal Nerves,  ...............................  359
Skeleton,......................................  363
Uterus, Ovum and Foetus,......................  352
  V. Vena cava descendens.  R L, right  lung.  L L,
leftiung.  H, heart. D. diaphragm. Livr.. liver.  Stm..
stomach.  C, colon,  or large intestine, extending
along  each  side, and across below  the  stomach, as
seen in the figure. S. spleen, 1, 1.1. small intestines. 
26 0
5«9